Operating Instructions

DVD Stereo System

Model No. SC-VK62D

Region number
The player plays DVD-Video marked with labels
containing the region number or "ALL".
Region Number
The Middle East, South Africa,
2
Saudi Arabia and Kuwait
Southeast Asia 3
Example: Southeast Asia

2
3 3
5
Before connecting, operating or adjusting the product,
please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.

GC GS GCS En Pe Ar RQT8092-G
L0205KW0
 Dear customer CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
Thank you for purchasing this product. USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
carefully. SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
System SC-VK62D DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
ENGLISH

Main unit SA-VK62D

Speakers SB-VK62
¡ Unless otherwise indicated, illustrations in these operating
instructions are for Southeast Asia.
¡ Operations in these instructions are described mainly with
the remote control, but you can perform the operations on
the main unit if the controls are the same.
For Saudi Arabia and Kuwait
Note on AC power supply cord
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differs according to the type of AC
mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted
and follow the instructions below.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
Figure A
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK
OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS
APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR
SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH
LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON
THE APPARATUS.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE
BOOKCASE, BUILT-IN CABINET
THIS UNIT IN A
OR IN ANOTHER
CONFINED SPACE. ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL
VENTILATED. TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE
THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT
OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
• DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT'S VENTILATION
OPENINGS WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS,
CURTAINS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS.
• DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH
AS LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
• DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily
accessible or the mains plug or an appliance coupler shall remain
readily operable.

This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile

telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile telephone.

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.

For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and Southeast Asia

CAUTION:
The AC voltage is different according to the area.
Be sure to set the proper voltage in your area before use.
(For details, please refer to page 5.)

Figure B Fuse cover

(Inside of product)

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Figure A

Fuse
(5 ampere)

Figure B

Fuse
(5 ampere)
RQT8092

2
2
 Safety precautions Table of contents

Placement Getting started

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These conditions
can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby shortening
the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Safety precautions ........................................................................ 3
Accessories ................................................................................... 3
Simple setup
STEP1 Positioning ............................................................... 4
STEP2 Video connections .................................................. 4

Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
Power cord protection
Ensure the AC power cord is connected correctly and not damaged.
Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
ENGLISH
STEP3 Speaker, radio and power supply connections .... 5
STEP4 The remote control .................................................. 5
STEP5 QUICK SETUP .......................................................... 6
STEP6 Setting the time ....................................................... 6
DEMO function ...................................................................... 6
Disc information ............................................................................ 7
Control reference guide ............................................................... 8
Disc operations
Discs — Basic play ..................................................................... 10
Discs — Convenient functions .................................................. 12
Disc information / Displaying current playback condition

Safety precautions/Accessories/Table of contents

Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
power cord can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is interrupted,
indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other problem that is not
covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect the AC power cord
and contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Electric shock
or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is repaired, disassembled
or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
(QUICK OSD) / Reviewing titles to play
(ADVANCED DISC REVIEW) / CD sequential play (CD MODE) /
Quick replay / Skipping 30 seconds forward /
Changing the zoom ratio / Changing the play speed /
Angle selection and Still picture rotation / Changing soundtracks /
Changing subtitles / Repeat play
Discs — Using navigation menus ............................................. 14
Playing data discs / Playing from the selected track in the CD /
Playing HighMATTM discs / Playing RAM discs
Discs — Program/Random play ................................................ 16
Program play (up to 32 items) / Random play /
ALL-DISC random play
Discs — Using on-screen menus .............................................. 17
Main Menu / Other Settings
Discs — Changing the player settings ..................................... 18
Radio operations
The radio ...................................................................................... 20
Manual tuning / Preset tuning / Selecting channels
Tape operations
Cassette tapes ............................................................................. 21
Playback / Recording

Karaoke operations
Accessories Enjoying karaoke ........................................................................ 22
Adjusting the echo effect / To record your karaoke performance /
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. To record your voice

AC power supply cord
For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait,
the Middle East, South
Africa and Southeast Asia
For Saudi Arabia and
Kuwait
1 Remote control
(N2QAJB000138)
1 Video cable
1 AM loop antenna
1 FM indoor antenna
2 Batteries for remote
control
Other operations
Sound field and sound quality ................................................... 23
Advanced Surround / Multi Re-master—Enjoying more natural
sound / Sound field control / Using the Manual Equalizer
(MANUAL EQ) / Using the Super Sound Equalizer
Using the timers .......................................................................... 24
The play/record timer / The sleep timer
Other functions ........................................................................... 25
Muting the volume / Auto-off function / Dimming the display /
Changing the main unit’s display
Using other equipment ............................................................... 25
Using an external unit / Using headphones / Operating a
television / Changing the main unit and remote control mode /
Optional antenna connections / Digital output /
Home Theater—Enjoying more powerful sound
Reference
Glossary ....................................................................................... 27
Troubleshooting guide ............................................................... 28
Specifications .............................................................................. 30
Tray/disc handling procedure .................................................... 31
Maintenance ................................................................................ 31

RQT8092

Note
3
3
The included AC power supply cord is for use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other equipment.
 Simple setup Use only supplied speakers
• Using other speakers can damage the unit and sound quality
will be negatively affected.

STEP 1 Positioning
• Set the speakers up on an even surface to prevent them from
falling. Take proper precautions to prevent the speakers from
falling if you cannot set them up on an even surface.
ENGLISH

Place the speaker so that the super tweeter is on the outside.

Positioning for best effect
Super tweeter How you set up your speakers can affect the bass and the sound
field. Note the following points.
• Place speakers on flat secure bases.
• Placing speakers too close to floors, walls, and corners can
result in excessive bass. Cover walls and windows with a thick
curtain.
• Keep your speakers at least 10 mm away from the system for
proper ventilation.

Notes on speaker use

• You can damage your speakers and shorten their useful life if
Positioning/Video connections

you play sound at high levels over extended periods.

Note
You cannot take the front net off the speakers.
Caution
• Use the speakers only with the recommended
system. Failure to do so may lead to damage to the
amplifier and/or the speakers, and may result in the
risk of fire. Consult a qualified service person if
damage has occurred or if you experience a sudden
change in performance.
• Do not attach these speakers to walls or ceilings.
• Reduce the volume in the following cases to avoid damage.
– When playing distorted sound.
– When the speakers emit strange noise (howling) from a
microphone or record player, noise from FM broadcasts, or
continuous signals from an oscillator, test disc, or electronic
instrument.
– When adjusting the sound quality.
– When turning the unit on or off.
If irregular coloring occurs on your television
These speakers are designed to be used close to a television,
but the picture may be affected with some televisions and set-up
combinations.
If this occurs, turn the television off for about 30 minutes.
The television’s demagnetizing function should correct the
problem. If it persists, move the speakers further away from the
television.

STEP 2 Video connections Video cable

• Do not connect the unit through a video cassette recorder

Due to copy guard protection, the picture may not be displayed
correctly. 7 Television with COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals
• Turn the television off before connecting, and refer to the
television’s operating instructions. Video cables
(not included) COMPONENT
VIDEO IN

7 Television with a VIDEO IN terminal VIDEO COMPONENT

OUT VIDEO OUT
Y

PB PB
VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Back of the
OUT VIDEO OUT main unit Y PR PR
PB
Back of the S VIDEO Television
main unit Y PR OUT
(not included)
Video cable Television
S VIDEO (included) (not included)
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals

These terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive output
7 Television with an S VIDEO IN terminal and provide a purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal.
Connection using these terminals outputs the color difference signals
VIDEO COMPONENT
OUT VIDEO OUT Television (PB/PR) and luminance signal (Y) separately in order to achieve high
PB (not included) fidelity in reproducing colors.
Back of the S-video cable
main unit Y PR (not included) S-VIDEO • The description of the component video input terminals depends
IN
on the television or monitor (e.g. Y/PB/PR,Y/B-Y/R-Y, Y/CB/CR).
S VIDEO
OUT
Connect to terminals of the same color.
To enjoy progressive video
Connect to the component video input terminals on a 480p (or
S VIDEO OUT terminal 525p) or 576p (or 625p) compatible television. (Video will not be
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the displayed correctly if connected to an incompatible television.)
VIDEO OUT terminal by separating the chrominance (C) and
luminance (Y) signals. (Actual results depend on the
television.)
RQT8092

4
4
 STEP 3 Speaker, radio and power supply connections
AM loop antenna FM indoor antenna AC power supply cord
For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, For Saudi Arabia and Kuwait

ENGLISH
the Middle East, South
Africa and Southeast Asia

• Connect the AC power supply cord only after all other connections have been made.
• Optional antenna connections ( A page 26).
Preparation
Twist and pull off the vinyl tip of the speaker cords.

AM loop antenna 1
AM ANT
Stand the antenna up on its

Speaker, radio and power supply connections/The remote control

LOOP
base. EXT
Red 2
3
1
For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and Southeast Asia
+
Before connecting the AC power 2
supply cord, set the voltage. Red (+)

Voltage Selector Black ( )

Black FM indoor antenna
Use a flat-head screwdriver to set the R L Tape the antenna where
voltage selector on the back of the main reception is best.
Connect the right (R) side in
unit to the appropriate position for the the same way.
area in which this system is used.
Adhesive
220-240V
tape
FM ANT
110-127V
(75Ω)
VOLT ADJ

(R) (L)

To household AC socket

For Saudi Arabia and Kuwait

BE SURE TO READ THE NOTE ON
AC POWER SUPPLY CORD ON
PAGE 2 BEFORE CONNECTION.
Conserving power
The unit consumes power (approx. 0.9 W) even when it is turned off with [f] (main unit: [f/ I]). To save power when the unit is not to be used
for a long time, unplug it from the household AC power socket. You will need to reset some memory items after plugging in the unit.

STEP 4 The remote control

Do not:
Remote control Batteries
• mix old and new batteries.
• use different types at the same time.
• heat or expose to flame.
• take apart or short circuit.
Insert so the poles (+ and –) match those • attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
in the remote control. • use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long

period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

• Do not use 7 Use

rechargeable Aim at the remote control signal sensor (A page 8), avoiding RQT8092
R6/LR6, AA, UM-3 type batteries. obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m directly in front of the unit.
5
5
 STEP 5 QUICK SETUP
The QUICK SETUP screen assists you to make necessary
settings.
CLOCK/
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input on
ENGLISH

TIMER 1 2 3
the television.
4 5 6
1 Press [:
:, DVD/CD] to select “DVD/CD” as the
7 8 9 source.
0 10 The unit comes on.
L] when a disc is in the tray.
Press [L

2 Press [SHIFT] + [SETUP] to show the QUICK

, DVD/CD
SETUP screen.

3 Follow the messages and press [8

8, 9, ;
;, :] to
select, then press [ENTER] to make the settings.
QUICK SETUP/Setting the time/DEMO function

, , , , Press [RETURN] to go back to the previous screen.

ENTER
RETURN 4 Press [ENTER] and then [SHIFT] + [SETUP] to end
the settings.
, REW/ , SETUP

6
, /FF

SHIFT
STEP Setting the time
This is a 24-hour clock.

1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select “CLOCK”.

Every time you press the button:
CLOCK PLAY REC
Previous display

2 (within 7 seconds or so)

g, REW/4
Press [g f, 3/FF] to set the time.
4] or [f
3 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to finish setting the time.
The display will return to whatever was displayed before you
set the time.

To display the time

Press [CLOCK/TIMER] once when the unit is on or at standby
mode.
The time is shown for about 5 seconds.

Note
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.

DEMO function
When the unit is first plugged in, a demonstration of its functions
may be shown on the display.
If the demo setting is off, you can show a demonstration by
turning on the demo.

Press and hold [–DEMO].

The display changes each time the button is held down.
DEMO OFF (off) ↔ DEMO ON (on)

– DEMO
You can reduce the power consumed in standby mode by
turning the demonstration off.

RQT8092

6
6
 Disc information
Discs that can be played

Indication
Disc Logo in these Remarks
operating

ENGLISH
instructions
Recorded with devices using Version 1.1 of the Video Recording Format (a unified
RAM video recording standard) such as DVD video recorders, DVD video cameras,
DVD-RAM personal computers, etc.
Recorded using the DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) standard.
JPEG
• To play JPEG files, select “Play as Data Disc” in Other Menu (A page 17).

DVD-Video —

DVD-R Discs recorded and finalized\ on Panasonic DVD video recorders or DVD video
(DVD-Video) DVD-V cameras.
DVD-RW

Disc information
(DVD-Video)
+R (Video)/ Discs recorded and finalized\ on DVD video recorders or DVD video cameras.
—
+RW (Video)

Video CD —
VCD
Conforming to IEC62107.
SVCD

This unit is compatible with HDCD, but does not support the Peak Extend function (a
CD CD
function which expands the dynamic range of high level signals).
HDCD-encoded CDs sound better because they are encoded with 20 bits, as compared
with 16 bits for all other CDs.
• This unit can play CD-R/RW (audio recording disc) recorded with the formats on
WMA the left. Close the sessions or finalize\ the disc after recording.
MP3 • HighMAT discs
CD-R WMA, MP3 or JPEG files only.
— JPEG
CD-RW To play without using the HighMAT function, select “Play as Data Disc” in Other
CD
Menu (A page 17).
VCD
• WMA This unit does not support Multiple Bit Rate (MBR: a file that contains the
same content encoded at several different bit rates).
\
A process that allows play on compatible equipment.
• It may not be possible to play the above discs in all cases due to the type of disc or condition of the recording.
7 Discs that cannot be played 7 Disc handling precautions
DVD-Audio, DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, SACD, Divx Video Discs • Do not attach labels or stickers to discs (This may cause disc warping,
and Photo CD, DVD-RAM that cannot be removed from their cartridge, rendering it unusable).
2.6-GB and 5.2-GB DVD-RAM, and “Chaoji VCD” available on the • Do not write on the label side with a ball-point pen or other writing
market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to instrument.
IEC62107. • Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static electricity
prevention liquids or any other solvent.
Playing DVDs and Video CDs • Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
The producer of these discs can control how they are played so you • Do not use the following discs:
may not always be able to control play as described in these operating – Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels (rented
instructions (for example if the play time is not displayed or if a Video discs, etc).
CD has menus). Read the disc’s instructions carefully. – Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart shapes.
7 Audio format of DVDs
This unit automatically recognizes and 7 Video systems
decodes discs with these symbols. – This unit can play PAL and NTSC, but your television must match the
system used on the disc.
7 To clean discs – PAL discs cannot be correctly viewed on an NTSC television.
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry. – This unit can convert NTSC signals to PAL 60 for viewing on a PAL
television (A page 19, “Video” tab — NTSC Disc Output).

RQT8092

7
7
 Control reference guide

Main unit

1
23
Disc drawer
Disc check button [DISC CHECK] ....................................... 10
ENGLISH

4
Remote control signal sensor
AC supply indicator [AC IN]
This indicator lights when the unit is connected to the AC mains
supply.
Standby/on switch [f f/I]
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In

5
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.

6
Multi Re-master button [MULTI RE-MASTER] .................... 23

7
Advanced surround button [ADVANCED SURROUND] .... 23

8
Deck 1/2 selection button [DECK 1/2] ................................. 21

9
Record button [a REC] ....................................................... 21
Control reference guide

Microphone volume control [MIC VOL MIN, MAX] ............. 22

Ä
Microphone jacks [MIC 1, 2] ................................................ 22

Å
Deck 1 cassette holder ......................................................... 21

Ç
Disc tray open/close button [OPEN/CLOSE c] ................. 10

É
Disc change button [DISC CHANGE c] ............................. 10

Ñ
Display

Ö
DVD/CD direct play buttons [1–5] ....................................... 10

Ü
Super sound EQ button [SUPER SOUND EQ] ................... 23

áà
Sound EQ button [SOUND EQ] ............................................ 23
Headphone jack [PHONES] .................................................. 25
Deck 2 cassette holder ......................................................... 21

Center console
âä DVD/CD play button [:, DVD/CD] ......................................... 6

ã Tape play/direction button [; :, TAPE] ............................. 21

åç
Tuner/band select button [BAND, TUNER] ........................ 20
AUX button [AUX] ................................................................ 25

é
Stop button [L, STOP] ......................................................... 10
Disc skip/search/slow-motion play, tape fast-forward/
rewind, tune, time adjust buttons

è [g, REW/4 4, f, 3/FF] ......................................... 10, 20, 21

ê
Deck 1 open button [c, DECK1] ......................................... 21
Display mode, demonstration button

ëí
[DISP MODE, –DEMO] ..................................................... 6, 25
Deck 2 open button [c, DECK2] ......................................... 21
Volume control [VOLUME DOWN, UP] ............................... 22

RQT8092

8
8
Remote control
Buttons such as â function in exactly the same way as the buttons
ì
on the main unit.

ENGLISH
î
Standby/on, TV power on/off button [f f, TVf f] ............... 24, 25
Numbered buttons [0 – 9, X10] ............................................. 11
1 These buttons have the following functions.
? [1] : Progressive video button [PROGRESSIVE] .................. 11
[7] : Echo button [ECHO] ..................................................... 22
2
[0] : Subtitle button [SUBTITLE] ........................................... 11

ï
[X10] : Audio button [AUDIO] ................................................... 13
1 2 3 3
ñ
Quick OSD button [QUICK OSD] .......................................... 12

ó
@ 4 5 6 Pause button [J] .................................................................... 11

ò
Stop, Cancel button [L, CANCEL] ........................ 6, 11, 15, 16
7 8 9 Manual skip, Quick replay button

Control reference guide

ô
[MANUAL SKIP, QUICK REPLAY] ......................................... 12
[ 0 10

ö
Tuner/aux button [TUNER/AUX] ...................................... 20, 25
\
] 5 Top menu, Direct navigator button
^
õ
[TOP MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR] .......................... 11, 14, 15

ú
_ + Functions, Group button [FUNCTIONS, GROUP] .... 11, 14, 17
, Disc skip, tape fast-forward/rewind, preset channel select,

ù
time adjust buttons [g, REW/4 4, f, 3 /FF] ......... 6, 20, 21
{ 6
Shift button [SHIFT]
To use functions labeled in orange:
7
û
While pressing [SHIFT], press the corresponding button.

ü
Muting button [MUTING] ....................................................... 25
Clock/timer, Sleep timer button
| 8
[CLOCK/TIMER, SLEEP] .................................................... 6, 24
Play/record timer, Auto off button
} 9
˚ PLAY/REC, AUTO OFF] ............................................... 24, 25
[˚

†
FL display, Dimmer button [FL DISPLAY, DIMMER] ..... 11, 25
V !
Super Sound EQ button [S.SOUND EQ] .............................. 23
0 Sound EQ, Manual EQ button
[SOUND EQ, –MANUAL EQ] ................................................. 23
Advanced surround, Multi Re-master button

°
[A.SRND, M.RE-MASTER] ...................................................... 23
Disc select, Tuner program button

¢
[DISC, TUNER PGM] ........................................................ 12, 20
CD mode button [CD MODE] ................................................ 12
Repeat button [REPEAT] ....................................................... 13

£
Play mode button [PLAY MODE] .............................. 16, 20, 21
Advanced disc review, Play speed button

§
[A.DISC REVIEW, PLAY SPEED] ..................................... 12, 13
Menu, Playlist, Angle/Page button

•
[MENU, PLAYLIST, ANGLE/PAGE] ........................... 11, 13, 14
Cursor buttons [8,9,/, -],
Enter button [ENTER] ................................ 6, 11, 13, 14, 15, 23
These buttons have the following functions.

¶
[/, -] : TV channel select buttons [TV CH 4, TV CH3] ....... 25

ß
Return, Zoom button [RETURN, ZOOM] .......................... 6, 13
Slow/search, Tuning buttons
[//, --, SLOW/SEARCH] ..................................... 11, 14, 20
These buttons have the following functions.
[//] : TV/AV input mode select button [TV/AV] ..................... 25

®
[--] : Setup button [SETUP] ................................................... 6
Volume buttons, TV volume buttons
[–, +, VOLUME, – TV VOL +] ........................................... 22, 25

RQT8092

9
9
 Discs — Basic play

1 Press [OPEN/CLOSE c] to open the tray.

The unit comes on.
• To load discs in other trays, press [1]–[5] to select the tray and press
[OPEN/CLOSE c] to open the tray.
• You can load up to 5 discs (one per tray).
ENGLISH

• Load double-sided discs so the label for the side you want to play is facing up.
• RAM Remove the disc from its cartridge before use.

Do not pull or push the tray with your hand.

Change a disc
2 Press [OPEN/CLOSE c] to close the tray. in another tray
Press [DISC CHANGE c] and
then [1]–[5].
Check the disc location
Press [DISC CHANGE c] again to
Press [DISC CHECK] during play. close the tray.
Press again to close the trays. • You can also remove a disc while
• To check the location of the 12 cm discs. another is playing.
• If a disc is being played, the corresponding tray will not open. • If you select a disc which is being
• Do not remove or insert disc(s) during a disc check. played, play stops and the tray
• Do not pull out the trays during a disc check. opens.
Discs — Basic play

Stop
Press [L, STOP] during play.
The position is memorized while
“RESUME” is on the display.
• Press [:, DVD/CD] to resume.
• Press [L, STOP] again to clear
the position.

3 Press [1]–[5] to play

the disc.
You can also press
[:, DVD/CD] if the current
disc is your desired disc.

:, DVD/CD
Skip/Search/Slow-motion play
• To skip: Press [g, REW/ 4] or [f, 3 /FF].
• To search: Hold down [g, REW/4 4] or [f, 3 /FF] during play.
• To play in slow-motion: Hold down [g, REW/4 4] or [f, 3 /FF] during pause.
• VCD Slow motion play is for forward direction only.
• Search/slow motion play speed increases up to 5 steps.

RQT8092 Note
• Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [L] when you finish to preserve the unit’s motor and your television screen.
10 • Total title number may not be displayed properly on +R/+RW.
10

Enjoy progressive video
Press [SHIFT] + [PROGRESSIVE].
You can enjoy progressive video
(A page 4).
Enter numbers
RAM DVD-V VCD CD
Press the numbered buttons.
E.g. to select 12: [h10] A [1] A [2]
VCD with Playback control (PBC)
Press [L] to cancel the PBC functions, then
press the numbered buttons.
WMA MP3 JPEG
Press the numbered buttons, then
press [ENTER].
E.g. to select 123: [1] A [2] A [3] A [ENTER]
• Press [SHIFT]+[CANCEL] to cancel the
number(s).
L, CANCEL
Pause
Press [J] during play.
• Press [:, DVD/CD] to restart play.
ENTER
Skip frame-by-frame
RAM DVD-V VCD
Press [;, :] during pause.
• VCD Forward direction only.
(, ), SLOW/SEARCH
SHIFT
Disc menus
a: Press to show a disc top menu
(DVD-V) or programs ( ).RAM
b: Press to show a disc menu
( DVD-V ) or playlists ( RAM ).
VCD with Playback control (PBC)
Press [RETURN] to show disc menu.
Main unit display
Press [FL DISPLAY] to change display.
RAM DVD-V WMA MP3
Time display ↔ Information display
ENGLISH
JPEG
When Slideshow (A page 17) is on:
SLIDE ↔ Information display
When Slideshow (A page 17) is off:
PLAY ↔ Information display
Subtitles/Information screen
Press [SHIFT] + [SUBTITLE].
RAM
Selects subtitles on/off (A page 13).
DVD-V VCD (SVCD only)
Selects a subtitle language (A page 13).
JPEG
Selects the information displayed.
Date → Details of the picture → No information
Discs — Basic play
:, DVD/CD
Start play from a selected group
WMA MP3 JPEG
Press [SHIFT] + [GROUP], then press
[8, 9] to select, then press [ENTER] to
start play.
• A folder on WMA/MP3 and JPEG discs is
treated as a “Group”.
Group/Content skip during play
Group skip: Press [8, 9].
Content skip: Press [;, :].
b
a
On-screen item select
Press [8, 9, ;, :] to select, then press
[ENTER] to make the settings.
• Press [RETURN] to return to previous screen.
RQT8092
11
11
 Discs — Convenient functions

Reviewing titles to play (ADVANCED

DISC REVIEW)
RAM DVD-V (Except +R/+RW)
Allows you to browse the disc contents and start playing from the
ENGLISH

selected position. You can select either “Intro Mode” or “Interval Mode”
1 2 3 DISC in “Advanced Disc Review” in the “Disc” tab (A page 18).
Numbered 4 5 6 CD MODE
buttons 1 Press [A.DISC REVIEW].
7 8 9 REPEAT The QUICK OSD screen is displayed.
QUICK OSD 0 10 e.g. RAM
SUBTITLE AUDIO Program 4 Time 0:01:06
A.DISC REVIEW,
MANUAL SKIP, PLAY SPEED
QUICK REPLAY
, DVD/CD
ANGLE/PAGE 2 Press [:, DVD/CD] when you find a title/program to
play.
,
This may not work depending on the disc and the play condition.

ZOOM
CD sequential play (CD MODE)
Discs — Convenient functions

VCD CD WMA MP3

This feature is very convenient if you want to play several music CDs
SHIFT
sequentially. Make sure that the applicable disc is in the play position
before playing.
DVD and JPEG are skipped without being played.
While stopped
1 Press [CD MODE].

Disc information
You can select the disc after checking the discs loaded with the Disc
2 Press [:, DVD/CD].
information screen.
• You can also select the disc directly with the disc buttons on the main Note
unit. • If the disc in the play position is not applicable (e.g. DVD), CD Mode
does not work.
1 Press [DISC] to show the Disc information screen. • HighMAT menus and Video CD playback control are disabled.
e.g. Disc Information • You cannot change the mode during play, or while in program or
random mode.
DVD-Video
Track 10 Time 60:15
• If you want to play a DVD, press [CD MODE] again to cancel CD
CD Mode. (CD Mode is also canceled when you open the current disc
DVD-VR tray, switch the unit to standby or select another source.)
Unchecked
No Disc Quick replay
Empty Not yet read (Only when the elapsed play time can be displayed.)
2 Press the numbered buttons ([1]–[5]) to select the disc. (Except +R/+RW)
Press [SHIFT] + [QUICK REPLAY] to skip back a few
To clear the screen seconds.
Press [DISC].
Skipping 30 seconds forward
Displaying current playback condition (Only when the elapsed play time can be displayed.)
(QUICK OSD) RAM DVD-V (Except +R/+RW)
Play restarts from approximately 30 seconds later. Convenient when
The current playback condition is displayed. you want to skip commercials etc.
Press [QUICK OSD].
During play
Current playback number Elapsed play time
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
e.g. DVD-V
RAM It is not possible to skip through the current program if the start
Title 1 Chapter 4 Time 0:41:23
of the next program is within about 30 seconds of the point you are
Playback skipping from.
condition Program Playback

Play mode Current position

RQT8092
• To exit the screen
Press [QUICK OSD].
12 • CD MP3 WMA The QUICK OSD screen will appear automatically.
12
 Changing the zoom ratio Changing soundtracks
RAM DVD-V VCD RAM DVD-V (with multiple soundtracks) VCD

This feature expands the letterbox picture to fit the screen. Press [SHIFT] + [AUDIO] several times to select the
soundtrack.
During play

ENGLISH
Press [SHIFT] + [ZOOM] several times to select the RAM VCD
preset aspect ratio (Just Fit Zoom) or “Auto”. You can use this button to select “L”, “R” e.g. DVD-V
or “LR”.
Functions Functions
DVD-V (Karaoke discs)
Just Fit Zoom 1.00 Auto Press [;, :] to select “On” or “Off” for Audio 1
4:3 Standard vocals.
Read the disc’s instructions for details.
European Vista
16:9 Standard Signal type/data
American Vista LPCM/PPCM/0Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
Cinemascope1 kHz (Sampling frequency)/bit/ch (Number of channels)
Cinemascope2 Example: 3 / 2 .1ch
.1: Low frequency effect
e.g. 16:9 Standard (16:9) (not displayed if there is no signal)
4:3 Standard (4:3)
0: No surround
1: Mono surround

Discs — Convenient functions

2: Stereo surround (left/right)
1: Center
2: Front left + Front right
3: Front left + Front right + Center

European Vista (1.66:1)

American Vista (1.85:1) Changing subtitles
Cinemascope1 (2.35:1) DVD-V (with multiple subtitles) VCD (SVCD only)
Cinemascope2 (2.55:1)
Press [SHIFT] + [SUBTITLE] several times to select the
Fine adjustments (Manual Zoom) subtitle language.
After selecting the preset aspect ratio or “Auto”, press [;, :]. • On +R/+RW, a subtitle number may be shown for subtitles that are
– from “x1.00” to “x1.60” (in 0.01 units) not displayed.
To display/clear the subtitles e.g. DVD-V
– from “x1.60” to “x2.00” (in 0.02 units)
• Press and hold [;, :] to alter faster. Press [;, :] to select “On” or “Off”.
Functions
RAM (On/Off only with discs that contain Subtitle Off
Changing the play speed subtitle on/off information)
RAM DVD-V Press [SHIFT] + [SUBTITLE] to select “On” or “Off”.
During play • Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using Panasonic
DVD Recorders.
Press [SHIFT] + [PLAY SPEED] several times to select
“Normal”, “Fast” or “Slow”.
Repeat play
Functions (Only when the elapsed play time can be displayed.
JPEG : Works with all JPEG content.)
Play Speed 1.0 Normal
Fast During play
Slow Press [REPEAT] several times to select an item to be
repeated.
Changing play speed between the range of “x0.6” to “x1.4” (in e.g. DVD-V
Functions
0.1 units)
Press [;, :] while the above message is displayed. Repeat Off Off
Chapter
• Press [:, DVD/CD] to return to normal play. Title
• This function may not work depending on the disc’s recording.
RAM : Program → Disc → Off
• During playlist play: Scene → Playlist → Off
Angle selection and Still picture rotation DVD-V : Chapter → Title\ → Off
VCD CD : Track → Disc\ → Off
Press [SHIFT] + [ANGLE/PAGE] several times to select • When CD Mode is on: Track → Disc → All CD’s → Off
the angle or rotate the still picture. • When CD Mode is on, during program and random play:
DVD-V (with multiple angles) – Angle selection Track → All CD’s → Off
JPEG – Still picture rotation WMA MP3 : Content → Group\ → Off
• When CD Mode is on: Content → Group → All CD’s → Off
• When CD Mode is on, during program and random play:
Content → All CD’s → Off
JPEG : Group\ → Off
\
“All” is displayed during program and random play.

RQT8092

13
13
 Discs — Using navigation menus

7 Using the submenu

1 2 3
1 While the menu is displayed
Numbered 4 5 6
Press [FUNCTIONS].
buttons Items shown differ depending on the type of disc.
7 8 9

Multi Groups and contents are displayed.

ENGLISH

0 10
List Contents only
Tree Groups only
Thumbnail Thumbnail images JPEG
Next group To go to next group WMA MP3
TOP MENU, MENU, Previous group To go to previous group WMA MP3
DIRECT PLAYLIST, All WMA/MP3 and JPEG
NAVIGATOR ANGLE/PAGE
Audio WMA/MP3 only
, , , ,
ENTER Picture JPEG only
Help display To switch between guide messages
FUNCTIONS and the elapsed play time indicator
Find To search by content or group title
( see below)
,
SHIFT 2 Press [8, 9] to select the submenu and press [ENTER].
7 Searching by content or group title
Highlight a group title to search the group, or a content title to search
menus
functions

its content.
1 While the submenu is displayed (A see above)
8, 9] to select “Find”
Press [8
navigation

A Find
Playing data discs and press [ENTER].
Convenient

WMA MP3 JPEG 2 Press [8

8, 9] to select a character and press
You can play JPEG files on DVD-RAM or play HighMAT discs without
using the HighMAT function (A page 17, “Play as Data Disc” in Other [ENTER].
• Repeat to enter other characters.
Using

Menu).
• Lower case is also searched.
Playing items in order (Playback Menu) • Press [(, )] to skip between A, E, I, O, and U.
——

• Press [;] to erase a character.

• Leave the asterisk ( ) when you search for the titles including
Discs

1 Press [TOP MENU]. the character you enter.

Discs

2 Press [8, 9] to select “All” (WMA, MP3/JPEG), “Audio” • Erase the asterisk () to search for the titles starting with the
character you enter. To add the asterisk ( ) again, display the
(WMA/MP3) or “Picture” (JPEG), then press [ENTER]. submenu again and select “Find”.
• To exit the screen 3 Press [:
:] to select “Find” and press [ENTER].
Press [TOP MENU].
The search results screen appears.

Playing from the selected item (Navigation Menu) 4 Press [8

8, 9] to select the content or group and
press [ENTER].
1 Press [MENU].
2 Press [8, 9, ;, :] to select the group or audio/picture Playing from the selected track in the CD
content and press [ENTER]. CD
• After listing all the contents in one group, the list for the next
group appears. Titles appear with CD Text disc playback.

3 To play content in the group in order

1 Press [TOP MENU] or [MENU].
Press [ENTER]. e.g. CD text
To start play from the selected content CD Text T 1/14 0:53

Press [8, 9]. Disc Title

Disc Artist
: Celine Dion One Heart
: Celine Dion
Track Title : I Drove All Night (Album Version)
e.g. Track Artist :

1. I Drove All Night (Album Version)

Group and content number 2. Love Is All We Need (Album Version)
Navigation Menu G 2 C 5 MP3 1:54 3. FAITH (Album Version)
currently playing 4. In His Touch (Album Version)
5. One Heart (Album Version)
Sep 15 2003 Breaking The Habit
Lirkin Park Meteora Dont_Stay : WMA/MP3 files 6.
7.
Stand By Your side (Album Version)
NAKED (Album Version)
Penguins Faint 8. Sorry For Love (Album Version)
Hit_The_Floor_ _Abyss 9. Have You Ever Been In Love (Album Version)
10. Reveal (Album Version)
Lirkin Park [Hyorid Theor
Lirkin Park_Cure For The
; : indicates the group/content
Lirkin_Park_ _Metora_ currently playing to select and press ENTER RETURN to exit
Lirkin_Park_ _Metora_
Lying_From_You
Somewhere_I_Belong
Lady Starfish
2 Press [8, 9] to select the track and press [ENTER].
Life on Jupiter : JPEG files
Group 002/003 Content 0005/0012
• Press [SHIFT]+[ANGLE/PAGE] to skip page by page.
FUNCTIONS to display the sub menu RETURN to exit Number currently selected • Press [FUNCTIONS] to show the playback position and current
position.
Group Content
• To exit the screen
• Press [SHIFT]+[ANGLE/PAGE] to skip page by page in the group Press [TOP MENU] or [MENU].
or content field.
• To enjoy listening to WMA/MP3 contents while showing a
JPEG image on the screen.
RQT8092 Select a JPEG file first, and then select audio contents.
(The opposite order is not effective.)
14 • To exit the screen
14 Press [MENU].
Sound field and sound quality

Playing HighMATTM discs Playing RAM discs

WMA MP3 JPEG RAM

1 While stopped • Titles appear only if the titles are recorded on the disc.

Press [TOP MENU]. • You cannot edit programs, playlists and disc titles.

ENGLISH
Playing the programs
2 Press [8, 9, ;, :] to select the item, then press
[ENTER]. 1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
• Repeat this step if necessary.
2 Press [8, 9] or the
e.g. Menu: Take you to the e.g. Direct Navigator
New New
Pla Playlist Item Long Name Display Te PAG E 1 / 3
next menu which numbered buttons to
shows playlists or select the program.
another menu • Press [SHIFT]+[ANGLE/ No. Date On Title Contents
Menu1 P l ay l i s t 1 Menu2 1 11/ 1(WED) 12:05 Friends of a feather
PAGE] to skip page by page. 2 1/ 1(MON) 1:05 Sunny day

Playlist: play starts 3 2/ 2(TUE) 2:21 Penguins habitat

• To select a 2-digit number 4

5
3/ 3(WED) 3:37 Irresistible
4/ 10(THU) 11:05 Hot cakes
P l ay l i s t 2 Menu3 P l ay l i s t 3
e.g. 23: [h10] A [2] A[3]. 0 ~ 9 to select RETURN to exit

Prev Return Next • Press [:] to show the contents

of the program and the disc.

• To change the menu background 3 Press [ENTER].

Press [FUNCTIONS].
• To exit the screen
The background changes to the one recorded on the disc. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Discs — Using navigation menus

• To exit the screen
Press [L]. Playing a playlist
Selecting from the list (Only when the disc contains a playlist)

1 During play
1 Press [PLAYLIST].
e.g. Playlist All by Artist The Beatles
Press [MENU]. 2 Press [8, 9] or the e.g.
No. Content title
1 Love Me Do numbered buttons to Playlist

2 Press [;] then [8, 9] Playlist

Group 2 From Me to You
select the playlist. No.
1
Date
11/1
Length
0:00:01
Title
City Penguin

to switch among Content 3

4
She Loves You
I Want to Hold Your Hand • Press [SHIFT]+[ANGLE/
2
3
1/ 1
2/ 2
0:01:20
1:10:04
Ashley at Prom
Formula one

“Playlist”, “Group” 5 Can’t Buy Me Love

PAGE] to skip page by page.
4
5
3/ 3
4/10
0:10:20
0:00:01
Soccer
Baseball

and “Content” lists. 6 4/11 0:00:01 City Penguin

• To select a 2-digit number 7

8
4/ 15
4/ 17
0:01:10
0:13:22
Ashley at Prom
Formula one

3 Press [:
:] then [8
8, 9 ] e.g. 23: [h10] A [2] A[3]. 9
10
4/ 20
4/22
0:05:30
0:07:29
Soccer
Baseball

to select an item and 0 ~ 9 to select ENTER to play RETURN to exit

3 Press [ENTER]. 0 9 to select and press ENTER RETURN to exit

press [ENTER].
• To exit the screen
• Press [SHIFT]+[ANGLE/PAGE] to skip page by page. Press [PLAYLIST].

• To exit the screen

Press [MENU].

Tips for making WMA/MP3 and JPEG discs (For CD-R, CD-RW) JPEG
• Discs must conform to ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended • To view JPEG files on this unit:
formats). – Take them on a digital camera that meets the DCF Standard
• This unit supports multi-session but if there are a lot of sessions it (Design rule for Camera File system) Version 1.0. Some digital
takes more time for play to start. Keep the number of sessions to a cameras have functions that are not supported by the DCF
minimum to avoid this. Standard Version 1.0 like automatic picture rotation which may
• When there are more than 8 groups, the eighth group onwards will render a picture unviewable.
be displayed on one vertical line in the menu screen. – Do not alter the files in any way or save them under a different
• There may be differences in the display order on the menu screen name.
and computer screen. • This unit cannot display moving pictures, MOTION JPEG and other
• This unit cannot play files recorded using packet write. such formats, still pictures other than JPEG (e.g.: TIFF) or play
pictures with attached audio.
Naming folders and files e.g. MP3
Files are treated as contents and folders root Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
are treated as groups on this unit. 001group trademarks, or registered trademarks of
At the time of recording, prefix folder and 001 Microsoft Corporation in the United States
file names with 3-digit numbers in the order 001track.mp3 and/or other countries.
you want to play them (this may not work at 002track.mp3
003track.mp3
times). WMA is a compression format developed
002group
Files must have the extension: by Microsoft Corporation. It achieves the
“.WMA” or “.wma” same sound quality as MP3 with a file size
“.MP3” or “.mp3” 001track.mp3
003group 002track.mp3 that is smaller than that of MP3.
“.JPG”, “.jpg”, “.JPEG” or “.jpeg” 003track.mp3
004track.mp3

WMA 001track.mp3 MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from

002track.mp3
• You cannot play WMA files that are copy 003track.mp3 Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
protected.
• This unit does not support Multiple Bit Rate (MBR)
HighMATTM and the HighMAT logo are
MP3 either trademarks or registered
• This unit is not compatible with ID3 tags. trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
• Compatible sampling rate: 8, 11.02, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1 the United States and/or other countries.
RQT8092
and 48 kHz.
15
15
 Discs — Program/Random play

When CD mode is on (A page 12)

VCD CD WMA MP3
1 2 3 You can program all the items on all the discs.
Numbered 4 5 6 1 Press the numbered buttons ([1]–[5]) to select a
buttons disc.
ENGLISH

7 8 9
2 Press the numbered buttons to select the items
0 10 PLAY MODE
( WMA MP3 then press [ENTER]).
CANCEL • To select a 2-digit number
e.g. 25: [h10] A [2] A[5]
, DVD/CD
WMA MP3 [2] A [5] A [ENTER]
• Repeat steps 1 and 2 to program other items.
3 Press [:, DVD/CD].
, , , ,
ENTER To select an item using the cursor buttons
Press [ENTER] and [8, 9] to select an item, then press [ENTER]
FUNCTIONS
again to register.

To change a selected program

SHIFT 1. Press [8, 9] to select an item.
2. Repeat above steps 1 and 2.
Discs — Program/Random play

To clear a selected program

1. Press [8, 9] to select an item.
2. Press [SHIFT]+[CANCEL] (or press [8, 9, /, -] to select
“Clear” and press [ENTER]).

To clear the whole program

Discs — Program/Random play Select “Clear all” with [8, 9, /, -] and press [ENTER].
Note
Starting program/random play
The program is retained in memory unless one of the following
While stopped
occurs:
Press [PLAY MODE] to select the desired mode.
Program and random playback screens appear sequentially. – The current disc tray is opened.
Every time you press the button: – Another source is selected.
– The unit is switched to standby.
Program Random off (Normal play) – CD mode is turned on or off.
– You manually select another disc (while CD mode is off).
To exit program or random play mode
Press [PLAY MODE] several times while stopped. Random play
When CD mode is off
VCD CD
You can play all the items on the disc in the play position in
Program play (up to 32 items) random order.
When CD mode is off DVD-V WMA MP3 JPEG
You can play the selected item(s) on the disc in the play position in
DVD-V VCD CD WMA MP3 JPEG
random order.
You can program all the items on a disc in the play position.
1 DVD-V Press the numbered buttons to select a group
1 DVD-V WMA MP3 JPEG
Press the numbered buttons to select a group or
( WMA MP3 JPEG then press [ENTER]) or title.
title.
e.g. DVD-V Random Playback
• To select a 2-digit number e.g. DVD-V
Choose a title.
e.g. 25: [h10] A [2] A[5] Program Playback Title 1
Choose a title and chapter.
WMA MP3 JPEG [2] A [5] No. Disc T/G C/T
1 Play 0 ~ 9 to select PLAY to start
A [ENTER]
Clear
Clear all 2 Press [:, DVD/CD].

to select and press ENTER PLAY to start ALL-DISC random play

When CD mode is on (A page 12)
VCD CD WMA MP3
2 Press the numbered buttons to select a chapter or
You can play all the items on all the discs in random order.
track ( WMA MP3 JPEG then press [ENTER]).
• Repeat steps 1 and 2 to program other items. Press [:, DVD/CD]. e.g. CD Random Playback

3 Press [:, DVD/CD]. Press PLAY to start

RQT8092 • Disable HighMAT disc play to use program and random play. Select “Play as Data Disc” in Other Menu (A page 17).
16
16
 Discs — Using on-screen menus
1 Press [FUNCTIONS] once. 3 Press [,, 9, ;, :] to select the item, then press
2 Press [,, 9, ;, :] to select the menu, then press [ENTER] to make the settings.
[ENTER] to begin selecting items. Alternatively, press the numbered buttons.
Items shown differ depending on the type of disc.

ENGLISH
Main Menu
Program, Group, Title, To start from a specific item Thumbnail To show thumbnail images
Chapter, Track, Playlist,
Subtitle (A page 13, Changing subtitles)
Content
To skip incrementally or decrementally RAM To recall a marker recorded on
(Time Slip for play only) Marker (VR) DVD-Video recorders
1 Press [ENTER] twice to show Time Slip To recall a marker:
indicator. Press [8, 9] A Press [ENTER]
Time 2 Press [8, 9] to select the time and press (multiple angles)
(Except [ENTER]. Angle To select the angle
+R/+RW) • Press and hold [8, 9] to alter faster.
To start from a specific time (Time Rotate Picture To rotate pictures
Search) To turn slideshow on/off
To change remaining/elapsed time display Slideshow To change the slideshow timing (0 – 30 sec)
(A page 13, Changing soundtracks) Other Settings (A see below)
Audio
WMA MP3 To display the current disc type

Discs — Using on-screen menus

Other Settings
RAM DVD-V To change play speed If you have chosen “480p (or 525p)” or “576p (or
Play Speed – from “x0.6” to “x1.4” (in 0.1 unit steps)
625p)”, (A see left), select the method of
conversion for video output to suit the type of
L Play Menu material.
(A page 13) When you play NTSC discs
Repeat Auto1 (normal): Detects 24 frame-per-second
film content and appropriately
Except JPEG RAM (Still picture part) converts it.
To repeat a specified section Transfer
A-B Repeat Press [ENTER] at the starting and ending
Auto2: Compatible with 30 frame-per-second
Mode film content in addition to 24 frame-per-
points. Press [ENTER] again to cancel. second film content.
Except RAM Video: Select when using Auto1 or Auto2, and
To mark up to 5 positions to play again the video content is distorted.
When you play PAL discs
Press [ENTER]. (The unit is now ready to Auto: Detects 25 frame-per-second film
accept markers.) content and appropriately converts it.
To mark a position: Video: Select when using Auto, and the video
Press [ENTER] (at the desired point)
Marker To mark another position: content is distorted.
Press [;, :] to select “ ” A Press [ENTER] L Audio Menu
To recall a marker: Advanced (A page 23)
Press [;, :] A Press [ENTER] Surround
To erase a marker:
Press [;, :] A Press [SHIFT]+[CANCEL] To make the dialogue in movies easier to hear
• This feature does not work during program Dialogue DVD-V (Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG, 3-channel or
and random play. Enhancer higher, with the dialogue recorded in the center
Advanced [A page 12, Reviewing titles to play channel)
Disc Review (ADVANCED DISC REVIEW)] On ↔ Off
Multi (A page 23)
L Picture Menu
Normal Re-master
Cinema1: Mellows images and enhances Enhances audio output to produce a warm
detail in dark scenes. Sound hall-like sound.
Cinema2: Sharpens images and enhances Enhancement On ↔ Off
detail in dark scenes.
Animation L Display Menu
Dynamic Information JPEG : Off, Date, Details
User (Press [ENTER] to select “Picture
Picture Mode Adjustment”) (A see below) Subtitle Position 0 to –60 (in 2 unit steps)
Picture Adjustment
Subtitle Brightness Auto, 0 to –7
Contrast Sharpness
Brightness Color\1 (or Colour\2) To select the appropriate screen size
Just Fit Zoom to fit your TV screen
Gamma (Adjusts the brightness of dark parts.)
Depth Enhancer (Reduces the rough noise in To zoom in and out manually
Manual Zoom
the background to give a greater feeling of
depth.) Bit Rate Display RAM DVD-V VCD On ↔ Off
• NTSC disc GUI See-through Off, On, Auto
480i\1 (or 525i\2) (Interlace)
↔ 480p\1 (or 525p\2) (Progressive)
GUI Brightness –3 to +3
• PAL disc L Other Menu
Video Output 576i\1 (or 625i\2) (Interlace)
Mode ↔ 576p\1 (or 625p\2) (Progressive) Setup (A page 18)
When you select “480p (or 525p)” or “576p (or Play as DVD-VR, • Select “Play as Data Disc” to play JPEG
625p)”, a confirmation screen appears. Select Play as HighMAT files on DVD-RAM or to play HighMAT
“Yes” only if connecting to a progressive output or RQT8092
compatible television. disc without using the HighMAT function.
Play as Data Disc
\1
For Southeast Asia 17
\2 17
For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, the Middle East and South Africa
 Discs — Changing the player settings

1 Press [SHIFT] + [SETUP] to show the setup menu.

• If you have not set QUICK SETUP (A page 6), the QUICK
SETUP screen appears.

2 Press [8, 9] to select the tab, then press [:] to

ENGLISH

begin selecting the items.

3 Press [8, 9] to select the item, then press [ENTER]
1 2 3 to begin selecting the settings.
Numbered 4 5 6 4 Press [8, 9, ;, :] to select, then press [ENTER] to
buttons make the settings.
7 8 9
Alternatively, press the numbered buttons.
0 10
e.g. Setup menu

Setup Item
Tab Disc Audio English
Video
Audio
Subtitle Automatic Setting
Menus English
Display
Others Advanced Disc Review Intro Mode

, , , , Ratings Level 8
ENTER
Discs — Changing the player settings

to select and press ENTER RETURN to exit

• To exit, press [SHIFT]+[SETUP].

SETUP • The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to
standby.
SHIFT • Underlined items in the following diagram are the factory
preset.
The QUICK SETUP enables successive settings of the items
in the shaded area.

L “Disc” tab
Audio • English • (Language options)\1 • Original\2 • Other \3

Choose the audio language.

Subtitle • Automatic\4 • English • (Language options)\1 • Other \3

Choose the subtitle language.

Menus • English
Choose the language for disc menus. • (Language options)\1
Changing the menu language in QUICK
SETUP also changes this setting. • Other \3

Advanced Disc Review • Intro Mode: Reviews each title/program.

(A page 12) • Interval Mode: Reviews not only each title/program but also each 10 minute interval within
a title/program.
Ratings Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video • 8 No Limit • 1 to 7 • 0 Lock All: To prevent play of discs without rating levels.
play. Changing ratings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
• Follow the on-screen instructions. • Unlock Player • Change Password • Change Level • Temporary Unlock
When you select your ratings level, a password screen is shown.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Do not forget your password.
A message screen will be shown if a DVD-Video exceeding the ratings level is inserted in
the unit.
Enter your password and then follow the on-screen instructions.

\1
Language options \2
The original language designated on the disc is selected.
For Southeast Asia : Chinese \3
Input a code number referring to the table on page 19.
For others : French, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian \4
If the language selected for “Audio” is not available, subtitle
and Dutch appears in that language (if available on the disc).

RQT8092

18
18
L “Video” tab
TV Aspect • 4:3 Pan&Scan: Regular aspect television (4:3)
Choose the setting suit your television The sides of the widescreen picture are cut off so it fills the screen
and preference. (unless prohibited by the disc).

ENGLISH
• 4:3 Letterbox: Regular aspect television (4:3)
Widescreen software is shown in the letterbox style.

• 16:9: Widescreen television (16:9)

TV Type • Standard (Direct View TV)
Select to suit the type of television. • CRT Projector • LCD TV/Projector
• Projection TV • Plasma TV
Time Delay • 0ms • 20ms • 40ms • 60ms • 80ms • 100ms
When connected with a Plasma display,
adjust if you notice the audio is out of sync
with the video.
Still Mode • Automatic
Specify the type of picture shown when • Field: The picture is not blurred, but picture quality is lower.
paused. • Frame: Overall quality is high, but the picture may appear blurred.
NTSC Disc Output • PAL60: When connected to a PAL television.
Choose PAL 60 or NTSC output when playing • NTSC: When connected to an NTSC television.

Discs — Changing the player settings

NTSC discs (A page 7, Video systems). ( For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, the Middle East and South Africa : “PAL60” is the factory preset)

L “Audio” tab
PCM Digital Output (A page 26) • Up to 48 kHz • Up to 96 kHz
Dolby Digital (A page 26) • Bitstream • PCM
DTS Digital Surround (A page 26) • Bitstream • PCM
MPEG\6 (A page 26) • PCM • Bitstream
Dynamic Range Compression • Off
• On: Adjust for clarity even when the volume is low by compressing the range of the
lowest sound level and the highest sound level. Convenient for late night viewing.
(Only works with Dolby Digital)

L “Display” tab
Menu Language \5
• English •
\6
• English • Français • Deutsch • Italiano • Español • Português • Pуcский • Nederlands
On-Screen Messages • On • Off
L “Others” tab
QUICK SETUP • Yes • No
Re-initialize Setting\5 (or Re-initialise • Yes: The password screen is shown if Ratings (A page 18) are set. Please enter the
Setting\6) same password. After “INIT” on the display disappears, turn the unit to the default
This returns all values in the Setup menus settings.
off and on again. • No
\5 \6
For Southeast Asia For Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, the Middle East and South Africa

Language code list

Abkhazian: 6566 Danish: 6865 Italian: 7384 Norwegian: 7879 Swedish: 8386
Afar: 6565 Dutch: 7876 Japanese: 7465 Oriya: 7982 Tagalog: 8476
Afrikaans: 6570 English: 6978 Javanese: 7487 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Tajik: 8471
Albanian: 8381 Esperanto: 6979 Kannada: 7578 Persian: 7065 Tamil: 8465
Ameharic: 6577 Estonian: 6984 Kashmiri: 7583 Polish: 8076 Tatar: 8484
Arabic: 6582 Faroese: 7079 Kazakh: 7575 Portuguese: 8084 Telugu: 8469
Armenian: 7289 Fiji: 7074 Kirghiz: 7589 Punjabi: 8065 Thai: 8472
Assamese: 6583 Finnish: 7073 Korean: 7579 Quechua: 8185 Tibetan: 6679
Aymara: 6588 French: 7082 Kurdish: 7585 Rhaeto-Romance: 8277 Tigrinya: 8473
Azerbaijani: 6590 Frisian: 7089 Laotian: 7679 Romanian: 8279 Tonga: 8479
Bashkir: 6665 Galician: 7176 Latin: 7665 Russian: 8285 Turkish: 8482
Basque: 6985 Georgian: 7565 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Samoan: 8377 Turkmen: 8475
Bengali; Bangla: 6678 German: 6869 Lingala: 7678 Sanskrit: 8365 Twi: 8487
Bhutani: 6890 Greek: 6976 Lithuanian: 7684 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Ukrainian: 8575
Bihari: 6672 Greenlandic: 7576 Macedonian: 7775 Serbian: 8382 Urdu: 8582
Breton: 6682 Guarani: 7178 Malagasy: 7771 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Uzbek: 8590
Bulgarian: 6671 Gujarati: 7185 Malay: 7783 Shona: 8378 Vietnamese: 8673
Burmese: 7789 Hausa: 7265 Malayalam: 7776 Sindhi: 8368 Volapük: 8679
Byelorussian: 6669 Hebrew: 7387 Maltese: 7784 Singhalese: 8373 Welsh: 6789
Cambodian: 7577 Hindi: 7273 Maori: 7773 Slovak: 8375 Wolof: 8779
Catalan: 6765 Hungarian: 7285 Marathi: 7782 Slovenian: 8376 Xhosa: 8872
Chinese: 9072 Icelandic: 7383 Moldavian: 7779 Somali: 8379 Yiddish: 7473
Corsican: 6779 Indonesian: 7378 Mongolian: 7778 Spanish: 6983 Yoruba: 8979
RQT8092
Croatian: 7282 Interlingua: 7365 Nauru: 7865 Sundanese: 8385 Zulu: 9085
Irish: 7165 Nepali: 7869 Swahili: 8387
Czech: 6783
19
19
 The radio

L AM allocation setting (main unit only)

BAND, TUNER , TAPE The step is factory-set to 9 kHz, but you can change it to receive
broadcasts allocated to 10 kHz steps.
1. Select “FM”.
DECK 1/2 2. Press and hold [BAND, TUNER].
REC , DVD/CD
ENGLISH

After a few seconds the display changes to show the current

, STOP minimum frequency. Continue to hold the button down. The minimum
, REW/ , frequency changes and the step is changed.
, /FF To return to the original step, repeat the above steps.
, DECK2
, DECK1
Note
After changing the “allocation” setting, the frequencies you previously
DECK 1 DECK 2 preset in the memory will be cleared. Preset them again.

Preset tuning
Remote control only
There are two methods of pre-setting stations.
Automatic presetting :All the stations the tuner can receive are
preset.
Manual presetting :You can select the stations to preset and
1 2 3 TUNER PGM the order they are preset in.
Numbered 4 5 6 Up to 15 stations each can be set in the FM and AM bands.
buttons Preparation:
7 8 9
Press [TUNER/AUX] to select “FM” or “AM”.
0 10 PLAY MODE
Automatic presetting
The radio

, DVD/CD
Do the following once each for FM and AM.
TUNER/AUX
, TAPE Preparation: Tune to the frequency where pre-setting is to begin.
Press [SHIFT] + [TUNER PGM] until the frequency
changes.
The tuner presets all the stations it can receive into the channels in
ascending order. The last station to be set is then played.

Manual presetting
, REW/ , , Pre-set the stations one at a time.
, /FF
1 Tune to the station (A see left).
SHIFT 2 Press [SHIFT] + [TUNER PGM].
3 While “PGM” is flashing on the display
Press the numbered buttons to select a channel.
Alternatively, press [g, REW/4] or [f, 3/FF] then press
[SHIFT]+[TUNER PGM].
The station occupying a channel is erased if another station is
The radio preset in that channel.

Selecting channels
Manual tuning
Remote control only
1 Press [TUNER/AUX] (main unit: [BAND, TUNER]) to 1 Press [TUNER/AUX] to select “FM” or “AM”.
select “FM” or “AM”.
The unit comes on. 2 Press the numbered buttons or [g, REW/4
4] or
[f, 3 /FF] to select the channel.
2 Press [(] or [)] (main unit: [g, REW/ 4] or
[f, 3 /FF]) to select the frequency. • To select a 2-digit number
Press and hold [(] or [)] (main unit: [g, REW/4] or e.g. 12: [h10] A [1] A[2].
[f, 3/FF]) until the frequency starts scrolling to start automatic
tuning. Tuning stops when a station is found.

“TUNED” is displayed when a radio station is tuned.

“ST” is displayed when a stereo FM broadcast is being received.

L If noise is excessive in FM
Press [PLAY MODE] to display “MONO”.
Monaural sound is selected and noise reduces when reception is
weak.
Press [PLAY MODE] again to cancel the mode.
“MONO” is also canceled if the frequency is changed.
RQT8092

20
20
 Cassette tapes

Playback Recording
You can use either deck 1 or deck 2 for tape playback. Selection of tapes for recording
Use normal position tapes.
Use normal position tapes. High position and metal position tapes can be used, but this unit will

ENGLISH
High position and metal position tapes can be played, but the unit will not be able to record or erase them correctly.
not be able to do full justice to the characteristics of these tapes.
Preparation:
1 Press [; :, TAPE]. • Wind up the leader tape so recording can begin immediately.
• Press [; :, TAPE] and then [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]).
The unit comes on.
If a cassette was loaded, play starts automatically (One touch play). 1 Press [c, DECK2] on the main unit and insert the
2 Press [c, DECK1] or [c, DECK2] on the main unit and cassette to be recorded.
Insert with the side to be recorded facing towards you and the
insert the cassette.
exposed tape facing down.
Insert with the side to be played Front side
The tape direction is automatically set to “F:”.
facing towards you and the exposed
tape facing down.
Close the holder by hand. 2 Press and hold [PLAY MODE] to select the reverse
mode.
3 Press [; :, TAPE] to start playback. Every time you press and hold the button:
Every time you press the button: F: ↔ ;R
F:: Forward side is played.
: One side only records.
;R: Reverse side is played.
, : Both sides record (forward → reverse).
“ ” is automatically changed to “ ” when [[ REC] is pressed.
To stop tape playback
Press [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]). 3 Select the source to be recorded.
Radio recording:
To select the reverse mode Tune to the required station. (A page 20)
While TAPE is selected as the source
1
Disc recording:

Cassette tapes
Press and hold [PLAY MODE]. Insert the disc(s) you want to record.

2
Every time you press and hold the button: Press [:, DVD/CD] and then [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]).
Prepare the desired disc recording mode.
• To record programmed items [A do steps 1–2 on page 16,
: One side is played. “Program play (up to 32 items)”].
: Both sides are played. (forward → reverse) Ensure disc is stopped.
Play stops at the end of the reverse side.
1
Tape-to-tape recording:
: Both sides are played repeatedly until [L] (main unit: [L, STOP])
2
Press [; :, TAPE] and then [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]).
is pressed. Press [c, DECK1] on the main unit and insert the cassette
you want to record.
To listen to 2 tapes consecutively, load a tape into each deck and
select “ ”. Both tapes will be played repeatedly until [L] (main unit: 4 Press [[ REC] on the main unit to start recording.
[L, STOP]) is pressed.
To stop recording
Press [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]).
To fast-forward or rewind
Press [g, REW/4] (rewind) or [f, 3/FF] (fast-forward).
If the tape finishes before the disc
To select between loaded decks The disc continues playing. Press [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]) to stop
Press [PLAY MODE] (main unit: [DECK 1/2]). it.

Note
Note
• Tape playback is momentarily interrupted if you open the other deck. • Multi-channel sources (3 to 5.1 channels) are automatically down-
• Tapes exceeding 100 minutes are thin and can break or get caught mixed to 2 channels during recording.
in the mechanism. • Changes to volume and sound or field quality do not affect
• Tape slack can get caught up in the mechanism and should be recording.
taken up before the tape is played.
• You cannot open deck 1 while recording.
• Endless tapes can get caught up in the deck’s moving parts if used • You cannot fast-forward or rewind one deck while recording with
the other.
incorrectly. Use tapes appropriate to this unit’s auto-reverse
mechanism.
Erasure prevention
Use a screwdriver or similar
Side A
object to break out the tab.

Tab for side B Tab for side A

To re-record on a protected cassette

Cover the hole with adhesive tape.

To erase a tape
1. Press [; :, TAPE] and then
Adhesive tape
[L] (main unit: [L, STOP]).
2. Insert the recorded tape into deck 2. RQT8092
Ensure there is no tape in deck 1.
3. Press and hold [PLAY MODE] to select the reverse mode. 21
4. Press [[ REC] on the main unit. 21
 Enjoying karaoke

MULTI
1 Insert the disc and start play (A page 10).
RE-MASTER , STOP

1
2 DVD-V
ADVANCED
Press [SHIFT] + [AUDIO] during play.

2
SURROUND SUPER
REC SOUND EQ
ENGLISH

SOUND EQ
Press [8] or [9] then [ENTER], or [;, :] to select
MIC VOL the mode.
MIN, MAX VOLUME
DOWN, UP Solo discs Duet discs
Off: Vocals off Off: Vocals off
On: Vocals on V1+V2: Both parts
V1: Part 1 only
V2: Part 2 only
RAM VCD

Press [SHIFT] + [AUDIO].

Every time you press the button:
Microphone(s) AUDIO L R (LR) : Left channel sound is heard from the left
(not included)
speaker and right channel sound is heard from
the right speaker (Vocal and accompaniment).
S.SOUND EQ AUDIO L (L) : Only left channel sound (No vocal).
AUDIO R (R) : Only right channel sound (Vocal).
A.SRND,
SOUND EQ, M.RE-MASTER • Select no vocal for karaoke.
MANUAL EQ 1 2 3
• Vocal and no vocal may be reversed.
• Actual operations depend on the disc. Read the disc’s instructions
4 5 6 for details.
ECHO 7 8 9
3 Start singing and adjust volume with [–, + VOLUME]
0 10 (main unit: [VOLUME DOWN, UP]) and [MIC VOL MIN,
AUDIO
MAX] on the main unit.

Adjusting the echo effect

Press [SHIFT] + [ECHO].
Every time you press the button:
Enjoying karaoke

, , , , ECHO 1 → ECHO 2 → ECHO 3 → ECHO 4 → ECHO OFF (off)

ENTER ↑
The effect increases with the level.

To record your karaoke performance

SHIFT , +, Preparation:
VOLUME • Do the preparatory steps 1–2 on page 21.
• Insert the disc and start play (A page 10).
1 Press [SHIFT] + [AUDIO] to select the voice mode.
2 Adjust volume with [–, + VOLUME] (main unit: [VOLUME
DOWN, UP]) and [MIC VOL MIN, MAX] on the main
unit.
Enjoying karaoke
3 Press [[ REC] on the main unit and start karaoke
Preparation: performance.
• Lower the microphone volume with [MIC VOL MIN, MAX] on the
main unit, then connect the microphone(s) to the microphone jack(s). To stop recording
Use a dynamic microphone. Press [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]).
Plug type: 6.3 mm monaural.
• If a strange noise (howling) is emitted during use, move the To record your voice
microphone away from the speakers, or turn down the microphone
volume. Preparation: Do the preparatory steps 1–2 on page 21. Ensure that
• When you are not using the microphone, disconnect it from the there is no tape in deck 1.
microphone jack, and turn down the microphone volume level to
“MIN”.
1 Press [[ REC] on the main unit to start recording.
2 Speak through the microphone and adjust volume with
[–, + VOLUME] (main unit: [VOLUME DOWN, UP]) and
[MIC VOL MIN, MAX] on the main unit.

RQT8092

22
22
 Sound field and sound quality

You may experience a reduction in sound quality when these sound Sound field control
field systems are used with some sources. If this occurs, turn the
sound field system off. Press [SOUND EQ] to select a setting.
Every time you press the button:
Advanced Surround HEAVY: Adds punch to rock.

ENGLISH
CLEAR: Clarifies higher sounds.
RAM DVD-V SOFT: For background music.
Enjoy a surround-like effect which broadens when playing discs with DISCO: Reverberates sound to make you feel like you are in a
surround effects. Sound seems to come from speakers on either disco.
side of you. LIVE: Makes vocals more alive.
Press [A.SRND] (main unit: [ADVANCED SURROUND]). HALL: Expands sound to make you feel like you are in a hall.
Each time you press the button: EQ-OFF: Canceled (no effect is added) (factory preset).
1 Natural To check the current setting
Press [SOUND EQ].
2 Enhanced
Using the Manual Equalizer (MANUAL EQ)
Off (factory preset)
Create your own sound quality effects.
Optimum seating position A
Speaker Speaker
1 Press and hold [–MANUAL EQ] until “MANUAL EQ”
• This does not work or has less appears.
effect with some discs.
• Do not use in combination with 2 (Within 12 seconds)
surround effects on other 3 to 4 times Change the sound quality with the cursor buttons.
equipment. distance A 1 Select the sound range to be adjusted with [;] or [:].
BASS ↔ MID ↔ TREBLE
2 Adjust the level with [8] or [9].
(–3 to +3)

Repeat step 2 to set the desired sound quality.

Seating position The original display is restored on the display panel in about
3 seconds.

To cancel
Multi Re-master — Enjoying more Press [SOUND EQ] to select “EQ-OFF”.
natural sound The changes you make are stored and automatically recalled the
next time you select “MANUAL EQ”.
RAM DVD-V CD VCD
Discs recorded with multi channels LPCM at 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz

Sound field and sound quality

This feature gives you a more natural sound by adding the higher Using the Super Sound Equalizer
frequency signals not recorded on the disc.
Turning on the super sound equalizer gives you a more powerful
WMA MP3 sound.
Discs recorded at 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
This feature reproduces the frequencies lost during recording to give Press [S.SOUND EQ] (main unit: [SUPER SOUND EQ]).
you a sound closer to the original.
The “S.SOUND EQ” indicator lights up.
During play
Every time you press [SHIFT] + [M.RE-MASTER] To cancel
Press [S.SOUND EQ] (main unit: [SUPER SOUND EQ]) to turn off
(main unit: [MULTI RE-MASTER]):
the indicator.
Setting RAM DVD-V CD VCD WMA MP3
Type of music Effect level
1 High tempo (e.g., pop and rock) Light
2 Various tempos (e.g., jazz) Medium
3 Low tempo (e.g., classical) Strong
Off Off Off
Note
The actual output sampling frequency depends on the PCM Digital
Output setting (A page 19, “PCM Digital Output” in the “Audio” tab)
when using a digital connection (A page 26, Home Theater—
Enjoying more powerful sound).

RQT8092

23
23
 Headphones Using the timers
(not included)
The play/record timer
3 Press [r
rPLAY/REC] to display the timer indicator.
Every time you press the button:
PLAY REC
(off)
ENGLISH

VOLUME
DOWN, UP rPLAY: to turn the play timer on
rREC: to turn the record timer on
REC
(The indicator doesn’t appear if the start and finish times or the
AUX clock hasn’t been set.)
, STOP
4 Press [f
f] to turn the unit off.
DISP MODE PHONES The unit must be off for the timers to operate.
• Play timer: Play will start in the set condition at the set
time with volume increasing gradually to the
set level.
• Record timer: The unit comes on 30 seconds before the set
DIMMER time with the volume muted.
TV
To cancel the timer
CLOCK/ PLAY/ Press [rPLAY/REC] to clear the timer indicator from the display.
TIMER, REC, (The timer comes on at the set time everyday if the timer is on.)
SLEEP AUTO OFF
1 2 3
To change the settings (when the unit is on)
1, 2
4 5 6 To change the play/record times
Do steps 1, 2 and 4.
7 8 9 To change the source or volume
1. Press [rPLAY/REC] to clear the timer indicator from the display.
0 10
2. Make changes to the source or volume.
3. Do steps 3 to 4.

TUNER/AUX To check the settings

Press [CLOCK/TIMER] while the unit is on to select “rPLAY” or
“rREC”.
The settings are shown in the following order:
Play timer: start time→finish time→source→volume
TV CH , Record timer: start time→finish time→source
TV CH , To check the settings while the unit is off, press [CLOCK/TIMER]
ENTER twice.

, REW/ , If you use the unit after the timers are set
, /FF TV/AV After using, check that the correct tape/disc(s) are loaded before
Using the timers

SHIFT , +, turning the unit off.

TV VOL
MUTING Note
• If you turn the unit off and on again while a timer is functioning, the
finish time setting will not be activated.
• If you selected AUX as the source, when the timer comes on, the
unit turns on and engages “AUX” as the source. If you want to
playback or record from a connected unit, set that unit’s timer to
the same time. (See the connected unit’s instruction manual.)
Using the timers
The sleep timer
The play/record timer
This timer turns the unit off after a set time.
You can set the timer to come on at a certain time to wake you up
(play timer) or to record a radio station or from the aux source While enjoying the desired source:
(record timer). Press [SHIFT] + [SLEEP] to select the time (minutes).
The play and record timers cannot be used together. Every time you press the button:
Preparation: SLEEP 30 SLEEP 60 SLEEP 90 SLEEP 120 SLEEP OFF
• Turn the unit on and set the clock (A page 6).
• For the play timer, prepare the desired music source (tape/disc/
radio/aux), and set the volume. To cancel the sleep timer
• For the record timer, check the cassette’s erasure prevention Press [SHIFT+[SLEEP] to select “SLEEP OFF”.
tabs (A page 21) and insert the tape in deck 2 (A page 21).
Tune to the radio station (A page 20) or select the aux source To confirm the remaining time
(A page 25). Press [SHIFT]+[SLEEP] once.
The remaining time is shown for about 5 seconds.
1 Press [CLOCK/TIMER] to select the timer function.
To change the setting
Every time you press the button: Press [SHIFT]+[SLEEP] to select the new setting.
CLOCK PLAY REC You can use the sleep timer in combination with the play/record
timer.
Previous display
Make sure the unit is off before the play/record timer’s start time.
rPLAY: to set the play timer
rREC: to set the record timer Note
(Proceed to the next step within 7 seconds)
The sleep timer will be turned off when you start recording.

1 time.
2 ON time setting
RQT8092 g, REW/4
Press [g f, 3/FF] to set the start
4] or [f

24 2 Press [CLOCK/TIMER].
Repeat steps 1 and 2.
24 OFF time setting
 Other functions Using other equipment

Muting the volume Using headphones

Press [MUTING]. 1 Reduce the volume and connect the headphones (not
included).
Headphone plug type: 3.5 mm stereo

ENGLISH
2 Adjust headphone volume with [VOLUME DOWN, UP]
on the main unit.

Note
Volume is reduced to minimum.
Avoid listening for prolonged periods of time to prevent hearing
damage.
To cancel
Press [MUTING] again or reduce the volume to minimum (--dB),
then raise it to the required level.
Operating a television
Muting is also canceled when you switched the unit to standby. Point the remote control at the television for the following operations.
Turning the television on/off
Auto-off function f].
Press [SHIFT] + [TVf
When disc or tape is selected as the source Switching the television’s video input mode
To save power, the unit turns off if it is left unused for ten minutes. Press [SHIFT] + [TV/AV].
This function does not work if the source is tuner or AUX.
Changing channels
Press [SHIFT] + [AUTO OFF]. Press [SHIFT] + [TV CH4
4] or [SHIFT] + [TV CH3
3].
“AUTO OFF” is shown on the main unit’s display.
Adjusting the volume
The setting is maintained even if the unit is turned off. Press [SHIFT] + [TV VOL+] or [SHIFT] + [–TV VOL].
If you select tuner or AUX as the source, “AUTO OFF” goes out. It
comes on again when you select disc or tape. Note
To cancel Some models cannot be operated by this remote control.
Press [SHIFT]+[AUTO OFF] again.
Changing the main unit and remote control mode
Dimming the display
The remote control and main unit are factory-set to “REMOTE 1”
Press [SHIFT] + [DIMMER]. mode.
If your remote control affects other equipment during operation, you
To return to the original brightness, press [SHIFT]+[DIMMER] again. can switch to operate in “REMOTE 2” mode.

1 While pressing and holding [AUX] on the main unit

To switch to “REMOTE 2” mode
Changing the main unit’s display
Press [DISP MODE] to select the desired display mode. Press and hold [2] until “REMOTE 2” appears on the

2
main unit display.
Every time you press the button:

Other functions/Using other equipment

Press and hold [ENTER] and [2] for at least 2
Normal Peak hold Reflection seconds.
(off) The main unit and remote control are now set to operate in
“REMOTE 2” mode.
To return to “REMOTE 1” mode
Using other equipment Do steps 1 and 2 above but use [1] instead of [2] for both steps.
(“REMOTE 1” appears on the main unit during step 1.)
Using an external unit The remote control cannot work with the main unit if their
modes are different.
You can connect an analog player with a built-in phono equalizer.
“REMOTE 1” or “REMOTE 2” appears on the main unit display when
you operate the remote control.
Back of
the main R L If “REMOTE 1” appears (The main unit is in “REMOTE 1” mode.)
unit Press and hold [ENTER] and [1] on the remote control for at least
2 seconds.
If “REMOTE 2” appears (The main unit is in “REMOTE 2” mode.)
(R) (L) Press and hold [ENTER] and [2] on the remote control for at least
2 seconds.
Analog player
(not included) Note
You can still operate a television using the remote control (A see
1 Press [TUNER/AUX] (main unit: [AUX]) to select above) even after switching the mode.
“AUX”.
The unit comes on.

2 For listening : Proceed to step 3.

For recording : Press [[ REC] on the main unit
(recording starts).
Press [L] (main unit: [L, STOP]) to
stop recording.

3 Start playback from external source.

• For details, refer to the instruction manual of the units which are to RQT8092
be connected.
• When units other than those described above are to be 25
connected, please consult your audio dealer. 25
 Using other equipment

Optional antenna connections Home Theater—Enjoying more powerful

sound
Use outdoor antenna if radio reception is poor.
Enjoy the powerful movie theater and hall-like sound available with
FM outdoor antenna multiple channel audio found on DVD-Video by connecting an
ENGLISH

amplifier and speakers.

FM outdoor antenna Before connection
(not included) • Disconnect the AC power supply cord.
• Turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating
75 coaxial cable instructions.
Back of the (not included) • The equipment connections described are examples.
main unit • Peripheral equipment and optional cables sold separately unless
FM ANT otherwise indicated.
(75Ω)

• Disconnect the FM indoor antenna. Amplifier (not included)

• The antenna should be installed by a competent technician. VOLUME

AM outdoor antenna

AM outdoor antenna
(not included) (DVD) IN

Back of the 5 -12 m

main unit Speakers (example)
1 Connect three or more
AM ANT speakers for surround
LOOP
EXT sound.
AM loop
antenna
2 (included)
Optical digital audio cable
(not included)
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
• Run a piece of vinyl wire horizontally across a window or other
convenient location.
• Leave the loop antenna connected.

Note
Disconnect the outdoor antenna when the unit is not in use. Back of the
Do not use the outdoor antenna during a lightning storm. main unit
Using other equipment

OPTICAL

Digital output OUT

RAM DVD-V VCD CD WMA MP3

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through To enjoy multi-channel surround sound
this unit’s OPTICAL OUT terminal. Connect an amplifier with a built-in decoder or a decoder-amplifier
combination.
PCM Digital Output Change the settings in “PCM Digital Output” in the “Audio” tab (A
page 19).
Select the maximum sampling frequency of PCM digital output. • You can only use DTS Digital Surround decoders that are
Check the digital input limitations of the equipment you connect. compatible with DVD.
Off: When not connected digitally

a
Up to 48 kHz (factory preset): Recording Output

Signals over 48 kHz converted to 48 or 44.1 kHz
Up to 96 kHz: Signals over 96 kHz converted to 48 or 44.1 kHz
Note
• Signals from copy-protected discs are converted to 48 or 44.1 kHz
irrespective of the setting.
• Some equipment cannot handle sampling frequencies of 88.2
kHz, even if they can handle 96 kHz. Read your equipment’s
operating instructions for details.
b
• With DVD, the following conditions must be met: the disc doesn’t
have protection preventing digital recording, and the recording
equipment can handle signals with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
• You cannot record WMA/MP3.
When recording DVDs, make the following settings.
– Advanced Surround: Off (A page 23).
– PCM Digital Output: Up to 48 kHz (A page 19, “Audio” tab).
– Dolby Digital/DTS Digital Surround/MPEG\: PCM (A page 19,
“Audio” tab).
\MPEG: For areas except Southeast Asia.

Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround and MPEG

Bitstream (Factory preset for Dolby Digital and DTS Digital
Surround):
Select if the equipment you connected can decode the signal.
PCM (Factory preset for MPEG ):
Select if the equipment you connected cannot decode the signal.
MPEG: For areas except Southeast Asia.

RQT8092
IMPORTANT
26 If the equipment you connected cannot decode the signal, the
setting must be changed to PCM. If not, signals the equipment
26
cannot process will be output by this unit, causing high levels
of noise which can damage your hearing and the speakers.
 Glossary Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal.
This is called decoding. “DTS” and “DTS 2.0 + Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

ENGLISH
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
be recorded on one disc using this method.
and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
This surround system is used in many movie theaters around the
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
world. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
sound effects are possible.

Dynamic range
, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
Pacific MicrosonicsTM are either registered trademarks or
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
trademarks of Pacific Microsonics, Inc. in the United States and/
level of sound before distortion occurs.
or other countries.
Film and video HDCD system manufactured under license from Pacific
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can Microsonics, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of the
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161,
method of progressive output. 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in
For NTSC Australia: 669114, with other patents pending.
Film is 24 or 30 frames per second, with motion picture film generally
being 24 frames per second.
Video is 60 fields per second (two fields making up one frame).
For PAL
Film is 25 frames per second.
Video is 50 fields per second (two fields making up one frame).

Frame still and field still

Frames are the still pictures that go together to make a moving picture.
There are about 30 frames shown each second.
One frame is made up of two fields. A regular television shows these
fields one after the other to create frames.
A still is shown when you pause a moving picture. A frame still is
made up of two alternating fields, so the picture may appear blurred,
but overall quality is high.
A field still is not blurred, but it has only half the information of a frame
still so picture quality is lower.

Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan

Glossary
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses twice
the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are called
480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.

I/P/B
MPEG 2, the video compression standard adapted for use with
DVD-Video, codes frames using these 3 picture types.
I: Intra coded picture
This picture has the best quality and is the best to use when
adjusting the picture.
P: Predictive coded picture
This picture is calculated based on past I or P-pictures.
B: Bidirectionally-predictive coded picture
This picture is calculated by comparing past and future I and
P-pictures so it has the lowest volume of information.

Linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.

Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave RQT8092
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital encoding).
Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second, so 27
larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the original sound. 27
 Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the remedies indicated in the chart do
not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
Power
No power.
The unit is automatically
ENGLISH
switched to the standby mode.
Unresponsive or inoperable function
No response when buttons
pressed.
No operations can be
performed with the remote
control.
Cannot play DVDs.
No picture or sound.
You have forgotten your
ratings password.
Reset all the settings to Factory
Preset.
Specific operation undesirable or unexpected
It takes time before play starts.
MP3
Folders deeper than the eighth
layer on a data disc are not
displayed correctly.
WMA MP3 JPEG
A menu screen appears during
skip or search. VCD
Playback control menu doesn’t
appear. VCD with playback control
The program and random play
functions do not work. DVD-V
Programmed items are not
played. DVD-V
Troubleshooting guide
Scenes are skipped
intermittently. RAM DVD-V
Subtitle
Subtitle position is wrong.
No subtitles.
Marker
Cannot add markers.
A-B repeat
Point B is automatically set.
A-B repeat is automatically
canceled.
Sound
Sound distorted.
Effects do not work.
Humming heard during play.
No sound
Menus
The Setup menu cannot be
accessed.
RQT8092
28
28
Page
• Insert the AC power supply cord securely. 5
• The unit was switched to standby by the sleep timer or auto-off function. 24, 25
• This unit cannot play discs other than the ones listed in these operating instructions. 7, 15
• Some operations may be prohibited by the disc. —
• The unit may not be operating properly due to lightning, static electricity or some other external —
factor. Turn the unit off then back to ON. Alternatively, turn the unit off, disconnect the AC power
supply cord, and then reconnect it.
• Condensation has formed: Wait 1 to 2 hours for it to evaporate. —
• Check that the batteries are installed correctly. 5
• The batteries are depleted: replace them with new ones. 5
• Aim the remote control at the remote control sensor and operate. 8
• The remote control and main unit are in different modes. 25
Change the remote control mode to match the main unit mode.
• CD Mode is on. Press [SHIFT]+[CD MODE] to turn CD Mode off. 12
• Check the video or audio connection. 4, 5
• Check the power or input setting of the connected equipment. —
• Check that the DVD-RAM has something recorded in it. —
• While stopped and “DVD/CD” is the source, press and hold [L, STOP] on the main unit and —
[h10] on the remote control until “Initialized (or Initialised)” disappears from the television.
Turn the unit off and on again.
All settings will return to the default values.
• Play may take time to begin when an MP3 track has still picture data. Even after the track starts, —
the correct play time will not be displayed. This is normal.
• Folders deeper than the eighth layer are displayed as the eighth layer. —
• This is normal for Video CDs. —
• Press [L] twice and then press [:, DVD/CD]. —
• These functions do not work with some DVD-Videos. —
• Some items cannot be played even if you have programmed them. —
•
If you change the volume or sound field/quality setting during ADVANCED DISC REVIEW, the 12
function continues without the on-screen display. Press [A.DISC REVIEW] again to cancel the
function.
• Adjust the position. (“Subtitle Position” in the Display Menu.) 17
• Display the subtitles. 13
• You cannot add markers with DVD-RAM. —
• If the disc’s elapsed play time doesn’t appear on the unit’s display, you cannot add markers. —
• The end of an item becomes point B when it is reached. —
• A-B repeat is canceled when you press [SHIFT]+[QUICK REPLAY]. —
• Noise may occur when playing WMA. —
• Some audio effects do not work or have less effect with some discs. —
• Multi Re-master and Advanced Surround do not work if you have changed the play speed. —
• An AC power supply cord or fluorescent light is near the cables. Keep other appliances and —
cords away from this unit’s cables.
• There may be a pause in sound when you change the play speed. 13
• Select “DVD/CD” as the source. —
• Cancel program and random play. 16
Picture abnormal or un-viewable
Picture distorted.
Picture size doesn’t fit the
screen.
The television may display
incorrectly or colors appear
faded.
Menu is not displayed
correctly.
Auto zoom function does not
work well.
The picture on the television
disappears or stripes appear
on the screen.
Progressive video
There is ghosting when
progressive output is on.
Picture not in progressive
output.
Listening to the radio
Noise is heard.
“ST” flickers or doesn’t light.
Sound is distorted.
A beat sound is heard.
A low hum is heard during AM
broadcasts.
Unit displays
Although the unit is on standby
mode, the display lights up and
changes continuously.
The display is dark.
“NO PLAY”
“NO DISC”
“F61”
“DVD U11”
“ERROR”
“DVD HMM”
MM stands for a number.
Television displays
“This disc may not be played
in your region”
No on-screen display.
“ ”
“Cannot display group xx,
content xx”
Using the cassette deck
Poor quality sound.
Recording is not possible.
Memory reset (Initialization)
When the following situations occur, refer to the instructions below to reset the memory:
• There is no response when buttons are pressed.
• You want to clear and reset the memory contents.
To reset memory
1 Disconnect the AC power supply cord. (Wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 2.)
2 While pressing and holding down [y
“– – – – – – – – – ” appears on the display.
3 Release [y y/I].
All the settings are returned to the factory preset.
You will need to reset the memory items.
Page
• Some distortion is normal during SEARCH. —
• Ensure that the unit is connected directly to the television, and is not connected through a video 4
cassette recorder.
• Change “TV Aspect” in the “Video” tab. 19
• Change the Zoom setting. 13
• The unit and television are using different video systems. —
ENGLISH
For Southeast Asia Use a multi-system or NTSC television.
For others Use a multi-system or PAL television.
• The system used on the disc does not match your television.
– PAL discs cannot be correctly viewed on an NTSC television. —
– This unit can convert NTSC signals to PAL 60 for viewing on a PAL television (“NTSC Disc 19
Output” in “Video” tab.)
• Restore the zoom ratio to “x1.00”. 13
• Set “Subtitle Position” in Display Menu to “0”. 17
• Turn off TV’s zoom function. —
• Use the other preset aspect ratios or manual adjustment. 13
• Zoom function may not work well, especially in dark scenes and may not work depending on —
the type of disc.
• Mobile telephone chargers can cause some disturbance. —
• If you are using a TV indoor antenna, change to an outdoor antenna. —
• The television antenna wire is too close to the unit. Separate the antenna wire of the television from the unit. —
• This problem is caused by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video, but should be 17
corrected if you use interlace output. Change “Video Output Mode” in Picture Menu to
“480i (or 525i)” or “576i (or 625i)”.
• Press [SHIFT]+[PROGRESSIVE] so “PRG” is displayed. Or select “480p (or 525p)” or 11, 17
“576p (or 625p)” in “Video Output Mode” in Picture Menu.
• If the unit is connected to the television through VIDEO OUT or S VIDEO OUT terminal, output 4
will be interlace, even if “PRG” is displayed.
• Adjust the position of the FM or AM antenna. —
• Use an outdoor antenna. 26
• Turn the television off or separate it from the unit. —
• Separate the antenna from other cables and cords. —
• Turn off the demo function. 6
• If you set the clock, demo function will be turned off automatically. 6
• Press [SHIFT]+[DIMMER] to brighten the display. 25
• You inserted a disc the unit cannot play; insert one that can. 7
• You inserted a blank disc. —
•
Troubleshooting guide
You haven’t inserted a disc; insert one. —
• You haven’t inserted the disc correctly; insert it correctly. 31
• Check and correct the speaker cord connections. 5
If this does not fix the problem, there is a power supply problem. Consult the dealer.
• Disc is dirty. Wipe it clean. 7
• Incorrect operation performed. Read the instructions and try again. —
• Trouble may have occurred. The number following “H” depends on the status of the unit. —
Turn the unit off and back to ON. Alternatively, turn the unit off, disconnect the AC power
supply cord, and then reconnect it.
• If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service number and contact a qualified service person. —
• You can only play DVD-Video if their region number is the same or includes the same region number —
as the unit or if the DVD-Video is marked “ALL”. Confirm the region number for the unit on the back of
the main unit.
• Select “On” in “On-Screen Messages” in “Display” tab. 19
• The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc. —
• You are trying to display incompatible contents. —
• Clean the heads. 31
• If the erasure prevention tabs have been removed, cover the holes with adhesive tape. 21
RQT8092
y/I] on the main unit, reconnect the AC power supply cord.
29
29
 Specifications
AMPLIFIER SECTION VIDEO SECTION
RMS Output Power Stereo mode both channels driven: 10 % Video system PAL625/50, PAL525/60, NTSC
Total Harmonic Distortion Composite video output
1 kHz Front Ch 110 W per channel (4 Ω) Output level 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Total RMS Stereo mode power 220 W Terminal Pin jack (1 system)
PMPO output power 2400 W S-video output
Y output level 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
ENGLISH

C output level 0.3 Vp-p (75 Ω) (PAL)

FM/AM TUNER, TERMINALS SECTION 0.286 Vp-p (75 Ω) (NTSC)
Preset station FM 15 stations Terminal S terminal (1 system)
AM 15 stations Component video output
Frequency Modulation (FM) Y output level 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Frequency range 87.50 – 108.00 MHz (50 kHz step) PB output level 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Sensitivity 2.5 µV (IHF) PR output level 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
S/N 26dB 2.2 µV Terminal Pin jack (Y : green, PB : blue, PR : red) (1 system)
Antenna terminals 75 Ω (unbalanced)
Amplitude Modulation (AM)
Frequency range 522 – 1629 kHz (9 kHz step)
520 – 1630 kHz (10 kHz step)
AM Sensitivity S/N 20dB at 1000 kHz 560 µV/m
SPEAKER SECTION
Type 3 way, 3 speaker system (Bass reflex)
Audio performance (Amplifier) Speaker unit(s) Impedance 4 Ω
Input sensitivity/Input impedance 1. Woofer 16 cm cone type
Aux 250 mV, 12 kΩ 2. Tweeter 6 cm cone type
Digital audio output 3. Super tweeter Piezo type
Optical digital output Optical terminal Input power (IEC) 110 W (Max)
Phone jack Output sound pressure 84 dB/W (1.0 m)
Terminal Stereo, 3.5 mm jack Cross over frequency 5 kHz, 10 kHz
Mic jack Frequency range 39 Hz–21 kHz (-16 dB)
Sensitivity 0.7 mV, 600 Ω 52 Hz–20 kHz (-10 dB)
Terminal Mono, 6.3 mm jack (2 system) Dimensions (WxHxD) 227 x 344 x 234 mm
Mass 3.3 kg

CASSETTE DECK SECTION GENERAL

Type Auto-Reverse Power supply
Track system 4-Track, 2 Channel For the Middle East and South Africa AC 220–240V, 50/60 Hz
Heads
Record/playback Solid permalloy head For others AC 110–127V/220–240V, 50/60 Hz
Erasure Double gap ferrite head Power consumption 193 W
Motor DC servo motor Dimensions (WxHxD) 250 x 364 x 330 mm
Recording system AC bias 100 kHz
Mass 8 kg
Erasing system AC erase 100 kHz
Operating temperature range +5°C to +35°C
Tape speed 4.8 cm/s
Operating humidity range 5% to 90% RH (no condensation)
Overall frequency response (+3, -6 dB) at DECK OUT
Normal 35 Hz –14 kHz
S/N ratio 50 dB (A weighted) Power consumption in standby mode 0.9 W (approximate)
Wow and flutter 0.18% (WRMS)
Fast forward and rewind time Approx. 120 seconds with Note:
C-60 cassette tape
1. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications

Mass and dimensions are approximate.

DISC SECTION 2. Total harmonic distortion is measured by the digital spectrum
Disc played (8 cm or 12 cm) analyzer.
(1) DVD (DVD-Video)
(2) DVD-RAM (DVD-VR, JPEG 4, 5)
(3) DVD-R/RW (DVD-Video)
+R/RW (Video)
(4) CD, CD-R/RW [CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD 1, MP3 2, 5,
WMA 3, 5, JPEG 4, 5, HighMAT Level 2 (Audio
and Image)]
1 Conforming to IEC62107

2 Compatible compression rate: between 32 kbps and 320 kbps

3 Compatible compression rate: between 48 kbps and 320 kbps

4 Exif Ver 2.1 JPEG Baseline files

Picture resolution: between 320 x 240 and 6144 x 4096 pixels

(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
5 The total combined maximum number of recognizable audio,

picture and movie contents and groups: 4000 audio, picture and
movie contents and 400 groups.

Pick up
Wavelength
CD 785 nm
DVD 662 nm
Audio output (Disc)
Number of channels (FL, FR), 2 ch (stereo)

RQT8092

30
30
 Tray/disc handling procedure
Not adhering to the following may cause problems.

Opening/closing a disc tray Inserting a disc correctly

Open/close the tray with Insert to fit in the tray

ENGLISH
[OPEN/CLOSE ] button only. guide.

OPEN/CLOSE

8 cm

XXXXXXX XXX XXXXXX

XXXXX XX XXXX

XXXX XXX
X X XX

XXXXX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XXXX

XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXX
XXXX XXXX XXX
XXXX

XXXXXXX XXX XXXXXX

XXXXX XX XXXX

XX XXX
XX X

X X XX
XXXXX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XXXX

XX

XX X
X

X
XXXXX XXXX XXXX

XX
XXXXX XXXX XXXX

X
XX XXX
XX X
XX
X
• Insert the disc correctly in the position as indicated in the diagrams
above.
• Place only one disc on a tray.
• Insert the disc with the label side facing up.

Maintenance
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
For a cleaner, crisper sound (cassette deck)
• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
• Before using chemically treated cloth, read the instructions that Clean the heads regularly to assure good quality playback and
came with the cloth carefully. recording. Use a cleaning tape (not included).

Tray/disc handling procedure/Maintenance

RQT8092

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. En 31

31
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/ RQT8092-G
L0205KW0
 ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬/‫اﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

RQT8092

33 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. En

32
Web Site: http://www.panasonic.co.jp/global/ RQT8092-G
L0205KW0
 ‫اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ وﺟﺎﻓـﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﺟﻞ اﳊﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮت ﺣﺎد وواﺿﺢ )دك اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ(‬ ‫ﻗﻖ اﻟﻄﻼء أو اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﺑﺪا اﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﺤﻮل أو ﻣﺮ ّ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻧــﻈّـﻒ اﻟــﺮؤوس ﺑـﺼــﻮرة دورﻳـﺔ ﻟـﻀـﻤــﺎن ﻧــﻮﻋـﻴـﺔ ﺟـﻴــﺪة ﻟــﻼﻋــﺎدة اﻟ ـﺼــﻮﺗـﻴــﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎش ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﻛﻴـﻤـﺎوﻳﺎ‪ ،‬اﻗﺮأ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌـﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻘﻤﺎش ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪32‬‬
‫‪33‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(30_33)new2‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 4:07 PM‬‬

 ‫اﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪم اﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ادﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬اﻏﻼق ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬

‫ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬

‫اﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬اﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗ ــ ــﺜ ــ ــﺒــ ـــﺖ داﺧــ ـــﻞ دﻟـ ــ ــﻴ ــ ـــﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰر ]‪ [OPEN/CLOSE c‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN/CLOSE‬‬

‫‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ‬

‫‪XXXXXXX XXX XXXXXX‬‬

‫‪XXXXX XX XXXX‬‬

‫‪XXXX XXX‬‬
‫‪XXXX‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫‪XXXXX XX XXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX XX XXXX‬‬
‫‪XXXXX XXXX XXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX XXXX XXXX‬‬
‫‪X X X X XX X‬‬
‫‪XXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXX XXX‬‬
‫‪XX XX‬‬

‫ﺑﻴﺪك‪.‬‬

‫‪XXXXXXX XXX XXXXXX‬‬

‫‪XXXXX XX XXXX‬‬
‫‪XX XXX‬‬
‫‪XX X‬‬

‫‪X X XX‬‬

‫‪XXXXX XX XXXX‬‬ ‫‪XXXXX XX XXXX‬‬

‫‪XX‬‬

‫‪XX X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪XXXXX XXXX XXXX‬‬

‫‪XX‬‬

‫‪XXXXX XXXX XXXX‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪XX XXX‬‬
‫‪XX X‬‬
‫‪XX‬‬
‫‪X‬‬

‫ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴّﻦ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫•‬

‫اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﺎﲡﺎه اﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫اﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪31‬‬
‫‪34‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(30_33)new3‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 8:48 AM‬‬


‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪PAL625/50, PAL525/60, NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫‪ 75) 1 Vp-p‬اوم(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﳋﺮج‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ دﺑﻮس )‪ 1‬ﻧﻈﺎم(‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪S–video‬‬ ‫‪ 2400‬واط‬
‫‪ 75) 1 Vp-p‬اوم(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج ‪Y‬‬
‫‪ 75) 0.3 Vp-p‬اوم( )‪(PAL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج ‪C‬‬
‫‪ 75) 0.286 Vp-p‬اوم( )‪(NTSC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف ‪ 1) S‬ﻧﻈﺎم(‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫ﺧﺮج ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﻧﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ 75) 1 Vp-p‬اوم(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج ‪Y‬‬
‫‪ 75) 0.7 Vp-p‬اوم(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج ‪PB‬‬
‫‪ 75) 0.7 Vp-p‬اوم(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺧﺮج ‪PR‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ دﺑﻮس )‪ :Y‬اﺧﻀﺮ‪ :PB ،‬ازق‪ :PR ،‬اﺣﻤﺮ( )‪ 1‬ﻧﻈﺎم(‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻻﺧﺮاج ‪ RMS‬ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻼ اﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﲔ‪ :‬ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻮاﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪10%‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 110‬واط ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻨﺎة )‪ 4‬أوم(‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ 220 RMS‬واط‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻻﺧﺮاج اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺼﻮى‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ ‪ ،FM/AM‬اﻻﻃﺮاف‬
‫‪ 15 FM‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت‬
‫‪ 15 AM‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﲔ اﻟﺘﺮدد )‪(FM‬‬
‫‪ 108.00 – 87.50‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﲟﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ 50‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺘﺮددات‬
‫‪ µ 2.5‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪(IHF‬‬ ‫اﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ µ 2.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ‪ 26‬دﻳﺴﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 75‬أوم )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮازن(‬ ‫اﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻴﺎت‬

‫ﺗﻀﻤﲔ اﻟﺘﺮدد )‪(AM‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‬ ‫‪ 1629–522‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﲟﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺘﺮددات‬
‫‪ 3‬اﲡﺎﻫﺎت‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎم ‪ 3‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت )ﺑﺎص ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ(‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻮع‬ ‫‪ 1630–520‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﲟﺮاﺣﻞ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﳌﻘﺎوﻣﺔ ‪ 4‬أوم‬ ‫وﺣﺪة )وﺣﺪات( اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ ،AM‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺳﻢ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﺘﺮددات اﳋﻔﻴﻀﺔ‬
‫‪ µ 560‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬م‬ ‫اﻟﻰ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ‪ 20‬دﻳﺴﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 1000‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺳﻢ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻮﻳﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﻣﻀﻐﻮط‬ ‫‪. .3‬ﺗﻮﻳﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄدﻳﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫‪ 110‬واط )ﺣﺪ اﻗﺼﻰ(‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ )‪(IEC‬‬ ‫دﺧﻞ اﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺔ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ 84‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪/‬واط )‪1.0‬م(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺿﻐﻂ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪ 250‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 12 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮأوم‬ ‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 10،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮدد اﳌﻔﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ 39‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 21-‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ -16‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺘﺮددات‬ ‫ﻃﺮف ﺑﺼﺮي‬ ‫اﳋﺮج اﻟﺒﺼﺮي اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ 52‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 20-‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ -10‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺮأس‬
‫‪ 234 x 344 x 227‬ﱈ‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )اﻟﻌﺮض × اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع × اﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ 3.5‬ﱈ اﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫‪ 3.3‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻮزن‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬
‫‪ 0.7‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 600 ،‬أوم‬ ‫اﳊﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ 6.3‬ﱈ )ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎن(‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮف‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﻘﺪرة‬
‫ﻟﻠﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ وﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد ‪ 240–220‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد ‪ 240–220/127–110‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 60/50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻷﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ دك اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ 193‬واط‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻘﺪرةا‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻛﺲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻮع‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎت‪ 2 ،‬ﻗﻨﺎة‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﳌﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 330 x 364 x 250‬ﱈ‬ ‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )اﻟﻌﺮض × اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع × اﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻮزن‬ ‫اﻟﺮؤوس‬
‫رأس ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪ +5‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻰ ‪ +35‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪى درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫رأس ﺣﺪﻳﺪي ﻓﺠﻮة ﻣﺰدوﺟﺔ‬ ‫اﶈﻮ‬
‫‪ 5%‬اﻟﻰ ‪) RH 90%‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪى رﻃﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮك ﻣﺆازر ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪DC‬‬ ‫اﶈﺮك‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬اﻧﺤﻴﺎزي ‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺎ(‬
‫‪ 0.9‬واط )ﺗﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺪرة اﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬ﻣﺴﺢ ‪ 100‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﶈﻮ‬
‫‪ 4.8‬ﺳﻢ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ )‪ -6 ،+3‬دﻳﺴﺒﻞ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﺮج ‪DECK OUT‬‬

‫‪ .1‬اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ دون إﺷﻌﺎر ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 35‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ 14 -‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﻟﻮزن واﻷﺑﻌﺎد ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 50‬دﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺛﻘﻞ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‬
‫‪ .2‬ﰎ ﻗﻴﺎس اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﻃﻴﻔﻲ رﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(WRMS) 0.18%‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ 120‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪C-60‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻋﺎدي‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻﺷﺎرة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎوت اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت واﳋﻔﻘﺎن‬
‫زﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ واﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬

‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ 8‬ﺳﻢ او ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ(‬
‫)‪ DVD) DVD (1‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫)‪) DVD-RAM (2‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪( 5 ، 4 JPEG ،DVD-VR‬‬
‫)‪ DVD) DVD-R/RW (3‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫‪) +R/RW‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫)‪ (4‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،CD-DA] CD, CD-R/RW‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳـﻮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪HighMAT ، 5 ، 4JPEG ، 5 ، 3WMA ، 5 ، 2MP3 ، 1SVCD‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪) 2‬ﺻﻮت و ﺻﻮرة([‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪IEC62107‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪ :‬ﺑﲔ ‪ kbps 32‬و ‪kbps 320‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﻀﻐﻂ اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪ :‬ﺑﲔ ‪ kbps 48‬و ‪kbps 320‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ‪Exif Ver 2.1 JPEG‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﲢﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ :‬ﺑﲔ ‪ 240 x 320‬و ‪ 4096 x 6144‬ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ )اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4:2:2‬او ‪(4:2:0‬‬

‫‪ 5‬اﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﳉﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬي ﳝﻜﻦ ﲤﻴﻴﺰه‬
‫واﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ واﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت‪ 4000 :‬ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫واﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ و ‪ 400‬ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ اﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻮل اﳌﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ 785‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪CD‬‬
‫‪ 662‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD‬‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ(‬

‫)‪ 2 ،(FR ،FL‬ﻗﻨﺎة )اﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻋﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪35‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(30_33)new3‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 1:19 PM‬‬

 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ او ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة‬
‫_‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻹﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪.SEARCH‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﺑﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬وﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ”‪ “TV Aspect‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ”‪.“Video‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻻﻳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻧﻈﺎﻣﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻻﻧﻈﻤﺔ او ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻃﺊ او ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻻﻟﻮان ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺪول اﻷﺧﺮى اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻻﻧﻈﻤﺔ او ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.PAL‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫– ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪ PAL‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫– ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﺷﺎرات ‪ NTSC‬اﻟﻰ ‪ PAL 60‬ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪) PAL‬ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫”‪ “NTSC Disc Output‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ”‪(.“Video‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﺰوم اﻟﻰ ”‪.“x1.00‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ”‪ “Subtitle Position‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Display Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪.“0‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫اوﻗﻒ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻨﺴﺐ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻟﻼﺑﻌﺎد اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً او ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻴﺪوي‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻓﻲ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ وﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻬﻮاﺗﻒ اﳋﻠﻮﻳﺔ أن ﲢﺪث ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو‬
‫_‬ ‫إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟﺪا ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪث ﻫﺬه اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ او اﳌﺎدة اﳌﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD video‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة ﺷﺒﺤﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳋﺮج‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﳋﺮج اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ”‪ “Video Output Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Picture Menu‬ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪480i‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)او ‪ “(525i‬او ”‪) 576i‬او ‪.“(625i‬‬
‫‪17, 11‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PROGRESSIVE]+[SHIFT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ”‪ .“PRG‬او اﺧﺘﺮ ”‪) “480p‬او ‪ (525p‬او‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﳋﺮج اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫”‪) 576p‬او ‪ “(625p‬ﻣﻦ ”‪ “Video Output Mode‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫اذا ﰎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻃﺮف ‪ VIDEO OUT‬او ‪ ،S VIDEO OUT‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ اﳋﺮج‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﰎ ﻋﺮض ”‪.“PRG‬‬
‫ً‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻟﻰ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫_‬ ‫• اﺿﺒﻂ اﲡﺎه اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬أو ‪.AM‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪26‬‬ ‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “ST‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻌﺸﺎً أو ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺼﺤﻮب ﺑﺎﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫• أدر ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻹﻳﻘﺎف أو اﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﻧﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫_‬
‫• اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺳﻼك أو اﻟﻜﺒﻼت اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﻃﻨﲔ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻟﻰ ﺑﺚ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪.AM‬‬
‫إﺧﻄﺎرات ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ﻋﺮض اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ان اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ • ،‬اوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫• اذا ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ اﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اوﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض وﺗﺘﻐ ّﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DIMMER]+[SHIFT‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫• أدﺧﻠﺖ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“NO PLAY‬‬
‫_‬ ‫• أدﺧﻠﺖ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ُﺗﺪﺧﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ؛ أدﺧﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“NO DISC‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ّ‬

‫‪31‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻢ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬ ‫• اﻓﺤﺺ وﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت ﻛﺒﻼت اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“F61‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮزع ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫إذا ﻟﻢ ُﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎك ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ إﻣﺪاد اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪ .‬اﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﲢﺮي اﻷﻋﻄﺎل‬

‫‪7‬‬ ‫• اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬اﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“DVD U11‬‬

‫_‬ ‫• ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻃﻲء‪ .‬اﻗﺮأ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت وﺣﺎول ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“ERROR‬‬
‫_‬ ‫• رﲟﺎ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ اﳊﺮف ”‪ “H‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز وأﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫”‪“DVD HMM‬‬
‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ .‬وﻛﺈﺟﺮاء ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز واﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ MM‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﻟﻰ رﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫_‬
‫• إذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ رﻗﻢ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎء ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ رﻗﻢ اﳋﺪﻣﺔ واﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﺎﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻻﺧﻄﺎرات اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬

‫_‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-Video‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮن رﻗﻢ اﻻﻗﻠﻴﻢ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة او اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪DVD-‬‬ ‫‪“This disc may not be played in‬‬
‫‪ Video‬ﲢﻤﻞ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ”‪ .“ALL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻛﻴﺪ رﻗﻢ اﻻﻗﻠﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪your region‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “On‬ﻓﻲ ”‪ “On-Screen Messages‬ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”‪.“Display‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫• ﳝﻨﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة او اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫” “‬
‫_‬ ‫• ﻻ ﲢﺎول ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪“Cannot display group xx,‬‬
‫”‪content xx‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل دك اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ اﻟﺮؤوس‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪21‬‬ ‫• إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ اﶈﻮ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎت ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻴﺲ ﳑﻜﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫اﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة )اﻻﻋﺪاد(‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوث اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ادﻧﺎه ﻻﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ اﻻزرار ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ واﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‬
‫‪ 1‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪) .AC‬اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ‪ 3‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪(.2‬‬
‫‪ [y‬وﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪.AC‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ زر ]‪y/I‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ” – – – – – – – – –“ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.[y‬‬
‫‪ 3‬اﻃﻠﻖ اﻟﺰر ]‪y/I‬‬
‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻋﺎدة ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﲢﺘﺎج اﻟﻰ اﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(28_29)new2‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 8:40 AM‬‬

 ‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﲢّﺮي اﻷﻋﻄﺎل‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﻔﺤﻮص اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة أدﻧﺎه‪ .‬إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﻴﻘﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻔﺤﺺ أو ﻃﺮق ﻋﻼﺟﻬﺎ اﳌﺸﺎر اﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﳉﺪول‪ ،‬ﻻ ﲢﺎول ﺣﻞ اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮزع ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻹرﺷﺎدات‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫وﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺸﺎرة‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪25, 24‬‬ ‫ﲢﻮل اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم او وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ او ﻣﺘﻌﺬرة‬
‫‪15, 7‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺎز ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻷزرار‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻼت ﻣﺤﻈﻮرة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ أن ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ اﻟﺒﺮق أو ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ اﻹﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ أو اﻟﻌﻮاﻣﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﳋﺎرﺟﻴﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى‪ .‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز وأﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ .‬وﻛﺈﺟﺮاء ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز‬
‫واﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ﺛﻢ أﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺜﻔﺖ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ :‬اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﳌﺪة ﺳﺎﻋﺔ أو ﺳﺎﻋﺘﲔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ إﺟﺮاء اي ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﺣﺪة‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻏﺖ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺟﻪ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲡﺎه اﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ وﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫و ّ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ واﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﰎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .CD‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CD MODE]+[SHIFT‬ﻻﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.DVD‬‬

‫‪5, 4‬‬ ‫اﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة او اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮرة او ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫اﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﻘﺪرة او ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎدة ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD-RAM‬‬ ‫•‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف وأﺛﻨﺎء اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”‪ “DVD/CD‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ واﺑﻖ اﻟﺰر ]‪[L, STOP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ واﻟﺰر ]‪ [h10‬ﻋﻠﻰ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮ ً‬ ‫أﻋﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎت‬
‫”‪) Initialized‬او ‪ “(Initialised‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬ ‫اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫أدر اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف ﺛﻢ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮد ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ او ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‬

‫_‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد ﺻﻮرة ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎر ‪ MP3‬اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮق وﻗﺘﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء اﳌﺴﺎر‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض وﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬا أﻣﺮ ﻋﺎدي‪.‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬
‫_‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻮﻟﺪرات اﻷﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻔﻮﻟﺪرات ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺛﺎﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻮﻟﺪرات اﻷﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.Video CD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ أو‬
‫اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪VCD .‬‬
‫_‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [L‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[:, DVD/CD‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎدة اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ VCD‬ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎدة اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ -DVD‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺮض‬

‫دﻟﻴﻞ ّ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪DVD-V .‬‬
‫_‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺒﺮﻣﺠﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪DVD-V .‬‬

‫ﲢﺮي اﻷﻋﻄﺎل‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت او ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻮدة‪/‬ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺼﻮت ﺧﻼل‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،ADVANCED DISC REVIEW‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ دون اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪RAM DVD-V‬‬
‫]‪ [A.DISC REVIEW‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪ “Subtitle Position”) .‬ﻓﻲ ‪(.Display Menu‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫اﻋﺮض اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻻﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ﻣﻊ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD-RAM‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫اذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻻﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮار ‪A-B‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻫﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫_‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻜﺮار ‪ A-B‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[QUICK REPLAY]+[SHIFT‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻜﺮار ‪ A-B‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدي او ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫_‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﲢﺪث اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.WMA‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﺼﺤﻮب ﺑﺎﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ أو ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ أﻗﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫_‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﳌﺆﺛﺮ ‪ Multi Re-master‬و ‪ Advanced Surround‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫_‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت ﻃﻨﲔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد أو ﻣﺼﺒﺎح ﻓﻠﻮرﺳﻨﺘﻲ ﺑﻘﺮب ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﺘﺮددات اﳋﻔﻴﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫واﻷﺳﻼك ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺎر اﻟﺘﺮددات اﳋﻔﻴﻀﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺻﻮت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫_‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “DVD/CD‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ‪.SETUP‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬
‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪37‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(28_29)new2‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 1:12 PM‬‬

 ‫أﻧﺘﺞ ﲟﻮﺟﺐ رﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت‬
‫”‪ “Dolby‬واﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ D‬اﳌﺰدوج ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻞ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮم ﻣﺤﻠﻞ اﻟـﺸـﻴـﻔـﺮة ﺑـﺎﺳـﺘـﻌـﺎدة ﺷـﻴـﻔـﺮة اﺷـﺎرات اﻟـﺼـﻮت اﳌـﻮﺟـﻮدة ﻋـﻠـﻰ‬
‫”‪ “DTS‬و ”‪ “DTS 2.0 + Digital Out‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVDs‬اﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪ .‬ﻫﺬا ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪.Digital Theater Systems، Inc.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻫـﺬه ﻃـﺮﻳـﻘـﺔ ﻟـﺘـﺸـﻔـﻴـﺮ اﻻﺷـﺎرات اﻟـﺮﻗـﻤـﻴـﺔ ﻣـﻄـﻮرة ﺑـﻮاﺳـﻄــﺔ ﻣ ـﺨ ـﺘ ـﺒــﺮات‬
‫ﻳـﺤـﺘــﻮي ﻫـﺬا اﳌـﻨـﺘـﺞ ﻋـﻠـﻰ ﺗـﻜ ـﻨــﻮﻟــﻮﺟـﻴـﺔ ﻣـﺤـﻔــﻮﻇـﺔ اﳊـﻘـﻮق ﺣـﺴــﺐ ﻃــﺮﻳـﻘـﺔ‬
‫دوﻟﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺴﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ )‪ 2‬ﻗﻨﺎة(‪ ،‬ﻫﺬه اﻻﺷﺎرات ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﺗﻜﻮن‬
‫اﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت ﻟﺒﻌـﺾ ﺑـﺮاءات اﻹﺧﺘـﺮاع ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤـﺪة وﺣﻘﻮق اﳌﻠﻜـﻴـﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻔـﺮدﻳﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻠـﻜـﻬـﺎ ﺷـﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺎﻛـﺮوﻓﻴـﺰن وﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ اﳊـﻘـﻮق اﻷﺧـﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳـﺠـﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﳊﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮوﻓﻴﺰن ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫واﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ اﳊﻘﻮق‪ ،‬وﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺪة ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ وﻋﺮوض أﺧﺮى‬ ‫‪) DTS‬اﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪودة ﻓﻘﻂ اﻷ اذا ﰎ اﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮوﻓﻴﺰن اﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت اﶈﻴﻂ ﻫﺬا ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ دور ﻋﺮض اﻻﻓﻼم ﻓﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬
‫أو اﻟﻔﻚ ﳑﻨﻮﻋﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎك ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﲔ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ ،‬ﻟﻬﺬا ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎع ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻮاﻗﻌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫اﳌﺪى اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ High Definition Compatible Digital ® ،HDCD ® ،‬و‬
‫™‪ Pacific Microsonics‬ﻫﻲ اﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ او ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﺪى اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻮ اﻻﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﲔ اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﳝﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋـﻪ‬
‫ﻟـﺸــﺮﻛـﺔ‪ Pacific Microsonics, Inc. ،‬ﻓـﻲ اﻟـﻮﻻﻳـﺎت اﳌـﺘـﺤــﺪة و‪/‬او اﻟـﺒـﻠــﺪان‬ ‫ﻓﻮق ﺿﺠﻴﺞ اﳉﻬﺎز واﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻗﺒﻞ ﺣﺪوث اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻠﻢ واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻧـﻈﺎم ‪ HDCD‬ﻣـﺼّﻨـﻊ ﺑـﺘﺮﺧـﻴـﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷـﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Pacific Microsonics, Inc.‬ﻫـﺬا‬ ‫ان اﺳـﻄــﻮاﻧــﺎت ‪ DVD-Videos‬ﻣـﺴـﺠـﻠـﺔ ﺑـﺎﺳـﺘـﻌ ـﻤــﺎل اﻣــﺎ ﺻ ـﻴ ـﻐــﺔ اﻟ ـﻔ ـﻴ ـﻠــﻢ او‬
‫اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻐﻄﻲ ﺑﻮاﺣﺪة او اﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﺘﺮاع اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺬي ﰎ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة اﻻﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪،5،638،074 ،5،479،168 :‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮج اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪،5،864،311 ،5،854،600 ،5،838،274 ،5،808،574 ،5،640،161‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪ ،5،872، 531‬وﻓﻲ اﺳﺘﺮاﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،669114 :‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮاءات اﻻﺧﺘﺮاع اﳌﻌﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 24‬اﻃﺎر او ‪ 30‬اﻃﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎم ﻣﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻳﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 24‬اﻃﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة )ﻣﺠﺎﻟﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎن اﻃﺎر واﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 25‬اﻃﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻣﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة )ﻣﺠﺎﻟﲔ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎن اﻃﺎر واﺣﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫اﻻﻃﺎر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ واﺠﻤﻟﺎل اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫اﻻﻃﺎرات ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮر ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرة ﻓﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎك ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ 30‬اﻃﺎر ﻳﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﻃﺎر اﻟﻮاﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻟﲔ‪ .‬اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﻟـﻌـﺎدي ﻳـﻌـﺮض ﻫـﺬه اﺠﻤﻟـﺎﻻت‬
‫واﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻻﻃﺎرات‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻻﻃﺎر اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻳـﻘـﺎف ﺻـﻮرة اﻟـﻔـﻠـﻢ ﻣـﺆﻗـﺘـﺎً‪ .‬اﻻﻃﺎر اﻟﺜـﺎﺑـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻟﲔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎدﻟﲔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻬﺬا ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﺗﺒﺪو اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻏﻴﺮ واﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎم ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺠﻤﻟـﺎل اﻟـﺜـﺎﺑـﺖ واﺿـﺢ‪ ،‬وﻟـﻜـﻨـﻪ ﻳـﺤـﺘـﻮى ﻓـﻘـﻂ ﻋـﻠـﻰ ﻧـﺼـﻒ ﻣـﻌـﻠـﻮﻣـﺎت اﻻﻃـﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻬﺬا ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪/‬اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‬
‫ان ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﺷﺎرة اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ PAL‬ﻟﻬﺎ ‪) 576‬او ‪ (625‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع‬
‫اﳌﺘﺪاﺧﻞ )‪ ،(i‬اﻣﺎ اﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼع اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺬي ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ‪) 576p‬او‬
‫ﺷﺮح اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت‬

‫‪ ،(625p‬ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺿـﻌـﻒ ﻋـﺪد ﺧـﻄـﻮط اﻻﺳـﺘـﻄـﻼع‪ .‬ﳌـﻘـﺎﻳـﻴـﺲ ‪ ،NTSC‬ﺗﻄـﻠـﻖ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ‪) 480i‬او ‪ (525i‬و ‪) 480p‬او ‪ (525p‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻮاﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﳋﺮج اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮر ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD-Video‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺎً ﻣﻊ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪I/P/B‬‬
‫‪ MPEG 2‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻗﻴﺎس ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻊ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ اﻻﻃﺎرات ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻻﻧﻮاع اﻟـ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ :I‬ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺸﻔﺮة ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺼﻮرة ﲤﺘﻠﻚ اﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮدة واﻻﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ :P‬ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺸﻔﺮة ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻳﺎً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻋﺘﻤﺎدًا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮر ‪ I‬اﻟﻀﻤﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ او ‪ P‬اﻟﺘﻨﺒﺆﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﺗﻨﺒﺆﻳﺎً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺼﻮرة ﲟﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ وﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺻﻮرة ‪ I‬و ‪ P‬ﻟﻬﺬا ﻓﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻗﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬

‫‪) PCM‬اﻧﺘﻘﺎل اﻟﺸﻴﻔﺮة ﻧﺒﻀﻴﺎً( اﳋﻄﻲ‬

‫ﻫـﺬه اﺷــﺎرات رﻗ ـﻤ ـﻴــﺔ ﻏ ـﻴــﺮ ﻣ ـﻀ ـﻐــﻮﻃــﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗ ـﺸ ـﺒــﻪ اﻻﺷــﺎرات اﳌــﻮﺟــﻮدة ﻋ ـﻠــﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪.CDs‬‬

‫)‪ (PBC‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎدة اﻟﻌﺮض‬

‫اذا ﻛـﺎﻧـﺖ اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ اﻟـﻔـﻴـﺪﻳـﻮ ‪ CD‬ﲤﺘـﻠـﻚ وﻇـﻴـﻔـﺔ ﺿـﺒـﻂ اﻟـﺘـﺸـﻐـﻴـﻞ‪ ،‬ﳝـﻜـﻨـﻚ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ واﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮدد اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻴﻨﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ اﻷﻋﻠﻰ )اﺷﺎرة اﻧﺎﻟﻮغ(‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮات ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻰ اﺷﺎرات رﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ رﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮدد اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻟﺬا ﻓﺈن‬
‫‪38‬‬ ‫اﻻﻋﺪاد اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة ﺗﻌﻨﻲ اﻋﺎدة اﻧﺘﺎج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺻﻠﻲ ﲟﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮاﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(27)new1‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 8:35 AM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى‬

‫اﳌﺴﺮح اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ _ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮت اﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮة‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

‫ﲤﺘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮت ﻗﻮي ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺴﺮح اﻻﻓﻼم وﺻﺎﻻت اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ اذا ﻛﺎن اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-Video‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت وﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫• اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪.AC‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬
‫• اوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻻﺟﻬﺰة ﺛﻢ اﻗﺮأ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﺸﺮوﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ اﻣﺜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻻﺟﻬﺰة اﳋﺎرﺟﻴﺔ واﻟﻜﻮاﺑﻞ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻳﺔ ﺗﺒﺎع ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬اﻻ اذا ﰎ ذﻛﺮ‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ اﶈﻮر ‪ 75‬اوم‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫‪FM ANT‬‬
‫)‪(75Ω‬‬
‫‪VOLUME‬‬

‫اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪.FM‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪(DVD) IN‬‬
‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت )ﻣﺜﺎل(‬
‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫اوﺻﻞ ﺛﻼث ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت او اﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 12–5‬م‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮت رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺼﺮي )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫‪AM ANT‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮي ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪LOOP‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪EXT‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬

‫• ﻣﺪد ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮرة اﻓـﻘـﻴـﺔ ﻋـﺒـﺮ اﻟـﻨـﺎﻓـﺬة او اي‬

‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن اﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫اﺗﺮك اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﳊﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮل ﻣﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻮاﺻﻒ اﻟﺒﺮق‪.‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮت اﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‬
‫اوﺻﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة داﺧﻠﻲ او ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮل ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪ ”‪ “PCM Digital Output‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫”‪ @) “Audio‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(19‬‬
‫• ﳝـﻜـﻨـﻚ ﻓـﻘـﻂ اﺳـﺘـﻌـﻤــﺎل ﻣ ـﺤ ـﻠــﻼت ﺷ ـﻴ ـﻔــﺮة ﺻــﻮت اﻻﺣـﺎﻃـﺔ اﻟــﺮﻗـﻤــﻲ ‪DTS‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﻊ اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺎت ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﻳـﺘـﻢ ﺗـﻄـﺒـﻴـﻖ ﻫـﺬه اﻟـﺸـﺮوط‪ a :‬ﻻ ﲤﺘـﻠـﻚ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬و ‪ b‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﺷﺎرات ﺗﺮدد‬
‫ّ‬
‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ ،DVDs‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻄﻮر‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻳﻘﺎف ‪ @) Off‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(23‬‬ ‫– ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫– اﳋﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ :PCM‬ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،19‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(Audio‬‬
‫– دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪PCM :MPEG /DTS‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،19‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(Audio‬‬
‫‪ :MPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪا ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﳋﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪RAM DVD-V VCD CD WMA MP3‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻚ ﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻃﺮف اﳋﺮج اﻟﺒﺼﺮي‬
‫ّ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ OPTICAL OUT‬ﻟﻬﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ‪.‬‬
‫اﳋﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪PCM‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﳊﺪ اﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﺮدد ﻋﻴّﻨﺔ اﳋﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫اﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺪود اﻟﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي ﺳﻮف ﺗﻮﺻﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮل رﻗﻤﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻳﻘﺎف‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ(‪:‬‬
‫ـﻮل اﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬او ‪44.1‬‬
‫اﻻﺷﺎرات ﻓﻮق ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠـﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﲢ ّ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ـﻮل اﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬او ‪44.1‬‬‫ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ :‬اﻻﺷﺎرات ﻓﻮق ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠـﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﲢ ّ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• اﻻﺷﺎرات ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﻄـﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﻘﻮق ﻃﺒﻊ ﻣﺤـﻔـﻮﻇﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬـﺎ‬
‫اﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬او ‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺼﺮف اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌـﺾ اﻻﺟـﻬـﺰة ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄـﻴـﻊ اﻟـﺘـﻌـﺎﻣـﻞ ﻣـﻊ ﺗـﺮددات اﻟـﻌـﻴّﻨـﺔ ‪ 88.2‬ﻛﻴـﻠـﻮﻫـﺮﺗـﺰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎن ﺑﺎﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬اﻗﺮأ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DTS‬و ‪MPEG‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪) Bitstream‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Dolby Digital‬و اﶈﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫‪:(DTS Digital‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫اﺧﺘﺰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اذا ﻛﺎن اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي اوﺻﻠﺘﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة اﻻﺷﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪) PCM‬اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪:(MPEG‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اذا ﻛﺎن اﳉﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻻﳝﻜﻨﻪ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة اﻻﺷﺎرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪا ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎم‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎن اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي اوﺻﻠﺘﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺷﻴﻔﺮة اﻻﺷﺎرة‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ ‪ .PCM‬اذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ اﺷﺎرات اﳉﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫وﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺮاﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﺿﺠـﻴـﺞ ﻋـﺎﻟـﻴـﺔ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﺮر ﻟﺴﻤﻌﻚ وﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬
‫‪39‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(26)new1‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 8:34 AM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻻﺧﺮى‬

‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬

‫اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MUTING‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪ 3.5‬ﱈ‬

‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫]‪ [VOLUME DOWN, UP‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻰ اﳊﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ‪.‬‬

‫ﲡﻨﺐ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻟﻔﺘﺮات زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي إﺻﺎﺑﺔ أذﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺄﺿﺮار‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [MUTING‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى أو اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻰ اﳊﺪ اﻷدﻧﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬ ‫)‪ ،(--dB‬ﺛﻢ ارﻓﻌﻪ اﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫وﺟﻪ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﲡﺎه اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻼت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬ ‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪f] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫‪.[TVf‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ او اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻛﻤﺼﺪر‬
‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ وﺿﻊ دﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﳌﺪة ﻋﺸﺮة دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻼﻗﺘﺼﺎد ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[TV/AV] + [SHIFT‬‬ ‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اذا ﻛﺎن اﳌﺼﺪر ﻫﻮ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ او ‪.AUX‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[AUTO OFF] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫‪ [TV CH4‬او ]‪3] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫‪.[TV CH3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪4] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮض ﻋﺒﺎرة ”‪ “AUTO OFF‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪ [TV VOL+] + [SHIFT‬او ]‪.[–TV VOL] + [SHIFT‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻘﻰ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اذا اﺧﺘﺮت اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ او اﳌﺼﺪر اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ ‪ AUX‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻋﺒﺎرة‬
‫”‪ .“AUTO OFF‬وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ او اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮدﻳﻼت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬه‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺰر ]‪ [AUTO OFF]+[SHIFT‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮ ً‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ووﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ واﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ‬
‫”‪.“REMOTE 1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[DIMMER] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺟﻬﺰة اﻷﺧﺮى اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺴﻄﻮع اﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DIMMER] +[SHIFT‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ”‪.“REMOTE 2‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ ”‪“REMOTE 2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻂ زر ]‪ [AUX‬واﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DISP MODE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻻﺧﺮى‪/‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى‬

‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎرة‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [2‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ‬
‫”‪ “REMOTE 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎس‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺔ اﻟﺬورة‬ ‫ﻋﺎدي‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ زر ]‪ [ENTER‬و ]‪ [2‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎن ﳌﺪة‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)اﻳﻘﺎف(‬

‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى‬
‫اﻵن ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ‬
‫”‪.“REMOTE 2‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ ”‪“REMOTE 1‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺗﲔ‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﻋﻼه وﻟﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ]‪[1‬‬ ‫‪2 1‬‬
‫و‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺬ اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ‬‫ّ‬
‫ﲟﻘﺪورك ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮازن ﻓﻮﻧﻮ داﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ”‪ “REMOTE 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اﺛﻨﺎء اﳋﻄﻮة‬ ‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬

‫ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اذا ﻛﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﻬﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ‬ ‫)‪(R‬‬ ‫)‪(L‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎرة ”‪ “REMOTE 1‬او ”‪ “REMOTE 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اذا ﻇﻬﺮت ﻋﺒﺎرة ”‪) “REMOTE 1‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫”‪(. “REMOTE 1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [TUNER/AUX‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ([AUX] :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ زر ]‪ [ENTER‬و ]‪ [1‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫”‪.“AUX‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﳌﺪة ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫اذا ﻇﻬﺮت ﻋﺒﺎرة ”‪) “REMOTE 2‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬

‫”‪(. “REMOTE 2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺬ اﳋﻄﻮات ﺣﺘﻰ اﳋﻄﻮة ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎع‪ّ :‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ زر ]‪ [ENTER‬و ]‪ [2‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [a REC‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻳﺒﺪأ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﳌﺪة ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ( [L, STOP]:‬ﻻﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺰال ﲟﻘﺪورك ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫)@ اﻧﻈﺮ اﻋﻼه( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺑﺪأ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰف ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪات اﳌﺮاد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ وﺣﺪات ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة اﻋﻼه‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة‬ ‫•‬
‫وﻛﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺬي ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(24_25)new1‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 6:07 PM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﻘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎ ﻋﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺮأس‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬

‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [rPLAY/REC‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬
‫)اﻳﻘﺎف(‬
‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫‪ : rPLAY‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‬ ‫‪DOWN, UP‬‬
‫‪ : rREC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫)ﻻﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﺷﺮ اذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺒﺪء ووﻗﺖ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء او وﻗﺖ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫‪ [f‬ﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪f‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪, STOP‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﻳﻜﻮن اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺆﻗﺘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪأ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط‬ ‫• ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‪:‬‬ ‫‪DISP MODE‬‬ ‫‪PHONES‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ رﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺞ اﻟﻰ ان ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ÆUI³‬‬
‫‪Î‬‬ ‫اﻟﻰ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى «‪t²D³{ Íc‬‬
‫• ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﻊ ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫‪DIMMER‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [rPLAY/REC‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮات اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CLOCK/‬‬ ‫‪PLAY/‬‬
‫)ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮم اذا ﰎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪TIMER,‬‬ ‫‪REC,‬‬
‫‪SLEEP‬‬ ‫‪AUTO OFF‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪1, 2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اوﻗﺎت اﻟﻌﺰف‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺬ اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬و ‪.4‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﳌﺼﺪر او ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [rPLAY/REC‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ .2‬اﳒﺰ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﺼﺪر او ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻧﻔﺬ اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 3‬اﻟﻰ ‪.4‬‬
‫‪TUNER/AUX‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CLOCK /TIMER‬اﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “rPLAY‬او‬
‫”‪.“rREC‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‪ :‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← وﻗﺖ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ← اﳌﺼﺪر ← ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪TV CH ,‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ :‬وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← وﻗﺖ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ← اﳌﺼﺪر‬ ‫‪TV CH ,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CLOCK/TIMER‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ‪.‬‬

‫اذا اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻠﺖ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺆﻗﺘﲔ‬ ‫‪, REW/ ,‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ان ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪/‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪, /FF‬‬ ‫‪TV/AV‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬ ‫‪, +,‬‬
‫‪TV VOL‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪MUTING‬‬
‫• اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎف وﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ وﻗﺖ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اذا اﺧﺘﺮت ‪ AUX‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫وﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ”‪ “AUX‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر‪ .‬اذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰف او اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪) .‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳋﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﳌﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﶈﺪد ﻻﻳﻘﺎﻇﻚ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف( او‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ او ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﺆﻗﺘﻲ اﻟﻌﺰف واﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎً ﻓﻲ آن واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻼل اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SLEEP] + [SHIFT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻔﻀﻞ )اﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز واﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻀﺮ اﳌﺼﺪراﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﻪ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﳌﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‪ ،‬ﺣ ّ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬رادﻳﻮ او ﻣﺼﺪر ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ‪ ،(AUX‬واﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪SLEEP OFF‬‬ ‫‪SLEEP 120‬‬ ‫‪SLEEP 90‬‬ ‫‪SLEEP 60‬‬ ‫‪SLEEP 30‬‬ ‫• ﳌﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻓﺤﺺ اﻟﺴﻨﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﳌﻨﻊ اﶈﻮ اﻟﻌﻔﻮي‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(21‬وادﺧﻞ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ دك ‪ @) 2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(21‬واﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (20‬او اﺧﺘﺮ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(25‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CLOCK/TIMER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SLEEP]+[SHIFT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪.“SLEEP OFF‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪REC‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬ ‫‪CLOCK‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SLEEP]+[SHIFT‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﳌﺪة ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ∫ rPLAY‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ ∫ rREC‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)اﻧﺘﻘﻞ اﻟﻰ اﳋﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼل ‪ 7‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ(‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SLEEP]+[SHIFT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳉﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ON‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء وﻗﺖ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺰف‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ [f‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ وﻗﺖ‬
‫‪f, 3‬‬
‫]‪3/FF‬‬ ‫او‬ ‫‪g‬‬
‫‪[g, REW/4‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪4‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[CLOCK/TIMER‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ وﻗﺖ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف ‪OFF‬‬
‫ّﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 1‬و ‪2‬‬
‫‪41‬‬

‫‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(24_25)new1‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 6:06 PM‬‬

 ‫ﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت وﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت‬

‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺠﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻼﺣﻆ اﻧﺤﺪار ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﺠﻤﻟﺎل‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻫﺬه ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮﺗـﻴـﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﺣـﺪث ﻫـﺬا‪ ،‬أوﻗـﻒ ﺗـﺸـﻐـﻴـﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SOUND EQ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﺠﻤﻟﺎل اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪) HEAVY‬رﺻﲔ(‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻗﻮة إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺮوك‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﳌﻄﻮّر‬
‫‪) CLEAR‬ﺻﺎﻓﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻷﺻﻮات اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪RAM DVD-V‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) SOFT‬ﺧﻔﻴﺾ(‪:‬‬
‫ﲤﺘﻊ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﲔ‬
‫‪) DISCO‬دﻳﺴﻜﻮ(‪ :‬ﻳﺮدد اﻟﺼﻮت ﳉﻌﻠﻚ ﺗﺸﻌﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ أﻧﻚ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻲ دﻳﺴﻜﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮات اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﺒﺪو اﻟﺼﻮت و ﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻗﺎدم ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ اﳌﻐﻨﻴﲔ أﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) LIVE‬ﺣﻲ(‪:‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺳﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻴـﺠـﻌـﻠـﻚ ﺗـﺸـﻌـﺮ ﻛـﻤـﺎ ﻟـﻮ أﻧـﻚ ﻓـﻲ ﻗـﺎﻋـﺔ‬ ‫‪) HALL‬اﻟﻘﺎﻋﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻼت ﻛﺒﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪) [A.SRND‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬
‫]‪.([ADVANCED SURROUND‬‬ ‫ﻂ‬
‫إﻟﻐﺎء )ﻋﺪم إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ( )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪:EQ-OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[SOUND EQ‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪1 Natural‬‬
‫إﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﻌﺎدل اﻟﻴﺪوي )‪(MANUAL EQ‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﺘﺪاع ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮات ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2 Enhanced‬‬

‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬

‫ً‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺰر ]‪[–MANUAL EQ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪) Off‬اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ(‬
‫اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ”‪.“MANUAL EQ‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻻﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫)ﻓﻲ ﺧﻼل ‪ 12‬ﺛﻮان(‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ أزرار اﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ او ﳝﺘﻠﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫•‬
‫إﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪى اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮاد ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ];[ أو ]‪.[:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﻗﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪TREBLE ↔ MID ↔ BASS‬‬ ‫ﲟﻘﺪار ‪ 3‬اﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﺮات‬ ‫•‬
‫إﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪ [8‬أو ]‪.[9‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺟﻬﺰة اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺮات‬
‫)‪ –3‬اﻟﻰ ‪(+3‬‬ ‫ﺿﻌﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪A‬‬
‫ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻌﺎد اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮاﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮان‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫إﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SOUND EQ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪.“EQ-OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع‬
‫أوﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﺮﻳﻬﺎ وﻳﺘﻢ إﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫اﳌﺮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ”‪.“MANUAL EQ‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺻﻠﻲ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد _ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ اﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫إﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫‪RAM DVD-V CD VCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﻮات ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪ LPCM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺘﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت وﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت‬

‫إن إدارة ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺻﻮت أﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮة‪.‬‬ ‫او ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﳌﻴﺰة ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺻﻮت ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ اﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﺷﺎرات ﺗﺮدد‬
‫إﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [S.SOUND EQ‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([SUPER SOUND EQ] :‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ”‪.“S.SOUND EQ‬‬
‫‪WMA MP3‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ او ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [S.SOUND EQ‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪([SUPER SOUND EQ] :‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬه اﳌﻴﺰة ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﺮددات اﳌﻔﻘﻮدة اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻲ ﺻﻮت‬
‫اﻗﺮب اﻟﻰ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر ]‪[SHIFT] + [M.RE-MASTER‬‬
‫)اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:([MULTI RE-MASTER]:‬‬

‫‪WMA MP3‬‬ ‫‪RAM DVD-V CD VCD‬‬ ‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‬ ‫درﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ واﻟﺮوك(‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫درﺟﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﳉﺎز(‬
‫ﻗﻮي‬ ‫درﺟﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﻜﻼﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫اﻳﻘﺎف‬ ‫اﻳﻘﺎف‬ ‫‪Off‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳋﺮج اﻟﺮﻗـﻤﻲ ‪@) PCM‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘـﻤﺪ اﳋﺮج اﻟﻔﻌـﻠﻲ ﻟﺘﺮدد اﻟـﻌ ّ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،19‬ﺑـﻨﺪ ”‪ “PCM Digital Output‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ”‪ (“Audio‬ﻋـﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ رﻗﻤﻲ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،26‬اﳌﺴﺮح اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ _ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮة(‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪23‬‬
‫‪42‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(22_23)new2‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 9:08 AM‬‬

 ‫اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‬

‫ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﺑﺪأ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪MULTI‬‬
‫‪, STOP‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪DVD-V‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪RE-MASTER‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪ [AUDIO] + [SHIFT‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ADVANCED‬‬
‫‪SURROUND‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8‬أو ]‪ [9‬ﺛﻢ ]‪ ، [ENTER‬أو ]‪ [;, :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫‪SUPER‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬ ‫‪SOUND EQ‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SOUND EQ‬‬
‫‪MIC VOL‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻮت ﻣﻄﺮﺑﲔ‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻮت‬ ‫‪MIN, MAX‬‬ ‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫‪DOWN, UP‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺮب واﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ : V1+V2‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﻄﺮﺑﲔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎف اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺻﻮت اﳌﻄﺮب اﻷول ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪V1‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻹﺻﺪار اﻷﺻﻮات‬ ‫‪On‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻮت اﳌﻄﺮب اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪V2‬‬
‫‪RAM VCD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[AUDIO] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪ : (L R) AUDIO L R‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎع ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﺴﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن )اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮﻧﺎت(‬
‫اﻟﻴﺴﺮى وﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬
‫)ﺻﻮت اﳌﻄﺮب وﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﺴﺮى )ﺑﺪون ﺻﻮت اﳌﻄﺮب(‪.‬‬ ‫‪(L) AUDIO L‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻮت اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﺻﻮت اﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪(R) AUDIO R‬‬
‫‪S.SOUND EQ‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪون ﺻﻮت اﳌﻄﺮب ﻟﻠﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺻﻮت اﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ وﺑﺪون ﺻﻮت اﳌﻄﺮب‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪A.SRND,‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻹﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ .‬إﻗﺮأ إرﺷﺎدات‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪SOUND EQ,‬‬ ‫‪M.RE-MASTER‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MANUAL EQ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫اﺑﺪأ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻨﺎء واﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫]‪) [–, + VOLUME‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ECHO‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫]‪ ([VOLUME DOWN, UP‬و ]‪ [MIC VOL MIN, MAX‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺪى‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ECHO] + [SHIFT‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪) ECHO OFF ← ECHO 4 ← ECHO 3 ← ECHO 2 ← ECHO 1‬ﺗﺒﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪, , , ,‬‬
‫↑‬ ‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺰداد اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدة اﳌﺴﺘﻮى‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اداء ﻏﻨﺎءك ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‬

‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬ ‫‪, +,‬‬
‫• إﳒﺰ اﳋﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ‪ 2–1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.21‬‬ ‫‪VOLUME‬‬
‫• ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﺑﺪأ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [AUDIO] + [SHIFT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺒﺸﺮي‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪[–, + VOLUME‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ([VOLUME DOWN, UP] :‬و‬
‫]‪ [MIC VOL MIN, MAX‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [[ REC‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ واﺑﺪأ ﺑﻐﻨﺎء اﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪[MIC VOL MIN, MAX‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اوﺻﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮﻧﺎت ﲟﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﺮن‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([L, STOP] :‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ 6.3 :‬ﱈ اﺣﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻚ‬ ‫اذا ﰎ اﺻﺪار ﺿﺠﻴﺞ )ﺻـﺮاخ( اﺛـﻨـﺎء اﻻﺳـﺘـﺨـﺪام‪ ،‬اﺑـﻌـﺪ اﳌـﺎﻳـﻜـﺮوﻓـﻮن ﻋـﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻟﺘـﺤـﻀـﻴـﺮ‪ :‬اﳒﺰ اﳋـﻄـﻮات اﻟـﺘـﻤـﻬـﻴـﺪﻳـﺔ ‪ 2–1‬ﻋﻠـﻰ ﺻـﻔـﺤـﺔ ‪ .21‬ﺗـﺄﻛـﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﻋـﺪم‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‪ ،‬او اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬
‫وﺟﻮد اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ دك ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌـﺎﻳـﻜـﺮوﻓـﻮن‪ ،‬اﻧـﺰﻋـﻪ ﻣـﻦ ﻣـﻘـﺒـﺲ اﳌـﺎﻳـﻜـﺮوﻓـﻮن‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫واﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن اﻟﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”‪.“MIN‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [[ REC‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﲢﺪث ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن واﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫]‪) [–, + VOLUME‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬
‫]‪ ([VOLUME DOWN, UP‬و ]‪ [MIC VOL MIN, MAX‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪22‬‬
‫‪43‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(22_23)new2‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 1:03 PM‬‬


‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﺷﺮﻃﺔ ذات ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ ذات اﳌﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ او اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ وﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﲟﻘﺪور ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ او ﻣﺴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻟﻒ ﺟﺰء ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ اﳊﺎل‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [; :, TAPE‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([L, STOP] :‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [c, DECK2‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وادﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫اﳌﺮاد اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ادﺧﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ان ﻳﻜﻮن اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻫﻚ واﳉﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫اﳌﻜﺸﻮف ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﲡﺎه اﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﲡﺎه اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪“F:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PLAY MODE‬وﺗﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ وﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺿﺎﻏﻄﺎً ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ وﺟﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻼ اﻟﻮﺟﻬﲔ )اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ← اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫“ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[[ REC‬‬ ‫“ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ اﻟﻰ ”‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﺮاد ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫واﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﶈﻄﺔ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ @) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(20‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ادﺧﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ :, DVD/CD‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([ L, STOP] :‬‬
‫أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺎرات اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ]@ ﻧّﻔﺬ اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 2–1‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” ،16‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺑﻨﺪ(“[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [; :, TAPE‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬
‫]‪.([L, STOP‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [c, DECK1‬وادﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [[ REC‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([L, STOP] :‬‬
‫اذا اﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰف‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ([L, STOP] :‬ﻻﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺰج اﳌﺼﺪر اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات )‪ 3‬اﻟﻰ ‪ 5.1‬ﻗﻨﺎة( ﺗﻨﺎزﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪر ﻣﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت و اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﺠﻤﻟﺎل ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﲟﻘﺪورك ﻓﺘﺢ دك ‪ 1‬ﺧﻼل اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬر ﻋﻠﻴﻚ اﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ او اﻟﺘﺮﺟـﻴـﻊ اﻟـﺴـﺮﻳـﻊ ﻻﺣـﺪ اﻟـﺪﻛـﲔ ﺧـﻼل‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺪك اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ اﶈﻮ اﻟﻌﻔﻮي‬
‫اﳉﺎﻧﺐ ‪A‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﻚ ﺑﺮاﻏﻲ او اداة‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻜﺴﺮ اﻟﻠﺴﺎن‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺴﺎن اﳉﺎﻧﺐ ‪B‬‬ ‫ﻟﺴﺎن اﳉﺎﻧﺐ ‪A‬‬
‫ﻻﻋﺎدة اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﶈﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﻏﻂ اﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ‬ ‫]‪.[L‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ‬‫و‬ ‫;[‬ ‫‪:,‬‬ ‫]‪TAPE‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫)اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([ L, STOP] :‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ادﺧﻞ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ دك ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم وﺟﻮد اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ دك ‪.1‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫ﻃﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪ .3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PLAY MODE‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻀﻐﻮ ً‬
‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[a REC‬‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫‪RQT8092_Ar(20_21)new2‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬
‫أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ اﻟﺪﻛﲔ ‪ 1‬او ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﻋﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﺷﺮﻃﺔ ذات ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ ذات اﳌﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ واﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ وﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻇﻬﺎر ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻫﺬه اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[; :, TAPE‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﺒًﺄ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺰف ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺰف‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [c, DECK1‬او ]‪ [c, DECK2‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ وادﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﳉﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ادﺧﻞ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮن اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﺮاد‬
‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﲡﺎﻫﻚ واﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﻜﺸﻮف ﺑﺎﲡﺎه‬
‫اﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻏﻠﻖ اﳌﻠﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [; :, TAPE‬ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺰف‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫”‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪;R ↔ F: :‬‬
‫‪ : F:‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰف اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ : ;R‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰف اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﺰف اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [L‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([ L, STOP] :‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء إﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ TAPE‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ وﺗﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[PLAY MODE‬‬
‫ﺿﺎﻏﻄﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ وﺗﺒﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰف وﺟﻪ واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰف ﻛﻼ اﻟﻮﺟﻬﲔ‪) .‬اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ← اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻌﺰف ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳـﺘـﻢ ﻋـﺰف ﻛـﻼ اﻟـﻮﺟـﻬـﲔ ﺑـﺼـﻮرة ﻣـﺘـﻜـﺮرة ﺣـﺘـﻰ ﻳـﺘـﻢ ﺿـﻐـﻂ ]‪) [L‬اﳉـﻬـﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([L, STOP] :‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻟﻰ ﻛﻼ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ اﻟﺪﻛﲔ واﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫“‪ .‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰف ﻛﻼ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻄﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ان ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[L‬‬ ‫”‬
‫)اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([ L, STOP] :‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﱘ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ او اﻋﺎدة اﻟﻠﻒ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [g, REW/ 4‬اﻋﺎدة اﻟﻠﻒ( او ]‪) [f, 3/FF‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺎﺑﲔ اﻟﺪﻛﲔ اﳌﻌﺒﺄﻳﻦ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [PLAY MODE‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.([DECK 1/2] :‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ‪¹‬ﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻟﻌﺰف ﳊﻈﻴﺎً اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰف اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬اذا ﻓﺘﺤﺖ اﻟﺪك اﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻻﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠـﺎوز ‪ 100‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎدة رﻗﻴﻘﺔ وﳝـﻜـﻦ ان‬
‫ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ أو ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ داﺧﻞ اﳌﺎﻛﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﳌﺮﺗﺨﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺎﻛﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬا ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺪ اﻻرﺗﺨﺎء ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺰف‬
‫اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳝـﻜـﻦ أن ﺗـﻨـﺤـﺸـﺮ اﻷﺷـﺮﻃـﺔ اﻟـﻼﻧـﻬـﺎﺋ ـﻴــﺔ ﻓــﻲ أﺟــﺰاء اﻟــﺪك اﳌ ـﺘ ـﺤــﺮﻛــﺔ إذا‬
‫إﺳـﺘـﺨـﺪﻣـﺖ ﺑـﺼـﻮرة ﻏـﻴـﺮ ﺻـﺤـﻴـﺤـﺔ‪ .‬إﺳـﺘـﺨـﺪم اﻷﺷـﺮﻃـﺔ اﳌـﻼﺋـﻤــﺔ ﻵﻟ ـﻴــﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻌﻜﺲ اﻷوﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻹﲡﺎه اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻟﻬﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪2/1/05, 6:02 PM‬‬
 ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺧﻄﻮة ﺗﺮدد ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) AM‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬

‫اﳋﻄﻮة ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺒﺚ اﳌﻌﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳋﻄﻮات ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BAND, TUNER‬‬ ‫‪, TAPE‬‬

‫‪ .1‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ”‪.“FM‬‬

‫‪ .2‬اﺿﻐﻂ وﺗﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[BAND, TUNER‬‬ ‫‪DECK 1/2‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬ ‫‪, DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮان ﻳﺘﻐﻴّﺮ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻴﻌﺮض اﳊﺪ اﻻدﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮدد اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﳋﻄﻮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﳊﺪ اﻻدﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮدد و‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪, STOP‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ّ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع اﻟﻰ اﳋﻄﻮة اﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮات اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪, REW/ ,‬‬
‫‪, /FF‬‬
‫‪, DECK2‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪, DECK1‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ”اﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ“ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﺮددات اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً ﻣﻦ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫‪DECK 1‬‬ ‫‪DECK 2‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬

‫ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ اﶈﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻴﺪوﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﶈﻄﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪TUNER PGM‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ وﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬي ﻫﻴﺄﺗﻪ‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫أزرار‬
‫‪Numbered‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻛﺤﺪ اﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻮﺟﺎت ‪ FM‬و ‪.AM‬‬ ‫‪buttons‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [TUNER/AUX‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “FM‬او ”‪.“AM‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪, DVD/CD‬‬

‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت ‪ FM‬و ‪.AM‬‬
‫‪TUNER/AUX‬‬
‫‪, TAPE‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪ :‬واﻟـﻒ ﻋـﻠـﻰ اﻟـﺘـﺮدد اﻟـﺬي ﺗـﺮﻏـﺐ ﻓـﻴـﻪ ﺑـﺒــﺪء اﻟ ـﺘ ـﻬ ـﻴ ـﺌــﺔ اﳌ ـﺴ ـﺒ ـﻘــﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [TUNER PGM] + [SHIFT‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒـﻂ ﺟـﻬـﺎز اﳌـﻮاﻟـﻔـﺔ ﻣـﺴـﺒـﻘـﺎً ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﶈﻄـﺎت اﻟـﺘـﻲ ﳝـﻜـﻨـﻪ أﺳـﺘـﻘـﺒـﺎﻟـﻬـﺎ إﻟـﻰ‬
‫اﻟﻘﻨﻮات ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪي وﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض آﺧﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﰎ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﳌﺴﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻴﺪوﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪, REW/ ,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬

‫‪, /FF‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﶈﻄﺎت‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﻴﻤﲔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬واﻟﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ اﶈﻄﺔ ){‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[TUNER PGM] + [SHIFT‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫أﺛﻨﺎء وﻣﻴﺾ اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ”‪ “PGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ازرار اﻻرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺒﺎدﻟﻲ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [g, REW/4‬او ]‪ [f, 3/FF‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫]‪.[TUNER PGM]+[SHIFT‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﶈﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اذا ﲤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﺧﺮى ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ اﻟﻴﺪوي‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [TUNER/AUX‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫]‪ ( [BAND, TUNER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ”‪ “FM‬او ”‪.“AM‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [TUNER/AUX‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “FM‬أو ”‪.“AM‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ [g, REW/4‬أو‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]([ أو ])[ )اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪4] :‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ [g, REW/4‬أو ]‪[f, 3 /FF‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم أو ]‪4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫]‪ ([f, 3 /FF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﺎة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر رﻗﻢ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ) اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]([ او ])[ واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪.[2] @ [1] @ [h10] :12‬‬ ‫]‪ [g, REW/4‬أو ]‪ ([f, 3/FF‬إﻟﻰ أن ﻳﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺮدد ﺑﺎﻟﺪوران وﺑﺪء‬
‫اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﺜﻮر ﻋﻠﻰ اﶈﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮض ”‪ “TUNED‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﳌﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “ST‬ﺧﻼل اﺳﺘﻼم ﺑﺚ أف أم اﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮي‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪ 7‬اذا ﺗﺰاﻳﺪت اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ اﻷف أم‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PLAY MODE‬ﻟﻌﺮض ”‪.“MONO‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺣﺎدي وﺗﻘﻞ اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ زر ]‪ [PLAY MODE‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻀﺎ اذا ﰎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫وﺗﻠﻐﻰ ”‪“MONO‬‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪20‬‬
‫‪45‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(20_21)new2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 6:02 PM‬‬

 ‫‪ 7‬ﺟﺪول ”‪“Video‬‬
‫‪ :4:3 Pan&Scan‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻘﺎس ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ )‪(4:3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪TV Aspect‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﻮاﻧﺐ ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻸ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وﻣﻊ‬
‫)ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :4:3 Letterbox‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﻨﺴﺐ أﺑﻌﺎد ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ )‪(4:3‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :16:9‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )‪(16:9‬‬ ‫•‬

‫)‪Standard (Direct View TV‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪TV Type‬‬
‫• ‪LCD TV/Projector‬‬ ‫‪CRT Projector‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮع اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Plasma TV‬‬ ‫‪Projection TV‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪100ms‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪80ms‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪60ms‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪40ms‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪20ms‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪0ms‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Time Delay‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮض ﭘﻼزﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻔﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫إذا ﻻﺣﻈﺖ أن اﻟﺼﻮت اﳋﺎرج ﻣﺰاﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮر اﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Automatic‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Still Mode‬‬
‫‪ :Field‬ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻠﻄﺨﺔ‪ ،‬إﻻ إﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ اﳉﻮدة‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪد ﻧﻮع اﻟﺼﻮرة اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪ :Frame‬اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﳉﻮدة‪ ،‬إﻻ إﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﻠﻄﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :PAL60‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.PAL‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪NTSC Disc Output‬‬
‫‪ :NTSC‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﺮج ‪ PAL 60‬او ‪ NTSC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫) ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ وﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎم ”‪ “PAL60‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮط‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ @) NTSC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،7‬اﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻮﻃﺎت‬

‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ(‬
‫ً‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺟﺪول ”‪“Audio‬‬
‫‪Up to 96 kHz‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Up to 48 kHz‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ @) PCM Digital Output‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Bitstream‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ @) Dolby Digital‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Bitstream‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ @) DTS Digital Surround‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪Bitstream‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪PCM‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ @) MPEG\6‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Dynamic Range Compression‬‬
‫‪ :On‬اﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﺿﻮح اﻟﺼﻮت ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ أﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻂ اﳌﺪى اﻹدﻧﻰ‬ ‫•‬
‫وﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‪ .‬ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ وﺿﻊ دوﻟﺒﻲ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺟﺪول ”‪“Display‬‬
‫•‬ ‫• ‪English‬‬ ‫‪Menu Language‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬

‫‪\5‬‬

‫‪Português‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Español‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Italiano‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Deutsch‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Français‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪English •\6‬‬
‫‪Nederlands‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Pуcский •\6‬‬
‫ّ‬

‫‪Off‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ‪On‬‬ ‫‪On-Screen Messages‬‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺟﺪول ”‪“Others‬‬
‫‪No‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Yes‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪QUICK SETUP‬‬
‫‪ :Yes‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﻌﺪﻻت ”‪“Ratings‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Re-initialize Setting\5‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(18‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ادﺧﺎل ﻧﻔﺲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺎء اﳌﺆﺷﺮ ”‪ “INIT‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫)او ‪(Re-initialise Setting\6‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وأﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬا ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ Setup‬اﻟﻰ‬
‫‪No‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ \6‬ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ واﻟﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ وﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪\5‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ رﻣﻮز اﻟﻠﻐﺎت‬

‫اﻟﻠﺜﻮاﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7684‬‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺎﺟﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8471‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﻠﻮﻏﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8469‬‬ ‫إﻧﺘﺮﻟﻴﻨﺠﻮا‬ ‫‪:7365‬‬ ‫اﻷﺑﺨﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6566‬‬
‫اﺠﻤﻟﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7285‬‬ ‫اﻟﻈﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:9085‬‬ ‫اﳉﻮرﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7565‬‬ ‫اﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7384‬‬ ‫اﻷذرﺑﻴﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6590‬‬
‫اﳌﺴﺪوﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7775‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺒﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7387‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪﳕﺎرﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6865‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺎﺳﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6985‬‬ ‫اﻷردﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8582‬‬
‫اﳌﺎﻻﻏﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7771‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6582‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪﳕﺎرﻛﻴﺔ اﳉﺮﻧﻼﻧﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7576‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺸﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8083‬‬ ‫اﻷرﻣﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7289‬‬
‫اﳌﺎﻻوﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7783‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎرﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7065‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮاﻳﺘﻮروﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8277‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺸﻜﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6665‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6583‬‬
‫اﳌﺎﻻﻳﺎﻻﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7776‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7082‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮوﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8285‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8084‬‬ ‫اﻷﻓﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6565‬‬
‫اﳌﺎﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7784‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺟﺎﻟﺴﻴﺰا‬ ‫‪:7176‬‬ ‫روﺳﻴﺎ اﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬ ‫‪:6669‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6682‬‬ ‫اﻷﻟﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8381‬‬
‫اﳌﺎراﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7782‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻨﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7073‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮوﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8279‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8065‬‬ ‫اﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6869‬‬
‫اﳌﺎورﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7773‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻮﻻﺑﻮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8679‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮوﻣﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﳌﻮﻟﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7779‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6678‬‬ ‫اﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﺮوﻳﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7079‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7778‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺘﻨﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8673‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰاﺋﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7678‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻠﻐﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6671‬‬ ‫اﻷﳌﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻳﺰﻳﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7089‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺎورﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7865‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7074‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰوﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8872‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻮﺗﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6890‬‬ ‫اﻷﻣﻬﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6577‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺮوﻳﺠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7879‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎزﺧﺴﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7575‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﻣﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8377‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻮرﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻷوزﺑﻜﺴﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪:7789‬‬ ‫‪:8590‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻴﺒﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7869‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺮﻏﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7589‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﻧﺴﻴﻜﺮﻳﺘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8365‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8076‬‬ ‫اﻷوﻛﺮاﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8575‬‬
‫اﻟﻬﺎوﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7265‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6765‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8368‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﻬﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6672‬‬ ‫اﻷورﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7982‬‬
‫اﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7273‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻧﺮﻳﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7578‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻨﺪاﻧﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8385‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻏﺎﻟﻮغ‬ ‫‪:8476‬‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7165‬‬
‫اﻟﻬﻨﺪﻳﺔ اﳉﻮﺟﺎراﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7185‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺸﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8185‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8375‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8465‬‬ ‫اﻷ ﻳﺴﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7383‬‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮﻟﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7876‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺸﻤﻴﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7583‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻠﻮﻓﺎﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8376‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻳﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8472‬‬ ‫اﻷﳝﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6588‬‬
‫اﻟﻮاﻟﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:6789‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺮدﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7585‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻨﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8373‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺘﺎرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8484‬‬ ‫اﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﳉﻮراﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7178‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻟﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8779‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺮواﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7282‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻮاﺣﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8387‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺸﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6783‬‬ ‫اﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6983‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7465‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻮرﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7579‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8386‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻤﻨﺴﺘﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8475‬‬ ‫اﻷﺳﺒﺮاﻧﺘﻮ‬ ‫‪:6979‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﺎﻓﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7487‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮدﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7577‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻮﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:8378‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8482‬‬ ‫اﻹﺳﺘﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6984‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﺪﺷﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7473‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻮرﺳﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:6779‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8382‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻧﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8479‬‬ ‫اﻹﺳﻜﺘﻠﻨﺪﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪:7168‬‬
‫اﻟﻴﻮرﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻼوﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7679‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪-‬اﻟﻜﺮواﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫اﻹﳒﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫اﻟﻴﻮﻧﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:8979‬‬
‫‪:6976‬‬ ‫اﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7665‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻮﻣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:8372‬‬
‫‪:8379‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﺒﺘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:8487‬‬
‫‪:6679‬‬ ‫اﻹﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:6978‬‬
‫‪:6570‬‬
‫‪46‬‬ ‫اﻟﻼﺗﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7686‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:9072‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻴﻐﺮﻳﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:8473‬‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺪوﻧﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪:7378‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(18_19)new3‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 11:51 AM‬‬

 ‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻮﻃﺎت‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SETUP] + [SHIFT‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫اذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ @) QUICK SETUP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(6‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪.QUICK SETUP‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [:‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫أزرار‬
‫‪Numbered‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9, ;, :‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر و ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻻﳒﺎز‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪buttons‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﳒﺎز اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Setup‬‬

‫‪Setup‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪول‬ ‫‪Disc‬‬ ‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬ ‫‪Subtitle‬‬ ‫‪Automatic‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪Audio‬‬ ‫‪Menus‬‬ ‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Others‬‬ ‫‪Advanced Disc Review‬‬ ‫‪Intro Mode‬‬ ‫‪, , , ,‬‬
‫‪Ratings‬‬ ‫‪Level 8‬‬ ‫‪ENTER‬‬

‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻮﻃﺎت‬

‫‪to select and press ENTER‬‬ ‫‪RETURN‬‬ ‫‪to exit‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[SETUP]+[SHIFT‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪SETUP‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت ﺣﺘﻰ اذا ﰎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﻠﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ اﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QUICK SETUP‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ إﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎت ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮد ﻓﻲ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺟﺪول ”‪“Disc‬‬
‫‪\3‬‬
‫‪Other‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪\2‬‬
‫‪Original‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪\1‬‬
‫)اﺧﺘﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪English‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Audio‬‬

‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪\3‬‬
‫‪Other‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪\1‬‬
‫)اﺧﺘﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪English‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪\4‬‬
‫‪Automatic‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫‪English‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Menus‬‬
‫‪\1‬‬
‫)اﺧﺘﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪\3‬‬
‫‪Other‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫اﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪QUICK SETUP‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪:Intro Mode‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Advanced Disc Review‬‬
‫‪ :Interval Mode‬ﻻﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان‪/‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ وﻟﻜﻦ اﻳﻀﺎً وﺿﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ زﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(12‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ‪ 10‬دﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ)ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪(8‬‬ ‫‪Ratings‬‬
‫‪ :0 Lock All‬ﳌﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﺪون‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬إﻟﻰ ‪7‬‬ ‫• ‪8 No Limit‬‬ ‫اﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﳌﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ )ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪ 0‬إﻟﻰ ‪(7‬‬ ‫• اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Temporary Unlock‬‬ ‫‪Changel Level‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ‪Change Password • Unlock Player‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﳌﻌﺪﻻت‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اذا ﲡﺎوزت ﻣﺪة اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ -DVD‬اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﳌﻌﺪﻻت اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ‬
‫ادﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ادﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺮ وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ \2‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ \1‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎرات اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪ \3‬إدﺧﻞ رﻗﻢ رﻣﺰ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﺔ اﳉﺪول ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.19‬‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ ‪Chinese :‬‬
‫‪ \4‬اذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ”‪ “Audio‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻷﺧﺮى ‪Ë Portuguese Ë Spanish Ë Italian Ë German Ë French :‬‬
‫اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ )إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Dutch Ë Russian‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪18‬‬
‫‪47‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(18_19)new3‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 4:03 PM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬

‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬واﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[ENTER‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪8, 9, ;, :‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [FUNCTIONS‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻻﳒﺎز اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬واﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[ENTER‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪8, 9, ;, :‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﳒﺎز اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‬

‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر‬ ‫‪Thumbnail‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺪد‬ ‫‪Program, Group, Title Chapter,‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،13‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫‪Subtitle‬‬ ‫‪Track, Playlist, Content‬‬
‫‪ RAM‬ﻻﺳــﺘــﺪﻋــﺎء ﻋــﻼﻣــﺔ ﻣــﺴــﺠــﻠـــﺔ ﻋ ــﻠـــﻰ ﻣ ــﺴ ــﺠـــﻼت‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة او ﻧﻘﺼﺎن ﻣﺪة اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬ ‫)‪Marker (VR‬‬ ‫)‪ Time Slip‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ @ [8, 9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﺿ ـ ـ ـ ـﻐ ـ ـ ـ ــﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻣـ ـ ـ ــﺮﺗـ ـ ـ ــﲔ ﻹﻇ ـ ـ ـ ـﻬ ـ ـ ـ ــﺎر اﳌ ـ ـ ـ ــﺆﺷـ ـ ـ ــﺮ‬
‫)زواﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة(‬ ‫‪.Time Slip‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪Angle‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟﺼﻮر‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫‪Rotate Picture‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ وﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﲔ )‪(Time Search‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو اﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض ﺷﺮاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫‪(+R/+RW‬‬
‫‪Slideshow‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪/‬اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺷﺮاﺋﺢ اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ ®‪ 30 – 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،13‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫)@ اﻧﻈﺮ ادﻧﺎه(‬ ‫‪Other Settings‬‬ ‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪ WMA MP3‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻧﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬

‫‪Other Settings‬‬
‫اذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪) 480p‬او‪ “(525p‬او ”‪) 576p‬او ‪،“(625p‬‬ ‫‪ RAM DVD-V‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)@ اﻋﻼه(‪ ،‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻮع‬ ‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫– ﻣﻦ ”‪ “x0.6‬اﻟﻰ ”‪) “x1.4‬ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ‪ 0.1‬وﺣﺪة(‬
‫اﳌﺎدة‪.‬‬
‫‪Play Menu L‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪NTSC‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(13‬‬ ‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪) Auto1‬ﻋﺎدي(‪ :‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 24‬اﻃﺎر ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ وﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻋﺪا ‪) RAM JPEG‬ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ(‬
‫‪ :Auto2‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ 30‬اﻃﺎر ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺮار ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻌﲔ‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬اﻃﺎر ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪Transfer‬‬ ‫‪A-B Repeat‬‬
‫اﺿـﻐـﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻓـﻲ ﻧـﻘـﺎط اﻟـﺒـﺪاﻳــﺔ واﻟـﻨـﻬـﺎﻳـﺔ‪ .‬اﺿـﻐــﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Mode‬‬ ‫]‪ [ENTER‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Video‬اﺧﺘﺮه ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ‪ Auto1‬او ‪ ،Auto2‬وﺗﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪RAM‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻹﻋﺎدة ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫‪ :Auto‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 25‬اﻃﺎر ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [ENTER‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺟﺎﻫﺰة اﻵن ﻹﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪(.‬‬
‫وﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) [ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ :Video‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ‪ ،Auto‬وﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫‪Marker‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﺧﺮ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [;, :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ” “‬
‫@ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[ENTER‬‬
‫‪Audio Menu L‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪ @ [;, :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪[ENTER‬‬
‫‪Advanced‬‬ ‫ﳌﺴﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر]‪ @ [;, :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪+[SHIFT‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬ ‫]‪[CANCEL‬‬
‫‪Surround‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬه اﳌﻴﺰة ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ اﳊﻮار ﺳﻬﻞ اﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫]@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،12‬اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪Advanced‬‬
‫‪ 3 ،MPEG ،DTS ،Dolby Digital) DVD-V‬ﻗﻨﻮات او‬ ‫‪Dialogue‬‬ ‫)‪[(ADVANCED DISC REVIEW‬‬ ‫‪Disc Review‬‬
‫اﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ اﳌﻜﺎن اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻪ اﳊﻮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪Enhancer‬‬
‫‪On ↔ Off‬‬ ‫‪Picture Menu L‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬ ‫‪Multi‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Re-master‬‬ ‫‪ :Cinema1‬ﻳﻠﻄﻒ اﻟﺼﻮر وﻳﻌﺰز اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰز ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮاج ﺻﻮت داﻓﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Sound‬‬ ‫اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Cinema2‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺪة اﻟﺼﻮر وﻳﻌﺰز اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪On ↔ Off‬‬ ‫‪Enhancement‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display Menu L‬‬ ‫‪Animation‬‬
‫‪Details ،،Date ،Off : JPEG‬‬ ‫‪Dynamic‬‬
‫‪Information‬‬
‫‪) User‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر]‪ [ENTER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫‪Picture‬‬
‫‪ 0‬اﻟﻰ ‪) –60‬ﺑﺨﻄﻮات ‪ 2‬وﺣﺪة(‬ ‫‪Subtitle Position‬‬ ‫”‪ @) (“Picture Adjustment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ادﻧﺎه(‬ ‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪) Auto Subtitle Brightness‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬إﻟﻰ ‪–7‬‬ ‫‪Picture Adjustment‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷـﺔ‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‬
‫‪Just Fit Zoom‬‬
‫‪) Color\1‬أو ‪(Colour\2‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ واﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪Manual Zoom‬‬ ‫‪) Gamma‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪة اﺿﺎءة اﳌﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﳌﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪) Depth Enhancer‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ إﺿﻄﺮاﺑﺎت اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪On ↔ Off RAM DVD-V VCD‬‬ ‫‪Bit Rate Display‬‬
‫اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻘﺪم أروع إﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Auto ،،On ،Off‬‬ ‫‪GUI See-through‬‬

‫‪ –3‬اﻟﻰ ‪+3‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪NTSC‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪GUI Brightness‬‬ ‫‪) 480i\1‬او ‪) (525i\2‬اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ( ↔‬
‫‪Other Menu L‬‬ ‫‪) 480p\1‬او ‪) (525p\2‬اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ(‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪PAL‬‬ ‫‪Video‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(18‬‬ ‫‪Setup‬‬ ‫‪) 576i\1‬او ‪) (625i\2‬اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ( ↔‬ ‫‪Output‬‬
‫• اﺧـﺘــﺮ ”‪ “Play as Data Disc‬ﻟـﺘـﺸـﻐ ـﻴــﻞ ﻣ ـﻠ ـﻔــﺎت‬ ‫‪Play as DVD-VR‬‬ ‫‪) 576p\1‬او ‪) (625p\2‬اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ(‬ ‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪ JPEG‬اﳌـﻮﺟـﻮدة ﻋـﻠـﻰ اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ ‪ DVD-RAM‬او‬ ‫‪Play as HighMAT‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ”‪) 480p‬او ‪ “(525p‬او ”‪) 576p‬او ‪ ، “(625p‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐـﻴـﻞ اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ HighMAT‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘـﺨـﺪام‬ ‫أو‬ ‫ﺷـﺎﺷــﺔ اﻟ ـﺘــﻮﻛ ـﻴــﺪ‪ .‬اﺧ ـﺘــﺮ ”‪ “Yes‬ﻓـﻘـﻂ ﻓــﻲ ﺣــﺎﻟــﺔ اﻟ ـﺘــﻮﺻ ـﻴــﻞ‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.HighMAT‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻳﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳋﺮج اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Play as Data Disc‬‬
‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪\1‬‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ واﻟﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ وﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪\2‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(16_17)new2‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 11:39 AM‬‬

 ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪ @) CD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬

‫‪VCD CD WMA MP3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﲟﻘﺪورك ﺑﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫أزرار‬
‫‪Numbered‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪buttons‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم )]‪ ([1]–[5‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ) ‪ WMA MP3‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪PLAY MODE‬‬
‫]‪.([ENTER‬‬
‫‪CANCEL‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪[5] @ [2] @ [h10] :25‬‬ ‫‪, DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪[ENTER] @ [5] @ [2] WMA MP3‬‬
‫• ّﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬ﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬

‫‪.[:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪, , , ,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل أزرار اﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬
‫‪FUNCTIONS‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬و ]‪8, 9‬‬
‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬

‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪8, 9‬‬

‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬اﻋﻼه‪.‬‬ ‫‪ّ .2‬‬

‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‬

‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ .1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪8, 9‬‬
‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧـ ـﺘـ ـﻴـ ــﺎر‬ ‫‪ .2‬اﺿـ ـﻐـ ــﻂ ]‪) [CANCEL]+[SHIFT‬او اﺿـ ـﻐـ ــﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬
‫; ‪8, 9,‬‬
‫”‪ “Clear‬واﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.([ENTER‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ [8‬واﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “Clear all‬ﻣﻊ ]‪;, :‬‬
‫; ‪8, 9,‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PLAY MODE‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﺎﻟﻢ ﲢﺪث اﺣﺪى اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻘﻰ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎت اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر آﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﻳﻘﺎف )اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي(‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬ ‫اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ -‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ او اﻳﻘﺎف وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.CD‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪوي ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﺧﺮى )اﺛﻨﺎء اﻳﻘﺎف وﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ او اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.(CD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PLAY MODE‬ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻳﻘﺎف وﺿﻊ ‪CD‬‬
‫‪VCD CD‬‬
‫ﲟـﻘـﺪورك ﻋـﺮض ﺟـﻤـﻴـﻊ ﺑـﻨـﻮد اﻻﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ اﳌـﻮﺟـﻮدة ﻓـﻲ ﻣـﻮﺿــﻊ اﻟ ـﻌــﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺑﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻳﻘﺎف وﺿﻊ ‪CD‬‬
‫‪DVD-V WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫‪DVD-V VCD CD WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫ﲟﻘﺪورك اﺧﺘﻴـﺎر ﺑـﻨـﺪ )ﺑـﻨـﻮد( اﻻﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ اﳌـﻮﺟـﻮدة ﻓـﻲ ﻣـﻮﺿـﻊ اﻟـﻌـﺮض‬
‫ﲟﻘـﺪورك ﺑـﺮﻣـﺠـﺔ ﺟـﻤـﻴـﻊ اﻟـﺒـﻨـﻮد اﳌـﻮﺟـﻮدة ﻋـﻠـﻰ اﻻﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ ﻓـﻲ ﻣـﻮﺿـﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-V WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪MP3 JPEG‬‬ ‫‪ DVD-V‬اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ )‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ او اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬ ‫‪ WMA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ ([ENTER‬او اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪.‬‬
‫‪Random Playback‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪DVD-V :‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪DVD-V :‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪Choose a title.‬‬ ‫‪Program Playback‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ‬
‫‪Title 1‬‬ ‫‪Choose a title and chapter.‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬ ‫‪Disc‬‬ ‫‪T/G‬‬ ‫‪C/T‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪[5] @ [2] @ [h10] :25‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪0 ~ 9 to select‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬ ‫‪to start‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬ ‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪.[:‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Clear all‬‬ ‫]‪[ENTER] @ [5] @ [2‬‬

‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ALL-DISC‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪ @) CD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(12‬‬
‫‪to select and press ENTER‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬ ‫‪to start‬‬

‫‪VCD CD WMA MP3‬‬ ‫‪MP3 JPEG‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻔﺼﻞ او اﳌﺴﺎر )‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﲟﻘﺪورك ﻋﺮض ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬

‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ WMA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.([ENTER‬‬
‫ّﻛﺮر اﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬ﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪Random Playback‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪CD :‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪.[:‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪.[:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Press PLAY to start‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑـﺎﻳـﻘـﺎف ﻋـﺮض اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ ‪ HighMAT‬ﻟﻜـﻲ ﺗـﺴـﺘـﻄـﻴـﻊ اﺳـﺘـﻌـﻤـﺎل اﻟـﻌـﺮض اﳌـﺒـﺮﻣـﺞ واﻟـﻌـﺮض اﻟـﻌـﺸـﻮاﺋـﻲ‪ .‬اﺧـﺘـﺮ ”‪ “Play as Data Disc‬ﻓـﻲ ‪Other Menu‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪49‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(16_17)new2‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:54 PM‬‬

 ‫ﻋﺮض اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺎت ‪RAM‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪HighMATTM‬‬
‫‪RAM‬‬ ‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ اذا ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻻﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ‪ ،‬وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض وﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[TOP MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9, ;, :‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[DIRECT NAVIGATOR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮر ﻫﺬه اﳋﻄﻮة ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﺮورة‪.‬‬
‫• ّ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪Direct Navigator‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬أو‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫«? ?‪W?? ?L? ? zU?? ?I? ? « v?? ?≈ p?? ?K? ? I? ? M? ? ð ∫W?? ?L? ?zU?? I‬‬
‫أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫‪New New‬‬
‫‪Pla Playlist Item Long Name Display Te‬‬ ‫‪PAG E 1 / 3‬‬
‫« ? ?? ??‪5?? ? ³? ? ?ð w?? ?²? ? « W?? ?I? ? ÐU‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫? ? ??‪Ë√ ÷d?? ? ?F? ? ? « `?? ? z«u‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬ ‫‪Date‬‬ ‫‪On‬‬
‫‪1 11/ 1(WED) 12:05 Friends of a feather‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪+[SHIFT‬‬
‫‪Contents‬‬
‫•‬ ‫‪Menu1‬‬ ‫‪P l ay l i s t 1‬‬ ‫‪Menu2‬‬
‫‪Èd?? ? š√ W?? ? L? ? ?zU?? ?,‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫)‪1/ 1(MON‬‬ ‫‪1:05 Sunny day‬‬ ‫]‪[ANGLE/PAGE‬‬ ‫ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ :‬ﻳﺒﺪء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪3 2/ 2(TUE) 2:21 Penguins habitat‬‬
‫‪4 3/ 3(WED) 3:37 Irresistible‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪5 4/ 10(THU) 11:05 Hot cakes‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪P l ay l i s t 2‬‬ ‫‪Menu3‬‬ ‫‪P l ay l i s t 3‬‬
‫‪0 ~ 9 to select‬‬ ‫‪RETURN to exit‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ‬ ‫‪Prev‬‬ ‫‪Return‬‬ ‫‪Next‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪.[3] @ [2] @ [h10] :23‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [:‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ واﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[FUNCTIONS‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﻟﻰ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[L‬‬
‫«{‪Æ[DIRECT NAVIGATOR] jG‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻹﺳﺘﻄﻼع‬

‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﳉﺪاول‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ أذا اﺣﺘﻮت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺋﺤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض(‬ ‫‪Playlist‬‬ ‫‪All by Artist‬‬ ‫‪The Beatles‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[MENU‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[PLAYLIST‬‬ ‫‪No.‬‬ ‫‪Content title‬‬
‫‪Playlist‬‬ ‫‪Playlist‬‬ ‫‪1 Love Me Do‬‬
‫;[ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ];‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪No.‬‬ ‫‪Date‬‬ ‫‪Length‬‬ ‫‪Title‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬أو أزرار‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Group‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪From Me to You‬‬
‫‪She Loves You‬‬ ‫‪ [8‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ‬‫] ‪8, 9‬‬
‫‪Content‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪11/1‬‬
‫‪1/ 1‬‬
‫‪0:00:01‬‬
‫‪0:01:20‬‬
‫‪City Penguin‬‬
‫‪Ashley at Prom‬‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪I Want to Hold Your Hand‬‬
‫‪Can’t Buy Me Love‬‬ ‫”‪ “Playlist‬و ”‪ “Group‬و‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2/ 2‬‬
‫‪3/ 3‬‬
‫‪1:10:04‬‬
‫‪0:10:20‬‬
‫‪Formula one‬‬
‫‪Soccer‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫”‪.“Content‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4/10‬‬
‫‪4/11‬‬
‫‪0:00:01‬‬
‫‪0:00:01‬‬
‫‪Baseball‬‬
‫‪City Penguin‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪+[SHIFT‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪4/ 15‬‬ ‫‪0:01:10‬‬ ‫‪Ashley at Prom‬‬ ‫]‪ [ANGLE/PAGE‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬ ‫‪ [:‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﺰر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪4/ 17‬‬ ‫‪0:13:22‬‬ ‫‪Formula one‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪0 ~ 9 to select‬‬ ‫‪ENTER to play‬‬ ‫‪RETURN to exit‬‬
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪4/ 20‬‬ ‫‪0:05:30‬‬ ‫‪Soccer‬‬
‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﺪ‬‫] ‪8, 9‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﳌﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪4/22‬‬ ‫‪0:07:29‬‬ ‫‪Baseball‬‬
‫•‬ ‫واﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪9 to select and press ENTER‬‬ ‫‪RETURN‬‬ ‫‪to‬‬ ‫‪exit‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﺘﲔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ‪.[3] @ [2] @ [h10] :23‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[PLAYLIST‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬

‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ WMA/MP3‬و ‪) JPEG‬ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪(CD-RW ،CD-R‬‬

‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ ISO09660‬اﳌﺴﺘﻮى ‪ 1‬او ‪2‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑـﺈﻟـﺘـﻘـﺎط اﻟـﺼـﻮر ﺑـﻮاﺳـﻄـﺔ ﻛـﺎﻣـﻴـﺮا رﻗﻤـﻴـﺔ ﻣـﺘـﻮاﻓـﻘـﺔ ﻣـﻊ ﻣـﻘـﻴـﺎس‬ ‫)ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪا اﻟﺼﻴﻎ اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺟﺪاً(‪.‬‬
‫‪) (Design rule for Camera File system) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم‬ ‫• ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳉﻠﺴﺎت اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة وﻟﻜﻦ اذا ﻛﺎن ﻫﻨﺎك اﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﳌـﻠـﻒ اﳋـﺎص ﺑـﺎﻟـﻜـﺎﻣـﻴـﺮا( وﻣﺴـﺠـﻠـﺔ ﺑـﺈﺳـﺘـﺨـﺪام اﻻﺻـﺪار ‪ .1.0‬ﺑـﻌـﺾ‬ ‫اﳉﻠﺴﺎت ﺳﻮف ﺗﺄﺧﺬ وﻗﺖ اﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺒﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪد اﳉﻠﺴﺎت‬
‫اﻟـﻜـﺎﻣـﻴــﺮات اﻟـﺮﻗـﻤـﻴـﺔ ﻟـﻬــﺎ وﻇـﺎﺋـﻒ ﻏـﻴـﺮ ﻣـﺘــﻮاﻓـﻘـﺔ ﻣـﻊ ﻣـﻘـﻴــﺎس ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳊﺪ اﻻدﻧﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺻﺪار ‪ 1.0‬ﻣﺜﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً واﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻨﺔ اﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻂ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ أو ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮر اﳌﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ MOTION JPEG ،‬أو‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺣﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫أﳕﺎط اﻟﺼﻴـﻎ اﻷﺧـﺮى أو اﻟﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﺼﻴـﻎ ﻏـﻴـﺮ اﻟـﺼـﻴـﻐـﺔ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻮﻟﺪرات واﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎل‪ (TIFF :‬أو ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻮﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت وﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪MP3 :‬‬ ‫اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪات ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Windows Media‬واﻟﺸﻌﺎر ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪root‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻮﻟﺪرات واﳌﻠﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﲡﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺎدﺋﺔ رﻗﻤﻴﺔ ذات ‪ 3‬اﻋﺪاد ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪001group‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت‬ ‫ﺗـﺸﻐـﻴـﻠﻬـﺎ ﺑﻪ )ﳝـﻜـﻦ ان ﻻ ﻳﺘـﻢ اﻟـﺘﺸـﻐـﻴﻞ ﺑـﻨﻔـﺲ‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪة و‪/‬أو اﻟﺪول اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻻوﻗﺎت(‪.‬‬
‫‪001track.mp3‬‬
‫‪002track.mp3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﲢﺘﻮي اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ رﻣﺰ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ WMA‬ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻄّﻮر ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪003track.mp3‬‬ ‫”‪ “.WMA‬او ”‪“.wma‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Microsoft Corporation‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻫﺬه‬ ‫‪002group‬‬ ‫”‪ “.MP3‬او ”‪“.mp3‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻧﻔﺲ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ MP3‬وﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫”‪ “.JPEG” ،“.jpg” ،“.JPG‬او ”‪“.jpeg‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ أﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻒ ‪.MP3‬‬

‫ّ‬ ‫‪001track.mp3‬‬
‫‪003group‬‬ ‫‪002track.mp3‬‬ ‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪003track.mp3‬‬ ‫• ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ WMA‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮن‬
‫اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ MPEG Layer-3‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻔﺮة ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫‪004track.mp3‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎخ‪.‬‬
‫رﺳﻤﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮف ‪ Fraunhofer IIS‬و ‪.Thomson multimedia‬‬ ‫‪001track.mp3‬‬
‫‪002track.mp3‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد‬
‫‪003track.mp3‬‬
‫)‪.(MBR‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺒﺎرة ‪ HighMATTM‬واﻟﺸﻌﺎر ‪ HighMAT‬ﻫﻤﺎ إﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎن ﲡﺎرﻳﺘﺎن أو ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎن ﲡﺎرﻳﺘﺎن ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎن‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت‬ ‫• ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.ID3‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫• ½‪‡¼ „ 48 ¨44.1 ¨32 ¨24 ¨22.05 ¨16 ¨12 ¨11.02 ¨8 ∫WI«u²*« …d¹UF*« W³‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﺤﺪة و‪/‬أو اﻟﺪول اﻷﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪50‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(14_15)new1‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:19 PM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻹﺳﺘﻄﻼع‬

‫‪ 7‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[FUNCTIONS‬‬ ‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫أزرار‬

‫‪Numbered‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪buttons‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫‪Multi‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت واﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫‪List‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬

‫‪Tree‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت‬
‫‪Thumbnail‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮر ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮة ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪Next group‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎب اﻟﻰ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪WMA MP3‬‬
‫‪Previous group‬‬ ‫‪TOP MENU,‬‬ ‫‪MENU,‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎب اﻟﻰ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪WMA MP3‬‬
‫‪DIRECT‬‬ ‫‪PLAYLIST,‬‬
‫‪All‬‬ ‫‪ WMA/MP3‬و ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪NAVIGATOR‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE/PAGE‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ‪WMA/MP3‬‬ ‫‪, , , ,‬‬
‫‪Picture‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Help display‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ وﻣﺆﺷﺮ وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬ ‫‪FUNCTIONS‬‬
‫‪Find‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﻮان اﶈﺘﻮى او اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ )@ اﻧﻈﺮ ادﻧﺎه(‬
‫‪,‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬

‫‪ 7‬اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﻮان اﶈﺘﻮى او اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬

‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻹﺳﺘﻄﻼع‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮان اﺠﻤﻟـﻤـﻮﻋـﺔ ﻟـﻠـﺒـﺤـﺚ ﻋـﻦ اﺠﻤﻟـﻤـﻮﻋـﺔ‪ ،‬او ﻋـﻨـﻮان اﶈـﺘـﻮﻳـﺎت‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )@ اﻧﻈﺮ اﻋﻼه(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪Find‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر”‪“Find‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫واﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺣﺮف واﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪8, 9‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ JPEG‬اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RAM‬أو ﻋﺮض‬
‫• ﻛﺮر ﻻدﺧﺎل اﳊﺮوف اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ HighMAT‬ﺑﺪون إﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ @) HighMAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪17‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺎﳊﺮوف اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ”‪ “Play as Data Disc‬ﺿﻤﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(Other Menu‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]) ‪ [(,‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﲔ اﳊﺮوف ‪ O ،I ،E ،A‬و ‪.U‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻨﻮد ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض(‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪ [/‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺣﺮف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺗﺮك ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ) ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[TOP MENU‬‬
‫اﳊﺮف اﻟﺬي ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ) ( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪأ ﺑﺎﳊﺮف‬ ‫‪ 2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر )‪ ،“All” (WMA, MP3/JPEG‬أو‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎدﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ) ( ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‪ ،‬اﻋﺮض‬ ‫)‪ “Audio” (WMA/MP3‬أو )‪ ،“Picture” (JPEG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى واﺧﺘﺮ ”‪.“Find‬‬ ‫]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫‪ [:‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻳﺠﺎد ”‪ “Find‬واﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[TOP MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻨﺪ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﻼح(‬
‫‪ [8‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﶈﺘﻮى او اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪8, 9‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9, ;, :‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ أو‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬اﻟﺼﻮرة ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ادراج ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﲟﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪CD‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﻧﺺ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [TOP MENU‬أو ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮض اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﻧﺺ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐـﻂ ]‪.[8, 9‬‬
‫‪CD Text‬‬ ‫‪T 1/14‬‬ ‫‪0:53‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪Disc Title‬‬
‫‪Disc Artist‬‬
‫‪: Celine Dion One Heart‬‬
‫‪: Celine Dion‬‬
‫اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ وﻋﺪد اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫‪Track Title‬‬ ‫)‪: I Drove All Night (Album Version‬‬ ‫‪Navigation Menu‬‬ ‫‪G 2‬‬ ‫‪C 5‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬ ‫‪1:54‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪Track Artist‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬ ‫)‪I Drove All Night (Album Version‬‬ ‫‪Breaking The Habit‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫)‪Love Is All We Need (Album Version‬‬
‫‪Sep 15 2003‬‬
‫‪Lirkin Park‬‬ ‫‪Meteora‬‬ ‫‪Dont_Stay‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪: WMA/MP3‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫)‪FAITH (Album Version‬‬ ‫‪Penguins‬‬ ‫‪Faint‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫)‪In His Touch (Album Version‬‬ ‫‪Hit_The_Floor_ _Abyss‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﻰ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت ‪; :‬‬
‫‪5.‬‬ ‫)‪One Heart (Album Version‬‬ ‫‪Lirkin Park [Hyorid Theor‬‬
‫‪6.‬‬ ‫)‪Stand By Your side (Album Version‬‬
‫‪Lirkin Park_Cure For The‬‬
‫‪7.‬‬ ‫)‪NAKED (Album Version‬‬
‫‪8.‬‬ ‫)‪Sorry For Love (Album Version‬‬ ‫_‪Lirkin_Park_ _Metora‬‬
‫_‪Lirkin_Park_ _Metora‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‬
‫‪9.‬‬ ‫)‪Have You Ever Been In Love (Album Version‬‬
‫‪10.‬‬ ‫)‪Reveal (Album Version‬‬ ‫‪Lying_From_You‬‬
‫‪Somewhere_I_Belong‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Lady Starfish‬‬
‫‪to select and press ENTER‬‬ ‫‪RETURN to exit‬‬
‫‪Life on Jupiter‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪: JPEG‬‬
‫‪Group 002/003‬‬ ‫‪Content 0005/0012‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪ [8, 9‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر واﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪.[ENTER‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪FUNCTIONS to display the sub menu‬‬ ‫‪RETURN to exit‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬

‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [FUNCTIONS‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض واﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT‬ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ او ﻧﻄﺎق اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع اﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ‪ WMA/MP3‬اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﺻﻮرة‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [TOP MENU‬أو ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ،JPEG‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ أو ً‬
‫)ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪51‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(14_15)new1‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 8:42 AM‬‬

 ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ أﺑﻌﺎد اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪) DVD-V VCD‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة اﳌﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ( ‪RAM‬‬ ‫‪RAM DVD-V VCD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [AUDIO] + [SHIFT‬ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺴﺎر اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮم ﻫﺬه اﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺻﻮرة ﺻﻨﺪوق اﳊﺮوف ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪DVD-V :‬‬ ‫‪RAM VCD‬‬ ‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻳﻀﺎً اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻟﺰر ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻳﺴﺎر‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ZOOM] + [SHIFT‬ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫‪Functions‬‬ ‫”‪ ،“L‬ﳝﲔ ”‪ “R‬او ﻳﺴﺎر ﳝﲔ ”‪.“LR‬‬ ‫اﳌﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً )‪ (Just Fit Zoom‬أو ”‪.“Auto‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪) DVD-V‬أﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ(‬
‫;[ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”‪ “On‬او ”‪ “Off‬ﻷﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬ ‫‪Functions‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻗﺮإ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Just Fit Zoom‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻹﺷﺎرة‪/‬اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪4:3 Standard‬‬
‫‪ :LPCM/PPCM/0Digital/DTS/MPEG‬ﻧﻮع اﻻﺷﺎرة‬
‫‪European Vista‬‬
‫‪16:9 Standard‬‬
‫‪) kHz‬ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ(‪) ch/bit/‬ﻋﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات(‬
‫‪American Vista‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪3 / 2 .1ch :‬‬ ‫‪Cinemascope1‬‬
‫‪ :1‬اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫‪Cinemascope2‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﻳﺴﺮى اﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﳝﻨﻰ اﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :3‬ﻳﺴﺮى اﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ +‬ﳝﻨﻰ اﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ +‬وﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫)‪16:9 Standard (16:9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫)‪4:3 Standard (4:3‬‬
‫‪ :0‬ﺑﺪون ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﺣﺎدي‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪ :2‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ )ﻳﺴﺮى‪/‬ﳝﻨﻰ(‬

‫‪ :.1‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺮدد ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض اذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎك اﺷﺎرة(‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫)‪European Vista (1.66:1‬‬

‫‪) VCD‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-V (SVCD‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة(‬ ‫)‪American Vista (1.85:1‬‬
‫)‪Cinemascope1 (2.35:1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SUBTITLE] + [SHIFT‬ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ‫)‪Cinemascope2 (2.55:1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-V‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،+R/+RW‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض رﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ )‪(Manual Zoom‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻻﺑﻌﺎد اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً او ”‪ ،“Auto‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬
‫;[‪.‬‬
‫‪Functions‬‬ ‫ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻣﻦ ”‪ “x1.00‬اﻟﻰ ”‪ 0.01) “x1.60‬وﺣﺪة(‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫– ﻣﻦ ”‪ “x1.60‬اﻟﻰ ”‪ 0.02) “x2.00‬وﺣﺪة(‬
‫;[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “On‬او ”‪.“Off‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫;[ واﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻀﻐﻮ ً‬‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬
‫‪) RAM‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻳﻘﺎف ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SUBTITLE] + [SHIFT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪ “On‬او ”‪.“Off‬‬ ‫‪RAM DVD-V‬‬
‫ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼت ﺑﺎﻧﺎﺳﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [PLAY SPEED] + [SHIFT‬ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﻜﺮر‬ ‫”‪ “Normal‬او ”‪ “Fast‬او ”‪.“Slow‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺑﺎﻻﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﺮض وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪ : JPEG‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻣﻠﻒ ‪(.JPEG‬‬
‫‪Functions‬‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Play Speed‬‬ ‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ]‪ [REPEAT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮاره‪.‬‬ ‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪DVD-V :‬‬
‫‪Functions‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﲔ اﳌﺪى ”‪ “x0.6‬اﻟﻰ ”‪) “x1.4‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪات ﻣﻘﺪارﻫﺎ‬
‫‪(0.1‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬ ‫‪Off‬‬ ‫‪Off‬‬
‫;[ اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ اﻋﻼه‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬
‫‪Chapter‬‬
‫‪Title‬‬
‫‪ [:‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪Off ← Disc ← Program : RAM‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫• اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪Off ← Playlist ← Scene :‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ ودوران اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫‪Off ← Title\ ← Chapter : DVD-V‬‬
‫‪Off ← Disc\ ← Track : VCD CD‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ANGLE/PAGE] + [SHIFT‬ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‬
‫او ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪Off ← All CD’s ← Disc ← Track :CD‬‬
‫‪) DVD-V‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺎ اﳌﺘﻌﺪدة( ‪ -‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،CD‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪:‬‬

‫‪Off ← All CD’s ← Track‬‬ ‫‪ - JPEG‬ﺗﺪوﻳﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫‪Off ← Group\ ← Content : MP3 WMA‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪Off ← All CD’s ← Group ← Content :CD‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪ ،CD‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪Off ← All CD’s ← Content‬‬
‫‪Off ← Group\ : JPEG‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫\ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ”‪ “All‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ واﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪52‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(12_13)new2‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:48 PM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬

‫)‪(ADVANCED DISC REVIEW‬‬
‫‪) DVD-V‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨـﺎء ‪RAM (+R/+RW‬‬
‫داﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ واﺑﺪأ ﺑﻌﺮض اﳌﻮﺿﻊ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎر‪.‬‬‫ً‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻣﺎ ”‪ “Intro Mode‬او ”‪ “Interval Mode‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”‪ “Advanced Disc Review‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ”‪ @) “Disc‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(18‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪DISC‬‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‬ ‫أزرار‬
‫‪Numbered‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪CD MODE‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[A.DISC REVIEW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪buttons‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.QUICK OSD‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫‪QUICK OSD‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪RAM :‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪SUBTITLE‬‬
‫‪Program‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬ ‫‪0:01:06‬‬ ‫‪A.DISC REVIEW,‬‬
‫‪MANUAL SKIP,‬‬ ‫‪PLAY SPEED‬‬
‫‪QUICK REPLAY‬‬
‫‪, DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪ [:‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲡﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‪/‬اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺬي‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE/PAGE‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻨﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ وﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ZOOM‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪(CD MODE) CD‬‬

‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪VCD CD WMA MP3‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪة ﺟﺪاً اذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﻌﺰف ﻋﺪة اﺳﻄﻮاﻧـﺎت ‪ CD‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ وﺟﻮد اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺰف‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰف‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬و ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ دون ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[CD MODE‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣـﻦ ﺗـﻌـﺒـﺌـﺔ اﻻﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺎت ﻣـﻊ ﺷـﺎﺷـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫‪.[:‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻳﻀﺎً اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮًة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ أزرار اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺰف ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DISC‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،(DVD‬ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ وﺿﻊ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫‪Disc Information‬‬
‫• ﻻﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ‪ HighMAT‬اﳌﺘﻔﻮﻗﺔ واﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫‪DVD-Video‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪Track 10‬‬ ‫‪Time 60:15‬‬
‫• ﻻﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض او اﺛﻨﺎء وﺿﻊ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ او اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪DVD-VR‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Unchecked‬‬
‫• اذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﻌﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CD MODE‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى ﻻﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫‪No Disc‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ ‪) .CD‬ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻐﺎء وﺿﻊ ‪ CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫او ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬او ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬ ‫ﻓﺎرغ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ اﻟﻘﺮاءة ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ازرار اﻷرﻗﺎم )]‪ ([1]–[5‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫اﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ(‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[DISC‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪(+R/+RW‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [QUICK REPLAY] + [SHIFT‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻋﺪة ﺛﻮان‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(QUICK OSD‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮراء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[QUICK OSD‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪DVD-V :‬‬
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻣﺪة اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻴﺔ(‬ ‫رﻗﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻮﻗﺖ اﳌﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪) DVD-V‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪RAM (+R/+RW‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‪ .‬ﻫﺬه اﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪة‬
‫اذا رﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻲ اﻻﻋﻼﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ…اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0:41:23‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Title‬‬ ‫‪Chapter‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬

‫اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MANUAL SKIP‬‬ ‫‪Program Playback‬‬

‫‪ RAM‬ﻻﳝﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺒﺮﻧـﺎﻣـﺞ اﳊـﺎﻟـﻲ اذا ﻛـﺎﻧـﺖ ﺑـﺪاﻳـﺔ اﻟـﺒـﺮﻧـﺎﻣـﺞ‬ ‫وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[QUICK OSD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ QUICK OSD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬ع‬ ‫‪CD WMA MP3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪12‬‬
‫‪53‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(12_13)new2‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:48 PM‬‬


‫اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[PROGRESSIVE] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(4‬‬
‫ادﺧﺎل اﻷرﻗﺎم‬
‫‪RAM DVD-V VCD CD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪[2] @ [1] @ [h10] :12‬‬
‫‪ VCD‬ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎدة اﻟﻌﺮض )‪(PBC‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [L‬ﻻﻟﻐﺎء وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،PBC‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار‬
‫اﻷرﻗﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار اﻷرﻗﺎم ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪[ENTER] @ [3] @ [2] @ [1] :123‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CANCEL]+[SHIFT‬ﻻﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫)اﻻرﻗﺎم(‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪L, CANCEL‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [J‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [:, DVD/CD‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻃﺎر ﺗﻠﻮ اﻃﺎر آﺧﺮ‬
‫‪RAM DVD-V VCD‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [;, :‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ VCD‬اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪(, ), SLOW/SEARCH‬‬
‫‪SHIFT‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ) ‪ ( DVD-V‬او اﻟﺒﺮاﻣﺞ ) ‪.( RAM‬‬
‫‪ :b‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫) ‪ ( DVD-V‬او ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض ) ‪.( RAM‬‬
‫‪ VCD‬ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎدة اﻟﻌﺮض )‪(PBC‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [RETURN‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫‪RQT8092_Ar(10_11)new1‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬
‫ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [FL DISPLAY‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪RAM DVD-V WMA MP3‬‬
‫ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ↔ ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪:(17‬‬
‫‪ ↔ SLIDE‬ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻳﻘﺎف ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﻼﻳﺪ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪:(17‬‬
‫‪ ↔ PLAY‬ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[SUBTITLE] + [SHIFT‬‬
‫‪RAM‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎت اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬
‫‪) VCD‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ SVCD‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪DVD-V‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﺎرﺿﺔ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪.‬‬
‫•‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺎرﻳﺦ ← ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮرة ← ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‬
‫‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪأ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻦ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﺨﻤﻟﺘﺎرة‬
‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [GROUP] + [SHIFT‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [8, 9‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ اﺠﻤﻟﻠﺪ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ WMA/MP3‬واﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎره ”‪.“Group‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪/‬اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[8, 9‬‬
‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[;, :‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [8, 9, ;, :‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر واﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [ENTER‬ﻻﳒﺎز اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪2/3/05, 1:17 PM‬‬
 ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [OPEN/CLOSE c‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻮاﻧﻲ اﻷﺧﺮى‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [1]–[5‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ واﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫]‪ [OPEN/CLOSE c‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت )واﺣﺪة ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﻣﺰدوﺟﺔ اﳉﺎﻧﺒﲔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﲡﺎه اﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ RAM‬اﺧﺮج اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎرﺗﺮج ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﺗﺴﺤﺐ او ﺗﺪﻓﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺪك‪.‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [OPEN/CLOSE c‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺧﺮى‬
‫اﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DISC CHANGE c‬وﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DISC CHECK‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫]‪.[1]–[5‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى ﻟﻐﻠﻖ اﻟﺼﻮاﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [DISC CHANGE c‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻠﻖ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻳﻀﺎً اﺧﺮاج اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺮاج او ادﺧﺎل اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ )اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت( اﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬

‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• اذا اﺧﺘﺮت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺴﺤﺐ اﻟﺼﻮاﻧﻲ اﻻﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج اﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﻌﺮض وﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﻻﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫‪ [L‬اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪L, STOP‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﺰن اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮض ”‪ “RESUME‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ]‪[:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎف‪.‬‬
‫• اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [L, STOP‬ﻣﺮة اﺧﺮى‬
‫ﳌﺴﺢ اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [1]–[5‬ﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫]‪ [:, DVD/CD‬اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪/‬اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪ [g, REW/4‬او ]‪.[f, 3 /FF‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪ :‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪4‬‬

‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪ :‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺰر ]‪ [g, REW/ 4‬او ]‪[f, 3 /FF‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ :‬اﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺰر ]‪ [g, REW/ 4‬او ]‪ [f, 3 /FF‬اﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ VCD‬اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﲡﺎه اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﻮف ﺗﺰداد ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻛﺔ اﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺧﻄﻮات‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ﺑﺎﻟﺪوران اﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮض اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [L‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﻮﺣﺪة وﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻌﺪد اﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.+R/+RW‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(10_11)new1‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:14 PM‬‬

 ‫ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻷزرار ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫‪â‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫زر اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻳﻘﺎف ﻗﺪرة‬ ‫‪ì‬‬

‫‪25, 24 ...................................................... [f‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ]‪f‬‬
‫‪î‬‬
‫‪f, TVf‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻷزرار اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ]‪11 ............................................... [0 – 9, X10‬‬ ‫?‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻻزرار ﲤﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻴﺔ ]‪11 ..................... [PROGRESSIVE‬‬ ‫]‪:[1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫]‪ :[7‬زر اﻟﺼـﺪى ]‪22 ....................................................... [ECHO‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ]‪11 ................................. [SUBTITLE‬‬ ‫]‪:[0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫]‪ :[X10‬زراﻟﺼﻮت ]‪13 ...................................................... [AUDIO‬‬
‫زر ‪ OSD‬اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ]‪12 .......................................... [QUICK OSD‬‬ ‫‪ï‬‬ ‫@‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫زر اﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ]‪11 ............................................................. [J‬‬ ‫‪ñ‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ó‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫زر اﻹﻳﻘﺎف‪ ،‬اﻹﻟﻐﺎء ]‪16, 15, 11, 6 ............................ [L, CANCEL‬‬

‫زر اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﻴﺪوي‪ ،‬اﻋﺎدة اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ò‬‬ ‫\‬
‫[‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫]‪12 ................................... [MANUAL SKIP, QUICK REPLAY‬‬

‫زر اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‪/‬اﻟﺪﺧﻞ اﳋﺎرﺟﻲ ]‪25, 20 ........................ [TUNER/AUX‬‬ ‫‪ô‬‬ ‫^‬
‫]‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫زر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺒﺤﺚ اﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ö‬‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪+‬‬

‫‪,‬‬
‫‪õ‬‬
‫]‪15, 14, 11 ........................ [TOP MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR‬‬
‫زر اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬اﺠﻤﻟﻤﻮﻋﺎت ]‪17, 14, 11 ....... [FUNCTIONS, GROUP‬‬
‫ازرار ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬اﻋﺎدة ﻟﻒ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪،‬‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ú‬‬ ‫{‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪g , REW/4‬‬
‫]‪4, f, 3 /FF‬‬
‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪21, 20, 6 ......................................... [g‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ]‪[SHIFT‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ]‪ [SHIFT‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫|‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫زر ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪25 ...................................................... [MUTING‬‬ ‫‪û‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬اﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‬ ‫‪ü‬‬ ‫}‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫]‪24, 6 ............................................. [CLOCK/TIMER, SLEEP‬‬
‫زر ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪V‬‬ ‫!‬
‫˚[ ‪25, 24 .........................................‬‬ ‫]‪˚ PLAY/REC, AUTO OFF‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫زر ﻋﺮض ‪ ، FL‬اﳌﻌﺘﻢ ]‪25, 11 ................ [FL DISPLAY, DIMMER‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻔﻮق ‪23 .............................. [S.SOUND EQ] EQ‬‬ ‫†‬
‫زر ﺻﻮت ‪ ، EQ‬اﻟﻴﺪوي ‪23 ...... [SOUND EQ, –MANUAL EQ] EQ‬‬
‫زر اﶈﻴﻄﻲ اﳌﺘﻘﺪم‪ ،‬اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد‬
‫]‪23 ............................................... [A.SRND, M.RE-MASTER‬‬
‫زر اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‬ ‫‪°‬‬
‫]‪20, 12 .................................................. [DISC, TUNER PGM‬‬
‫زر وﺿﻊ ‪12 .................................................. [CD MODE] CD‬‬ ‫‪¢‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺘﻜﺮار ]‪13 ....................................................... [REPEAT‬‬
‫زر وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﺮض ]‪21, 20, 16 .............................. [PLAY MODE‬‬
‫زر ﺗﻘﺪﱘ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬ ‫‪£‬‬
‫]‪13, 12 ................................ [A.DISC REVIEW, PLAY SPEED‬‬
‫زر اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ ‪ /‬اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫§‬
‫]‪14, 13, 11 ....................... [MENU, PLAYLIST, ANGLE/PAGE‬‬
‫أزرار ﲢﺮﻳﻚ اﳌﺆﺷﺮ ]‪[8, 9, ;, :‬‬ ‫•‬
‫زر اﻹدﺧﺎل ]‪23, 15, 14, 13, 11, 6 ................................ [ENTER‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻻزرار ﲤﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[;, :‬أزرار إﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻗﻨﻮات اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬

‫¶‬
‫]‪25 ............................................................... [TV CH 4, TV CH 3‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺮﺟﻮع‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ]‪13, 6 ........................... [RETURN, ZOOM‬‬
‫أزرار اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪ ،‬واﳌﻮاﻟﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ß‬‬
‫]‪20, 14, 11 ................................... [//, --, SLOW/SEARCH‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﻫﺬه اﻻزرار ﲤﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫]‪ :[//‬زر اﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﺿﻊ اﻟﺪﺧﻞ ]‪25 .................................. [TV/AV‬‬
‫]‪ :[--‬زر اﻻﻋﺪاد ]‪6 ...................................................... [SETUP‬‬
‫ازرار ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ازرار ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬ ‫®‬
‫]‪25, 22 ....................................... [–, +, VOLUME, – TV VOL +‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫‪56‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(08_09)new2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:09 PM‬‬

 ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫درج اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫زر ﻓﺤﺺ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪10 ...................................... [DISC CHECK‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺴﺲ اﺷﺎرة ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ إﻣﺪاد اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ]‪[AC IN‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻫﺬا اﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪.AC‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪/‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪[f/I‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﻔﻂ ﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬
‫واﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻮاﺻﻞ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ إﺳﺘﻬﻼك ﻗﺴﻄًﺎ ﻃﻔﻴﻔًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺪرة ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ]‪23 ..................... [MULTI RE-MASTER‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫اﳌﻄﻮر ]‪23 ............. [ADVANCED SURROUND‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫زر ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫زر اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺪك ‪21 ............................................. [DECK 1/2] 1/2‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫زر اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ]‪21 ............................................................ [[ REC‬‬
‫ﺿﺎﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ]‪22 .......... [MIC VOL MIN, MAX‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﳌﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮن ]‪22 ................................................... [MIC 1, 2‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻟﺪك ‪21 ............................................................. 1‬‬ ‫‪Ä‬‬
‫‪Å‬‬
‫‪Ç‬‬
‫زر ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪10 ................ [OPEN/CLOSE c‬‬
‫زر ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ]‪10 ............................... [DISC CHANGE c‬‬
‫‪É‬‬
‫‪Ñ‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ‬

‫‪Ö‬‬
‫أزرار اﻟﻌﺰف اﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪10 .................... [1 – 5] DVD/CD‬‬
‫زر اﳌﻮازن اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ اﳌﻤﺘﺎز ‪23 ........... [SUPER SOUND EQ] EQ‬‬
‫زر ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪23 ............................................. [SOUND EQ‬‬ ‫‪Ü‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ]‪25 .......................................... [PHONES‬‬ ‫‪á‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻟﺪك ‪21 ....................................................... 2‬‬ ‫‪à‬‬

‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ‬

‫زر ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪6 .............................. [:, DVD/CD] DVD/CD‬‬ ‫‪â‬‬

‫زر ﻋﺰف اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪/‬اﲡﺎه اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ]‪21 ......................... [; :, TAPE‬‬ ‫‪ä‬‬
‫زر اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‪/‬اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ]‪20 ......................... [BAND, TUNER‬‬ ‫‪ã‬‬
‫زر اﻟﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮي ]‪25 ......................................................... [AUX‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬
‫زر اﻻﻳﻘﺎف ]‪10 ............................................................ [L, STOP‬‬ ‫‪ç‬‬
‫ازرار ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺘﻘﺪﱘ‬ ‫‪é‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ اﻋﺎدة ﻟﻒ اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫]‪21, 20, 10 ................................... [g, REW/ 4, f, 3 /FF‬‬
‫زر ﻓﺘﺢ دك ‪21 ...................................................... [c, DECK1] 1‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬
‫زر اﻟﻌﺮض‪ ،‬اﻻﻇﻬﺎر ]‪25, 6 ........................ [DISP MODE, –DEMO‬‬ ‫‪ê‬‬
‫زر ﻓﺘﺢ دك ‪21 ...................................................... [c, DECK2] 2‬‬ ‫‪ë‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻮ اﻟﺼﻮت ]‪22 .......................... [VOLUME DOWN, UP‬‬ ‫‪í‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫‪57‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(08_09)new2‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 8:50 AM‬‬

 ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬

‫اﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬ ‫اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻌﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ا ﳌ ﺴ ﺠ ﻠ ﺔ ﻣ ﻊ ا ﻷ ﺟ ﻬ ﺰة ﺑ ﺎ ﺳ ﺘ ﺨ ﺪ ا م ا ﻟ ﻨ ﺴ ﺨ ﺔ ‪ 1.1‬ﻟ ﺼ ﻴ ﻐ ﺔ ﺗ ﺴ ﺠ ﻴ ﻞ ا ﻟ ﻔ ﻴ ﺪ ﻳ ﻮ ) ﻗ ﻴ ﺎ س ﺗ ﺴ ﺠ ﻴ ﻞ‬
‫ﻓ ﻴ ﺪ ﻳ ﻮ ﻣ ﻮﺣ ﺪ ( ﻣ ﺜ ﻞ ﻣ ﺴ ﺠ ﻼ ت ‪ ،DVD video‬ﻛ ﺎ ﻣ ﻴ ﺮا ت ‪ ،DVD video‬ا ﻟ ﻜ ﻤ ﺒ ﻴ ﻮﺗ ﺮا ت‬ ‫‪RAM‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪…،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻴﺎس ‪) (Design rule for Camera File system) DCF‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا(‪.‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ ،JPEG‬اﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “Play as Data Disc‬ﻓﻲ ‪ @) Other Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬

‫—‬
‫‪DVD-Video‬‬

‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ واﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ اﳒﺎزﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ\ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼت ‪ DVD video‬او‬ ‫‪DVD-R‬‬
‫‪DVD-V‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮات ‪ DVD video‬اﳌﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻧﺎﺳﻮﻧﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(DVD-Video‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‬

‫)‪(DVD-Video‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ واﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ اﳒﺎزﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ\ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻼت ‪ DVD video‬او‬ ‫—‬
‫‪+R (Video)/‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮات ‪.DVD video‬‬ ‫)‪+RW (Video‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪Video CD‬‬

‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪.IEC62107‬‬
‫‪SVCD‬‬

‫ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،HDCD‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻻﺷﺎرة اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﺳﻊ اﳌﺪى اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻼﺷﺎرات ذات اﳌﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪ CDs‬اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ HDCD‬اﻓﻀﻞ ﻻﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪20‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬
‫ﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪ CDs‬اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪ 16‬ﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪) CD-R/RW‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت( اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻎ‬
‫اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪ .‬اﻏﻠﻖ اﳉﻠﺴﺎت او اﻧﻬﻲ \اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪HighMAT‬‬ ‫‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ WMA‬او ‪ MP3‬او ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،HighMAT‬اﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “Play as Data Disc‬ﻓﻲ ‪Other Menu‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫—‬
‫‪CD-R‬‬
‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(17‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪CD-RW‬‬

‫• ‪ WMA‬ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻻﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺒﺖ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد )‪ :MBR‬اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫‪VCD‬‬
‫اﳌﺸﻔﺮة ﲟﻌﺪﻻت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺒﺖ(‪.‬‬

‫\ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة اﻋﻼه ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﳊﺎﻻت ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻮع اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ او ﻇﺮوف اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 7‬اﺟﺮاءات اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬

‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﳌﻠﺼﻘﺎت او اﻟﻠﻴﺒﻼت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت )ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ذﻟﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮاء او ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﻘﺮار اﻻداء(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ اﳌﻠﺼﻖ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ او ادوات ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ اﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺨﺎﺧﺎت ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ او ﺳﻮاﺋﻞ اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ او اﻟﺜﻨﺮ او‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻊ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ او اﻳﺔ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎت اﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم واﻗﻴﺎت ﺿﺪ اﳋﺪش او اﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ذات اﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺸﻮرة ﻣﻦ اﺛﺮ ﻧﺰع اﳌﻠﺼﻘﺎت او اﻟﻠﻴﺒﻼت‬
‫)اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺄﺟﻴﺮ اﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﳌﻠﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﺪاً او اﳌﻜﺴﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ذات اﻻﺷﻜﺎل ﻏﻴﺮ اﳌﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬اﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪ PAL‬او ‪،NTSC‬‬
‫وﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻻﺳﻄﻮﻧﺎت اﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ‪ PAL‬ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVD-ROM ،DVD-Audio‬و ‪ CD-ROM‬و‪ CDV‬و ‪ CD-G‬و‬
‫‪ ،SACD‬واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ Divx Video‬واﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺼﻮر ‪ Photo CD‬و ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎرﺗﺮج‪ ،‬اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ 2.6-GB‬و‬
‫‪ 5.2-GB DVD-RAM‬و ”‪ “Chaoji VCD‬اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﻓﻲ اﻻﺳﻮاق وﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ‪،CVD‬‬
‫‪ DVCD‬و ‪ SVCD‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪.IEC62107‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ DVDs‬واﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪CDs‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﳌﻨﺘـﺞ ﻫـﺬه اﻻﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻜﻴﻔـﻴـﺔ ﺗـﺸـﻐـﻴـﻞ اﻻﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧﺎت ﻟـﺬﻟـﻚ‬
‫ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ داﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮوح ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻼ اذا ﻛﺎن وﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮوض او اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻫﺬه‬
‫اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪ CD‬ﲢﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ(‪ .‬اﻗﺮأ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗ ـ ـﻘـ ــﻮم ﻫـ ــﺬه اﻟـ ــﻮﺣـ ــﺪة ﺑ ـ ـﺘ ـ ـﻤ ـ ـﻴ ـ ـﻴ ـ ــﺰ وﺣـ ــﻞ رﻣـ ــﻮز‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﲢﻮﻳﻞ اﺷﺎرات ﻧﻈﺎم ‪ NTSC‬اﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪PAL60‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻧﻈﺎم ‪ @) PAL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،19‬ﺟﺪول”‪- “Video‬‬
‫اﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎش ﻣﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ اﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.(NTSC Disc Output‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪58‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(07)new2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:43 PM‬‬

 ‫‪QUICK SETUP‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪك ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QUICK SETUP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت اﻟﻀﺮورﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CLOCK/‬‬
‫‪TIMER‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن واﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [:, DVD/CD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر”‪ “DVD/CD‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر ﻋﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ [L‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪L‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [SETUP] + [SHIFT‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔاﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪, DVD/CD‬‬

‫‪.QUICK SETUP‬‬

‫; ‪ [8, 9,‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ واﺿﻐﻂ ]‪;, :‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫]‪ [ENTER‬ﻻﳒﺎز اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫‪, , , ,‬‬

‫‪ / QUICK SETUP‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ /‬وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ‪DEMO‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [RETURN‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة اﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪RETURN‬‬
‫اﺿـ ـﻐــﻂ ]‪ [ENTER‬ﺛــﻢ اﺿـ ـﻐــﻂ ]‪ [SETUP] + [SHIFT‬ﻻﻧـﻬــﺎء‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪, REW/ ,‬‬ ‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪, /FF‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة‬

‫ﻫﺬه أداة ﻋﺪ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺎرﺿﺔ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪SHIFT‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CLOCK/TIMER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ”‪.“CLOCK‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺰر‪:‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬ ‫‪PLAY‬‬ ‫‪CLOCK‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬

‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ(‬
‫ً‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮن ‪ 7‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ [f‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ [g‬او ]‪f, 3/FF‬‬
‫‪g, REW/4‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪4‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CLOCK/TIMER‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮد اﻟﻌﺎرﺿﺔ اﻟﻰ اي ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮوض ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [CLOCK/TIMER‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ او اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﳌﺪة ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮاﻧﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫اﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎم ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ دﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ‪DEMO‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﳉﻬﺎز ﻻول ﻣـﺮة‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ان ﻳﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻌـﺮاض وﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫اﳉﻬﺎز ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎن ﺿﺒﻂ اﻻﺳﺘﻌـﺮاض ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻳﻘﺎف ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮض اﻻﺳﺘﻌـﺮاض‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض‪.‬‬

‫اﺿﻐﻂ وﺗﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [–DEMO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ّ‬
‫‪) DEMO OFF‬اﻳﻘﺎف( ↔ ‪) DEMO ON‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪– DEMO‬‬

‫ﳝـﻜـﻨـﻚ ﺧـﻔـﺾ اﺳـﺘـﻬـﻼك اﻟـﻄـﺎﻗــﺔ اﻟ ـﻜ ـﻬــﺮﺑـﺎﺋـﻴـﺔ ﻓــﻲ وﺿـﻊ اﻻﺳـﺘـﻌــﺮاض‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻳﻘﺎف وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫‪59‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(06)new1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 11:39 AM‬‬

 ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ واﻟﺮادﻳﻮ وﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪرة‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة‬
‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪AM‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ داﺧﻠﻲ ﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪FM‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫واﻟﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ وﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫وﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬

‫• اوﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﳒﺎز ﻛﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎري )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ وﺳﺤﺐ ﻃﺮف اﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ أﺳﻼك اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ وﻛﺎﺑﻼت اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ واﻟﺮادﻳﻮ وﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪرة‪/‬وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬اﳊﻠﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪AM ANT‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫أرﻓﻊ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LOOP‬‬
‫‪EXT‬‬
‫اﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‪ ،‬واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ وﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌـﺘـﺮدد‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ ،AC‬اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻔﻠﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺣﻤﺮ )‪(+‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ اﻟﻔﻠﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫اﺳﻮد )‪(-‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ‬

‫اﺳﻮد‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﻚ ﺑﺮاﻏﻲ ﻣـﺴـﻄـﺢ اﻟـﺮأس ﻟـﻀـﺒـﻂ‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ أﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ اﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠـﻔـﻴـﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪.‬‬
‫اوﺻﻞ اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻻﳝﻦ )‪(R‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳌﻮﺿـﻊ اﻟـﺼـﺤـﻴـﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪220-240V‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻻﺻﻖ‬
‫‪FM ANT‬‬
‫‪110-127V‬‬
‫)‪(75Ω‬‬
‫‪VOLT ADJ‬‬

‫)‪(R‬‬ ‫)‪(L‬‬

‫اﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮاءة اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ اﳋﺎص ﺑﺴﻠﻚ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.2‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ 0.9‬واط( ﺣﺘﻰ اذا ﰎ اﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪) [f‬اﳉﻬﺎز اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .([f/I] :‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﺰع ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ‪ AC‬اﳌﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺳﻮف ﲢﺘﺎج اﻟﻰ اﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﳉﻬﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﻟﻰ؛‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة‬
‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻗﺪﳝﺔ وﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻌﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‬
‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل أﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺮارة أو اﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻜﻬﺎ أو ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ دواﺋﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت اﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ أو اﳌﻨﻐﻨﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﺮاﻋﻴﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻗﻄﺎب )‪ +‬و ‪ (-‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫• اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻏﻼﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺸﻮر‪.‬‬

‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻹﺳﺎءة اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت أن ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺮب‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ﻓﻲ وﺣﺪة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﺮر اﳌﻮاد اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ أو اﻧﺪﻻع ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ و‬
‫اﻧﺰع اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﻦ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻮي‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﺰن اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎرد‬
‫وﺟﺎف‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎدة اﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫وﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﲡﺎه ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ إﺷﺎرة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(8‬ﺑﺪون‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ‪ ،‬وﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ أﻗﺼﺎه ‪7‬م ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮًة ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪R6/LR6, AA, UM-3‬‬
‫‪60‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(04_05)new2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:06 PM‬‬

 ‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﺧﺮى ﳝﻜﻨﻪ إﺻﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺄﻋﻄﺎل وﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﳌﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻘﻮط‪ .‬اﺗﺨﺬ‬
‫اﻹﺟﺮاءات اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺳﻘﻮط اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة‬
‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﳉﻬﻴﺮ وﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت أن ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮا ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮن ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﻳﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻮﺑﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎرج‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ آﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• وﺿﻊ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟﺪا ﻣﻦ اﻷرض أو اﳉﺪران أو اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ أن‬ ‫‪d²¹uð dÐuÝ‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺻﻮت ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺪا‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ اﳉﺪران واﻟﻨﻮاﻓﺬ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺳﻤﻴﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 10‬ﱈ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ اﳊﺼﻮل‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‬

‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ إﺗﻼف ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺗﻚ وﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ إذا ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫•‬

‫اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﲟﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮات ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻓﻲ اﳊﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدي ﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎع ﻻﺻﻮات ﻣﻀﻄﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺪر اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﺻﻮت ﺿﺠﻴﺞ )ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﻣﻦ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن او‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ او ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬او اﺷﺎرة ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮّﻟﺪ اﻟﺬﺑﺬﺑﺎت او اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﲡﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ او ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬ ‫‪Æ UŽULK WOUô« WJ³A« Ÿe½ pMJ1ô‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫إذا ﻇﻬﺮت أﻟﻮان ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫• إﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬه اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﳌﻨﺼﻮح ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ذﻟﻚ إﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ اﳌﻀﺨﻤﺔ و‪/‬أو اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬وأﻳﻀﺎً ﻗﺪ‬
‫وﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻀﻄﺮب اﻟﺼﻮرة ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎت وﺑﻀﻊ اﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬إﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻔﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ إذا‬
‫إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﳌﺪة ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪث ﺗﻠﻒ أو اذا ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﺮاً ﻓﺠﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ اﻷداء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﺪران أو اﻟﺴﻘﻮف‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻘﻮم وﻇﻴﻔﺔ إزاﻟﺔ اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﳋﻄﻮة‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻨﺴﺎخ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺄﻃﺮاف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ّ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO IN‬‬ ‫اوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬وراﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫اﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪VIDEO IN‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫‪ 7‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO IN‬‬

‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪VIDEO COMPONENT‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO IN‬‬

‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪VIDEO COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪OUT VIDEO OUT‬‬ ‫‪OUT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪PB‬‬ ‫‪PB‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪PB‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪PR‬‬ ‫‪PR‬‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪PR‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬ ‫‪S VIDEO‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪OUT‬‬ ‫‪OUT‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬

‫اﻃﺮاف ﺧﺮج ‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬

‫‪ 7‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺠﻬّﺰ ﺑﻄﺮف ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪S VIDEO IN‬‬
‫ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻻﻃﺮاف اﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺮج اﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ او اﳌﺘﻘﺪم‬
‫اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ ﺻﻮرة اوﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮف اﳋﺮج ‪ .S VIDEO OUT‬اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫اﳉﻬﺔ اﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪VIDEO COMPONENT‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬه اﻻﻃﺮاف ﻳﺨﺮج اﺷﺎرات ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ اﻻﻟﻮان )‪ (PB/PR‬واﺷﺎرة‬ ‫‪OUT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫‪PB‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻻﺿﺎءة )‪ (Y‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ دﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻋﺎدة ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪S-VIDEO‬‬
‫اﻻﻟﻮان‪.‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪PR‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬

‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ وﺻﻒ اﻃﺮاف دﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﻧﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن او اﳌﺮﻗﺎب‬

‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎل‪ .(Y/CB/CR ،Y/B-Y/R-Y ،Y/PB/PR ،‬اوﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻻﻃﺮاف اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻠﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف اﳋﺮج ‪S VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺪرﻳﺠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﻃﺮف اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﻨﻔﺼﻞ ‪ S VIDEO‬ﺻﻮر اﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮف‬
‫اوﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻃﺮاف دﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻮﻧﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﻟﻌﺎدي ‪ VIDEO OUT‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻔﺼﻞ إﺷﺎرات‬
‫اﻟـﻮﺿـﻊ اﳌـﺘـﻘـﺪم ‪) 480p‬او ‪ (525p‬او ‪) 576p‬او ‪) .(625p‬ﺳـﻮف ﻟـﻦ ﻳـﺘـﻢ‬ ‫اﻷﻟﻮان )‪ (C‬ﻋﻦ إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻀﻮء )‪) .(Y‬اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺼﻮرة ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ اذا اوﺻﻠﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪(.‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪61‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(04_05)new2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 5:06 PM‬‬

 ‫ﺟﺪول اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ ‫إﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬

‫اﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻦ ﺿﻮء اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬وﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫إﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪3 .....................................................................‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت ‪3 ...................................................................................‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 1‬اﳌﻮﺿﻊ ‪4 ..............................................................‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪4 ...............................................‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ واﻟﺮادﻳﻮ وﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﺰود ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪرة ‪5 .....‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 4‬وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪5 ...........................................‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪6 ..................................................... QUICK SETUP 5‬‬
‫اﳋﻄﻮة ‪ 6‬ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪6 .......................................................‬‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ‪6 ...................................................... DEMO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪7 ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪8 ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت‬
‫اﳋﺎﻃـﺌـﺔ وﺗﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ اﻟـﺘـﺴـﺒـﺐ ﻓـﻲ وﻗـﻮع ﺣـﺮﻳﻖ أو ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛـﻬـﺮﺑﺎﺋـﻴـﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪10 .................................................‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ‪12 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ /‬ﻋﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪/ (QUICK OSD‬‬
‫إﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪ /‬اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت ‪ /‬ﺟﺪول اﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺷﺪﻳﺪ اﳊﺮارة أو اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ أو ﻣﻌّﺮﺿﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰازات‪ .‬ﻫﺬه اﻟﻌﻮاﻣﻞ ﳝﻜﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫إﺗﻼف اﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ وﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت اﳉﻬﺎز اﻷﺧﺮى وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ ﻣﻮاد ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أﻳﻀـﺎً‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻔﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ أن ﻳﺆدي اﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺰاﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر وﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ وﻗﻮع ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗـﺴـﺘـﺨـﺪم ﻣـﺼـﺪر ﻃـﺎﻗـﺔ اﻟـﺘـﻴـﺎر اﳌـﺒـﺎﺷــﺮ ‪ .DC‬اﻓـﺤـﺺ ﻣـﺼـﺪر اﻟـﻄـﺎﻗـﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬـﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻋـﻨـﺪ ﺿـﺒـﻂ اﻟـﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻔﻴﻨﺔ او ﻣﻜﺎن ﻳﺴـﺘـﺨـﺪم ﻓـﻴـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪر ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ DC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻻﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻠﻒ وﺻﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﻟﻰ ﺳﺤﺐ أو ﺛﻨﻲ أو وﺿﻊ ﻣﻮاد ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰع اﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‪ ،‬اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد أن ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ وﻗﻮع ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﳌﺮاد ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )‪/ (ADVANCED DISC REVIEW‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﲟﺴﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻋﻨـﺪﻣـﺎ ﺗـﻜـﻮن ﻳـﺪاك ﻣـﺒـﺘـﻠـﺔ‪ .‬ﻓـﺈن ذﻟـﻚ ﻳـﺘـﺴـﺒـﺐ ﻓـﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ / (CD MODE) CD‬اﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫وﻗﻮع ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ أﺑﻌﺎد اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ /‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ ودوران اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ /‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﳌﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴـﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﻤـﻮاد اﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴـﻘـﻮط داﺧﻞ اﻟـﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴـﺒـﺐ ذﻟـﻚ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺘﻜﺮر‬
‫ﻓﻲ وﻗﻮع ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ أو ﺗﻌﻄﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻹﺳﺘﻄﻼع ‪14 .....................................‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴـﻤـﺢ ﻟـﻠـﺴـﻮاﺋﻞ ﺑـﺎﻻﻧـﺴـﻜـﺎب داﺧـﻞ اﻟـﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﺣﺘـﻰ ﻻ ﻳـﺘـﺴـﺒـﺐ ذﻟـﻚ ﻓـﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ /‬اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺴﺎر اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫وﻗﻮع ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ أو ﺗﻌﻄﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ﻫﺬا‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ / CD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪/ HighMATTM‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮزع ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ﻓﻮرا واﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮض اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪RAM‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗـﻌـﻤـﺪ اﻟـﻰ رش ﻣـﺒـﻴـﺪات اﳊـﺸــﺮات ﻋـﻠـﻰ أو داﺧـﻞ اﻟــﻮﺣـﺪة‪ ،‬ﲟـﺎ أن ﻫـﺬه‬
‫اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ‪16 ....................................‬‬
‫اﳌﺒﻴﺪات ﺗﺘـﻀـﻤـﻦ ﻋـﻠـﻰ ﻏـﺎزات ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ اﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎل‪ ،‬ﻓﻘـﺪ ﺗـﻠـﺘـﻬـﺐ إذا ﺗـﺴـﺮﺑـﺖ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض اﳌﺒﺮﻣﺞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 32‬ﺑﻨﺪ( ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ‪/‬اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪاﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺸﻮاﺋﻲ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت ‪ALL-DISC‬‬
‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪17 ...........................‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪Other Settings /‬‬
‫اﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫اﳌﺸﻐﻞ ‪18 .............................................‬‬
‫ّ‬ ‫اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻮﻃﺎت‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ اﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﻘﻄّﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت أو‬
‫أﺧﻔﻘﺖ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺆﺷﺮات أو ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪ دﺧﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة أو وﻗﻮع أي ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛـﻮرة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋـﻠـﻰ اﻟـﻔـﻮر ﺑـﻔـﺼـﻞ اﻟـﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼـﺪر اﻟـﺘـﻴـﺎر‬
‫اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ‪20 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮزع ﻟﺪﻳﻚ أو وﻛﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠـﻮﺣﺪة أن‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫اﳌﺘﺮدد واﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗـﺮب‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ‪ /‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‬ ‫ً‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ اﻟﻴﺪوي‪/‬اﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ اﳌﻀﺒﻮط‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﻄﻞ أو ﺗﻘﻊ ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ إذا ﰎ ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺢ أو ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ أو ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ أﺷﺨﺎص ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻫﻠﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﻻﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪر اﻟﺘﻴﺎر إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮي ﻋﺪم‬
‫أﺷﺮﻃﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺘﺎت ‪21 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮة ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ‬ ‫اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت‬

‫اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ ‪22 .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﺼﺪى ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ اداء ﻏﻨﺎءك ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺮاوﻛﻪ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ وﲤﻴﻴﺰ اﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎت اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻚ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺧﺮى‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت وﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ‪23 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻄﻮر‪ /‬اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﺼﻮت اﻻﺻﻠﻲ اﳌﺘﻌﺪد _‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺻﻮت اﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬ ‫واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ واﻟﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ اﻛﺜﺮ ‪ /‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﲟﺠﺎل اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ /‬إﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫وﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ وﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق‬
‫اﳌﻌﺎدل اﻟﻴﺪوي )‪ / (MANUAL EQ‬إﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻌﺎدل اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫آﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﺆﻗﺖ ‪24 .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ اﻟﻨﻮم‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ AM‬اﳊﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻻﺧﺮى ‪25 ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ /‬وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻌﺮض ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة أﺧﺮى ‪25 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ‪ /‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺮأس ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ووﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼت اﻟﻬﻮاﺋﻲ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎري ‪ /‬اﳋﺮج اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ /‬اﳌﺴﺮح اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻲ _‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻫﻮاﺋﻲ اﳌﻮﺟﺔ ‪ FM‬اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺼﻮت اﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﻮة‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

‫)‪(N2QAJB000138‬‬
‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮح اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎت ‪.....................................................................‬‬
‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮي اﻷﻋﻄﺎل ‪...................................................................‬‬ ‫دﻟﻴﻞ ّ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎرﻳﺔ ﻋﺪد ‪ 2‬ﳌﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪31‬‬ ‫اﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪/‬اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪........................................‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ‪..................................................................................‬‬

‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﻳـﺴـﺘـﻌـﻤـﻞ ﺳـﻠـﻚ ﺗــﺰوﻳـﺪ ﻃـﺎﻗـﺔ اﻟـﺘـﻴـﺎر اﳌـﺘـﺮدد ‪ AC‬ﻓـﻘـﻂ ﻣـﻊ ﻫـﺬه اﻟــﻮﺣـﺪة‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺟﻬﺰة اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(02_03)new3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2/2/05, 12:59 PM‬‬

 ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ!‬ ‫زﺑﻮﻧﻨﺎ اﻟﻌﺰﻳﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز أﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﻠﻴﺰر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺮا ﻟﺸﺮاﺋﻚ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫إﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ أو اﻟﻀﺒﻂ أو اﻷداء ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻗﺼﻰ درﺟﺎت اﻷداء واﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮاءة ﻫﺬه‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪد ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﺮض اﳋﻄﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إﻟﻰ اﻷﺷﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ اﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ وﻻ ﲢﺎول إﺻﻼح اﳋﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬راﺟﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫‪SC-VK62D‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻨﻴﲔ اﳌﺆﻫﻠﲔ ﻷداء أﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪SA-VK62D‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪SB-VK62‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ اﻧﺪﻻع اﻟﻨﻴﺮان أو اﻟﺼﻌﻘﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫أو اﺧﺘﻼل اﳉﻬﺎز‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮض ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ أو‬
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬اﻟﺮﺳﻮم اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ إرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ أو اﻟﻘﻄﺮ أو اﻻرﺗﺸﺎق وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﺪم وﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬه ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮدﻳﻞ ﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫أﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻮءة ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺰﻫﺮﻳﺎت ﻓﻮق اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫• إن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﰎ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ!‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﻮﺟﻪ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ رﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬وﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﺼﺐ وﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز ﻓﻲ ﺧﺰاﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺐ أو‬ ‫إﳒﺎز ﻫﺬه اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻼت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎت اﳌﺒﻴﺘﺔ أو ﻓﻲ اﳊﻴﻮز اﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ اﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎت‪.‬‬
‫وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﻤﺎن ﻇﺮوف ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪة‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم‬
‫ﻋﺮﻗﻠﺔ اﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ أو أي ﻣﻮاد أﺧﺮى ﻟﻀﺮوف اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ‬
‫وﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ اﻟﺼﻌﻘﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ أو اﳊﺮاﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮص ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﺮط اﻹﺣﻤﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﻒ وأﻏﻄﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﳌﺎﺋﺪة واﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ واﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﳌﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أزل ﻏﻄﺎء اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻠﻬﺐ اﳌﻜﺸﻮف‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮع اﳌﻀﺎءة‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺒﺪال اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺪﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻼف ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد )ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ A‬وﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .( B‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﻮﺿﻊ اﳉﻬﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫وإﺗﺒﻊ اﻹرﺷﺎدات أدﻧﺎه‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﺘﺮدد‪ ،‬وﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ أن ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪. .1‬اﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﻚ اﳌﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ اﻟﻠﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺎﲡﺎ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﶈﻤﻮل أﺛﻨﺎء‬

‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬا اﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺪاﺧﻼً‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪A‬‬
‫اﺿﺤﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﺮﺟﺎء زﻳﺎدة اﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ً‬ ‫اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ و‬
‫ﺑﲔ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ واﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﶈﻤﻮل‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻌﺪة ﻣﻦ أﺟﻞ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻓﻲ اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ ذات اﳌﻨﺎخ اﳌﺪاري‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ واﻟﻜﻮﻳﺖ وﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺪ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﺘﺮدد ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف اﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﻬﺪ اﳌﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل‪.‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ B‬ﻏﻄﺎء اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة‬

‫)داﺧﻞ اﳌﻨﺘﺞ(‬
‫أرﺑﻂ‪ÆUNzUDž‬‬
‫‪ÆUNzUDž‬‬ ‫‪ ‚Už≈Ë‬أو‬
‫√‪Xý Ë‬‬ ‫‪ …dONB« ‰b³²Ý≈ .2‬وإﻏﻠﻖ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪A‬‬

‫اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة )‪ 5‬اﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬

‫اﻟﺼﻬﻴﺮة )‪ 5‬اﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪63‬‬

‫‪RQT8092_Ar(02_03)new2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 10:16 AM‬‬

 Memo
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

RQT8092

33
64

Per(30-33) 33 2/2/05, 5:54 PM

 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى‬

(‫ ﺻﺪاﻫﺎى ﺧﺸﻚ )دك ﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺮاى ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬ .‫ﺑﺮاى ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه از ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻤﺎل ﻧﺮم و ﺧﺸﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« Êœd eO9 È«dÐ s¹eMÐ U¹ @½— dMOð ¨qJ« “« X1uâO¼ •
eO9 ÈU¼—«u½ “« ÆbOM eO9 v¼UÖ bMÇ “« d¼ ôUÐ XOHO UÐ gHÄ Ë j³{ È«dÐ «— U¼b¼ ÆbO½«uHÐ «— UN½¬ Á«dL¼ ÈULM¼«— v¹UOLOý œ«u tÐ t²Až¬ ÈU¼ tÇ—UÄ “« ÁœUH²Ý« “« q³1 •
Æ©XO½ qUý® bOM ÁœUH²Ý« ÁbMM

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى‬

RQT8092

32
65

Per(30-33) 32 2/1/05, 12:18 PM

 ‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ‬/‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى از دﻳﺴﻚ‬

ÆbM qJA œU−¹« XÝ« sJ2 d¹“ œ—«u ÊœdJ½ X¹UŽ—

‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻗﺮار دادن دﻳﺴﻚ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎز و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎه دﻳﺴﻚ‬

‫آﻧﺮا ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

.‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ [OPEN/ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دﻛﻤﻪ‬

‫ ﺳﻴﻨﻰ را ﺑﺎز و ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬CLOSE c]
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
OPEN/CLOSE

‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻰ ﻣﺘﺮ‬12 ‫ ﺳ ﺎ ﻧﺘ ﻰ ﻣ ﺘﺮ‬8

XXXXXXX XXX XXXXXX

XXXXX XX XXXX

XXXX XXX
XXXX

XXXXX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XXXX

XXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXX
XXXX XXXX XXX
XXXX

‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﻴﺮون‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﺎ‬

XXXXXXX XXX XXXXXX
.‫ﻧﻜﺸﻴﻨﺪ‬ .‫دﺳﺖ ﻫﻞ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
XXXXX XX XXXX
XX XXX
XX X

X X XX

XXXXX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XXXX

XX

XX X
X

XXXXX XXXX XXXX

XX

XXXXX XXXX XXXX

X
XX XXX
XX X
XX
X

ÆbOM È—«cÖUł ôUÐ qJý —œ Ábý Áœ«œ ÊUA½ q× —œ XÝ—œ «— p¹œ •
ÆbO¼œ —«d1 vMOÝ —œ «— p¹œ p¹ jI' •
ÆbO¼œ —«d1 býUÐ ôUРʬ „—U t v'dÞ “« «— p¹œ •
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ‬/‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى از دﻳﺴﻚ‬

RQT8092

31
66

Per(30-33) 31 2/1/05, 12:18 PM

 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻰ‬

‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ‬

NTSC vÝ ”« vð Ê« ¨PAL525/60 ‰UÄ ¨PAL625/50 ‰UÄ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬10% :‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮ دو ﻛﺎﻧﺎل‬RMS ‫ﻧﻴﺮوى ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬ ©r¼« 4® d¼ È«dÐ  «Ë 110 ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﺟﻠﻮ‬1
©r¼« 75® 1 Vp-p ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬  «Ë 220 ‫ داﻟﺒﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬RMS ‫ﻧﻴﺮوى ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
 «Ë 2400 PMPO ‫ﻧﻴﺮوى ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
©r²OÝ 1® vMOÄ gO' ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
S-Video ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎ‬،FM/AM ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺟﻴﺎب‬
©r¼« 75® 1 Vp-p Y ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
©PAL ‰UÄ® ©r¼« 75® 0.3 Vp-p C ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬ ÁU~²¹« 15 FM ‫اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎى ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه‬
©NTSC vÝ ”« vð Ê«® ©r¼« 75® 0.286 Vp-p ÁU~²¹« 15 AM
(FM) ‫ﻣﺪول ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻰ‬
©r²OÝ 1® S ‰UMOdð ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬ ©eðd¼uKO 50 ÈU¼ ÂUÖ® eðd¼U~ 108.00 – 87.50 ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬ ©IHF) XËdJO µ 2.5 ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
©r¼« 75® 1 Vp-p Y ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬ XËËdJO µ 2.2 ‫ دﺳﻰ ﺑﻞ‬26 S/N
©r¼« 75® 0.7 Vp-p PB ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬ ©Ê“«u²U½® r¼« 75 ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎى آﻧﱳ‬
(AM) ‫ﻣﺪول آﻣﭙﻠﻰ ﺗﻴﻮد‬
©r¼« 75® 0.7 Vp-p PR ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
©eðd¼uKO 9 ÈU¼ ÂUÖ® eðd¼U~ 1629 – 522 ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
©r²OÝ 1® ©ed1 ∫PR vЬ ∫PB e³Ý ∫Y® vMOÄ gO' ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬ ©eðd¼uKO 10 ÈU¼ ÂUÖ® eðd¼U~ 1630 – 520
d² dÐ XËdJO µ 560 ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬1000 ‫ دﺳﻰ ﺑﻞ در‬20 S/N ‫ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬AM
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ (‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪا )آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎر‬
©”UÐ ”UJF½«® v¹uÖbMKÐ 3 ¨t¼«— 3 r²OÝ ‫ﻧﻮع‬ ‫اﻣﭙﺪاﻧﺲ ورودى‬/‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ورودى‬
r¼« 4 f½«bá« ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه )ﻫﺎى( ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ r¼«uKO 12 ¨XË vKO 250 AUX
vÞËdH Ÿu½ Èd²LO²½UÝ 16 ‫ ووﻓﺮ‬.1 ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ ﺻﺪاى دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
vÞËdH Ÿu½ Èd²LO²½UÝ 6 ‫ ﺗﻮﻳﺘﺮ‬.2 —u½ ‰UMOdð ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل ﻧﻮرى‬
ËeOÄ Ÿu½ ‫ ﺳﻮﭘﺮ ﺗﻮوﻳﺘﺮ‬.3 ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻰ‬
©d¦«bŠ®  «Ë 110 (IEC) ‫ﺗﻮان ورودى‬ u¹d²Ý« Èd² vKO 3.5 gO' ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬
©d²1.0®  «Ë dÐ qÐ vÝœ 84 ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪاى ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻦ‬
eðd¼uKO 5¨ eðd¼uKO 10 ‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ r¼« 600 ¨XË vKO 0.7 ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
©qÐ vÝœ 16≠®eðd¼uKO 21 ≠eðd¼ 39 ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬ ©r²OÝ 2® Èd² vKO 6.3 ‰UBð« t¹UÄ ¨u½u ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل‬
©qÐ vÝœ 10≠®eðd¼uKO 20 ≠eðd¼ 52
d² vKO 227 x 344 x 234 (‫اﺑﻌﺎد )ﻋﻤﻖ × ارﺗﻔﺎع × ﻋﺮض‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ دك ﻧﻮارﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
ÂdÖuKO 3.3 ‫ﺟﺮم‬ —Uœuš v²AÖdÐ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
‰U½U 2 ¨tFD1 –4 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮوى ﺑﺮق‬ ©ÂdÄ®s¼¬ Ë qJO½ ˛UO¬ UÐ b¼ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬/‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
eðd¼ 50Ø60 ¨XË 240–220 »ËUM² ‚dÐ ‫ﺑﺮاى آﺳﻴﺎى ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ و آﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎى ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻰ‬ v²¹d' t³ Ëœ b¼ ‫ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
eðd¼ 50/60 ¨XË 240–220ØXË 127–110 »ËUM² ‚dÐ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ —uðuËËdÝ DC ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
XË 193 ‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮق‬ t'dDJ¹ 100 eðd¼uKO AC ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
d² vKO 250 x 364 x 330 (‫اﺑﻌﺎد )ﻋﻤﻖ × ارﺗﻔﺎع × ﻋﺮض‬ ÁbMM „UÄ 100 eðd¼ AC ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
ÂdÖuKO 8 ‫ﺟﺮم‬ tO½UŁ dÐ d²LO²½UÝ 4.8 ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮار‬
œ«d~O²½UÝ +5oC Uð +35oC ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬ (+3, –6 ‫ در‬DECK OUT) ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﻞ‬
©XÐuÞ— Êbý lLł ÊËbЮ RH 90% Uð 5% ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده رﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬ eðd¼ uKO 14 ≠eðd¼ 35 NORMAL
©Ábý Ê“Ë® qÐ vÝœ 50 ‫ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬S/N
(WRMS) 0.18% ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات و ﻟﺮزش‬
©U³¹dIð®  «Ë 0.9 ‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮق در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻰ‬
tO½UŁ 120 U³¹
Î dIð C-60 XÝU ÈU¼—«u½ UÐ ‫زﻣﺎن ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺮدن و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮدن ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
ÆbMM dOOGð ŸöÞ« ÊËbÐ XÝ« sJ2 vM'  UBHA Æ1 (‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬12 ‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ‬8) ‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎى ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
ÆbM²¼ v³¹dIð œUFЫ Ë Âdł ©Èd¹uBð DVD® DVD ©1®
Æœuý v ÈdOÖ Á“«b½« vU²O−¹œ nOÞ dÖ qOK% jÝuð pO½u—U¼ ·«d×½« Ê«eO Æ2 © 5 ¨ 4JPEG ¨DVD-VR® DVD-RAM ©2®
©vðu? DVD® DVD-R/RW ©3®
©vðu?® +R/RW
¨ 1SVCD ¨Èd¹uBð CD ¨CD-DA¤ CD-R/RW ¨CD ©4®
5¨ 4
¨ JPEG ¨ 5 ¨ 3WMA ¨ 5 ¨ 2MP3
›©Èd¹uBð Ë vðu?® 2 `DÝ HighMAT
1
IEC62107 UÐ oÐUD
2
320kbps Ë 32kbps sOÐ ∫—UÖ“UÝ Êbý ÁœdA' XŽdÝ
3
320kbps Ë 48kbps sOÐ ∫—UÖ“UÝ Êbý ÁœdA' XŽdÝ
4
2.1 tH½ Exif UÐ JPEG ”UÝ« dÐ ÈUNK¹U'
qJOÄ 6144 x 4096 Ë 320 x 240 sOÐ ∫ d¹uBð Õu{Ë
©bMýUÐ v 4:2:0 U¹ 4:2:2 vŽd' ÈU¼ t½u/®
5
hOHAð ÈU¼ ÁËdÖ Ë rKO' Ë Èd¹uBð ¨vðu? œ—«u q œ«bFð d¦«bŠ
ÆÁËdÖ 400 Ë rKO' Ë Èd¹uBð ¨vðu? œ—«u 4000 ∫Ábý Áœ«œ
‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺖ‬
‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﻮج‬
d²u½U½ 785 CD
d²u½U½ 662 DVD
(‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ ﺻﺪا )دﻳﺴﻚ‬
©u¹d²Ý«® ‰U½U 2¨ (FR ¨FL) ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﺎﻧﺎل‬
RQT8092

30
67

Per(30-33) 30 2/3/05, 1:20 PM

 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎدى ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬
_ ÆXÝ« ÈœUŽ SEARCH u−².ł ‰öš —œ  «dOOGð všdÐ • .‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ واﺿﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
4 Æu¹b¹Ë ÁU~²Ýœ p¹ o¹dÞ “« t½ Ábý q)Ë Êu¹e¹uKð tÐ ÎULOI². ÁU~²Ýœ t b¹uý s¾LD •
19 ÆbO¼œ dOOGð “Video” XL.V —œ «— “TV Aspect” • ‫اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
13 bO¼œ dOOGð «— ÂË“  ULOEMð • .‫ﻧﺪارد‬
_ ÆbMM v ÁœUH²Ý« vðËUH² v¹uzb¹Ë ÈUNL².OÝ “« Êu¹e¹uKð Ë ÁU~²Ýœ • ‫ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﻄﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
Æœuý v ÁœUH²Ý« NTSC U¹ t½UÖbMÇ r².OÝ UÐ ÈUN½u¹e¹uKð “« vVdý »uMł ÈUOݬ —œ .‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ رﻧﮕﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ دار ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

Æœuý v ÁœUH²Ý« PAL U¹ t½UÖbMÇ r².OÝ UÐ ÈUN½u¹e¹uKð “« oÞUM d¹UÝ —œ

Æœ—«b½ v½«u3L¼ ULý Êu¹e¹uKð UÐ p.¹œ ÈË— Ábý ÁœUH²Ý« r².OÝ •
Æb½uý Áœ«œ g¹U/ NTSC Êu¹e¹uKð ÈË— v×O×) —uDÐ bM½«uð v/ PAL ÈUNJ.¹œ fl
_
b¼œ dOOGð PAL 60 tÐ «— NTSC ÈUN7UM~OÝ PAL Êu¹e¹uKð “« UýU9 È«dÐ b½«uð v ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« fl
19 ©.“Video” XL.V —œ “NTSC Disc Video”®
13 ÆbO¼œ dOOGðÆ“x1.00” tÐ «— ÂË“ X³.½ • .‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻰ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﳕﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
17 ÆbO¼œ —«dV “0” ÈË— «— Display Menu —œ Subtitle Position XOF{Ë •
_ ÆbO¹U/ ‰UF,dOž «— Êu¹e¹uKð ÂË“ œdJKLŽ • .‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد زوم ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﳕﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
13 ÆbO¹U/ rOEMð «d½¬ v²Ýœ o¹dÞ “« U¹ bOM ÁœUH²Ý« Èd¼Uþ ÈUN²³.½ d¹UÝ “« •
_ ÆbMJ½ qLŽ p.¹œ Ÿu½ tÐ t².Ð XÝ« sJ2 U¹ Ë ¨bMJ½ qLŽ v²Ý—bÐ XÝ« sJ2 p¹—Uð ÈU¼ tM×) È«dÐ U)uBš ÂË“ œdJKLŽ •
_ Æb½uý ‰ö²š« YŽUÐ bM½«uð v Á«dL¼ ÈUNMHKð ÈU¼—˛—Uý • ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺤﻮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
_ ÆbOM ÷uŽ v¹«u¼ vM²½¬ UÐ «d½¬ bOM v ÁœUH²Ý« vKš«œ vM²½¬ “« dÖ« • .‫راه راه در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
_ ÆbOM —Ëœ ÁU~²Ýœ “« «— Êu¹e¹uKð 7½¬ rOÝ ÆXÝ« t²,dÖ —«dV ÁU~²Ýœ tÐ p¹œe½ —UO.Ð Êu¹e¹uKð 7½¬ rOÝ •
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺮوﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮ‬
17 fO7d²M¹« vłËdš “« dÖ« v7Ë ¨b¼œ v ÈË— XÝ« Ábý ÁœUH²Ý« Èd¹uBð DVD g¹«d¹Ë È«dÐ t výË— Ÿu½ XKFÐ tK¾. s¹« • ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ ﭘﺮوﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
ÈË— «— “Video Output Mode” XOF{Ë b¹UÐ Picture Menu —œ Æœuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ XÝ—œ v².¹UÐ bO¹U/ ÁœUH²Ý« .‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ دار ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
ÆbO¼œ —«dV “©625i U¹® 576i” U¹ “©525i U¹® 480i”
11, 17 480p” XOF{Ë U¹ Æœuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ “PRG” Uð bO¼œ —UA, «— vK)« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— [PROGRESSIVE]+[SHIFT] tLœ • ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ ﭘﺮوﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
ÆbOM »U3²½« d¹uBð ÈuM —œ “Video Output Mode” —œ «— ©625p U¹® 576p” U¹ “©525p U¹®
4
¨œuÐ b¼«uš vłËdš fO7d²M¹« ¨XÝ« qB² Êu¹e¹uKð tÐ S VIDEO OUT U¹ VIDEO OUT ‰UMOdð o¹dÞ “« ÁU~²Ýœ dÖ« •
Æœuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ “PRG” dÖ« v²Š
‫ﮔﻮش دادن ﺑﻪ رادﻳﻮ‬
_ ÆbOM rOEMð «— AM U¹ FM ÈU¼ 7½¬ XOFVu • .‫ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
26 ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« vł—Uš 7½¬ p¹ “« • ‫“ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮر ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ST” ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺻﺪا داراى اﺧﺘﻼل ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
_ ÆbOM «bł ÁU~²Ýœ “« «— ʬ U¹ bOM ‘uUš «— Êu¹e¹uKð • .‫ﺻﺪاى ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﻣﻰ رﺳﺪ‬
_ ÆbOM «bł U¼ rOÝ Ë U¼ qÐU d¹UÝ “« «— 7½¬ • AM ‫ﺻﺪاى وزوز ﺿﻌﻴﻔﻰ در ﺧﻼل درﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
6 ÆbOM ‘uUš «— uœ œdJKLŽ • ‫ اﻳﻦ‬،‫ﺑﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه درﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﺳﺖ‬
6 Æbý b¼«uš ‘uUš —Uœuš —uDÐ uœ œdJKLŽ ¨bOýUÐ Áœd rOEMð «— XŽUÝ dÖ« • ‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ روﺷﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه و ﺑﻄﻮر ﻣﺪاوم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻰ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
25 ÆbO¼œ —UA, «— [DIMMER]+[SHIFT] t×H) Êœd sýË— È«dÐ • .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎرﻳﻚ اﺳﺖ‬
7 ÆbOM œ—«Ë «— bM g3Ä b½«u²Ð t vJ.¹œ ∫b¹« Áœd œ—«Ë bM g3Ä b½«uð v/ ÁU~²Ýœ t «— vJ.¹œ • “NO PLAY”
_ Æb¹« Áœd œ—«Ë «— v7Uš vJ.¹œ •
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‬

_ Æb¹—«c~Ð p.¹œ p¹ ∫b¹« t²ý«c~½ ÁU~²Ýœ —œ vJ.¹œ • “NO DISC”

31 ÆbOM œ—«Ë XÝ—œ «— ʬ ∫b¹« t²ý«c~½ ÁU~²Ýœ —œ v²Ý—œ tÐ «— p.¹œ •
5 ÆbOM Õö)« Ë pÇ «— U¼uÖbMKÐ ‰UBð« ÈU¼ rOÝ • “F61”
ÆbOM  —uA ÁbMýËd, UÐ Æœ—«œ œułË ‚dÐ qJA bA½ qJA l,— YŽUÐ —U s¹« dÖ«
7 ÆbOM eO9 ‰UL²Ýœ UÐ «— ʬ ÆXÝ« nO¦ p.¹œ • “DVD U11”
_ ÆbOM ÊUײ« Á—UÐËœ Ë bO½«u3Ð «— ULM¼«— ÆXÝ« Ábý «dł« v²Ý—œU½  UOKLŽ • “ERROR”
_ Ë Áœd ‘uUš «— ÁU~²Ýœ Æœ—«œ v~².Ð ÁU~²Ýœ XOF{Ë tÐ b¹¬ v “H” —UM —œ tJ¹« Á—ULý Æœuý œU−¹« v7ö²š« XÝ« sJ2 • “DVD HMM”
ÆbOM q)Ë «d½¬ «œb− Ë bOAJÐ «— AC ‚dÐ rOÝ ÁU~²Ýœ Êœd ‘uUš “« bFÐ ÆbOM sýË— «d½¬ «œb− ÆXÝ« œbŽ p¹ ÈUł MM
_ Æb¹dO~Ð ”U9 »d− —UdOLFð p¹ UÐ Ë Áœd Xý«œœU¹ «— UN½¬ b½bA½ „UÄ f¹ËdÝ ÈU¼ Á—ULý dÖ« •
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬
_ býUÐ ÁU~²Ýœ UÐ tÐUA È« tIDM Á—ULý È«—«œ U¹ tÐUA ʬ È« tIDM Á—ULý t bOM g3Ä bO½«uð v «— v¹d¹uBð DVD jI, • “This disc may not be played in
ÆbO¹U/ pÇ ÁU~²Ýœ q½UÄ XAÄ —œ «— È« tIDM Á—ULý ÆbýUÐ “ALL” XöŽ È«—«œ t v¹d¹uBð DVD U¹ your region”
19 Æb?O?M »U3²½« “Display” XL.V —œ «— “On-Screen Messages” —œ “On” X?7UŠ • .‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
_ ÆbýUÐ v ŸuM2 p.¹œ U¹ ÁU~²Ýœ jÝuð œdJKLŽ • “ ”
_ Æb?O?M v ‘öð r².OÝ UÐ —UÖ“UÝU½ d¹ËUBð g¹U/ È«dÐ • “Cannot display group xx,
content xx”
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﺎﺳﺖ دك‬
31 ÆbOM eO9 «— U¼b¼ • .‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪا ﭘﺎﻳﲔ اﺳﺖ‬
21 ÆbO½UýuáÐ V.Ç —«u½ UÐ «— UN½¬ ¨bMýUÐ Ábý t².Jý k,U× ÈU¼ Ábz«“ dÖ« • .‫ﺿﺒﻂ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﳕﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

(‫رى ﺳﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اوﻟﻴﻪ درآوردن‬

∫bO¹U/ tFł«d tE,UŠ Êœd XÝ È— È«dÐ d¹“ ÈUNKLF7«—u²Ýœ tÐ ¨b¼œ v Œ— d¹“ ÈUN²7UŠ tJOU~M¼
Æb¼œ v/ Œ— vKLF7« fJŽ t½u~âO¼ b½uý v Áœ«œ —UA, U¼ tLœ tJOU~M¼ •
ÆbO¹U/ XÝ È— «d½¬ Ë Áœd „UÄ «— tE,UŠ  U¹u²× bO¼«uš v ULý •
‫ﺑﺮاى رى ﺳﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
(.‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬2 ‫ )ﻗﺒﻞ از رﻓﱳ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬.‫ را از ﺑﺮق ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬AC ‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬.1
RQT8092
.‫ ﻣﺠﺪدا ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق را وﺻﻞ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬،‫[ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ‬f/7] ‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ‬.2
Æœuý v d¼Uþ g¹U/ t×H) ÈË— “ ≠ ≠ ≠ ≠ ≠ ≠ ≠ ≠ ≠” XöŽ
29 .‫[ را رﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬f/7] ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ‬.3
Æb½œdÖ vdÐ È« t½Uš—U tO7Ë« X7UŠ tÐ  ULOEMð vU9
68
ÆbO¹U/ rOEMð «œb− «— tE,UŠ ÈU¼ tM¹eÖ v².¹UÐ ULý

Per(28-29) 29 2/2/05, 6:01 PM

 ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‬
È«dÐ ÁU~²Ýœ ÁbMýËd UÐ œdJ½ qŠ «— ULý qJA d¹“ ‰Ëbł —œ ×bM ÈUNKŠ Á«— U¹ Ë b¹œu³½ s¾LD œ—«u vCFÐ —œ dÖ« ÆbOM pÇ «— d¹“ œ—«u dOLFð È«dÐ ÁU~²Ýœ ÊœU²Ýd “« q³
ÆbOM  —uA v¹ULM¼«— 7dÖ
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮق‬
5 ÆbOM q7Ë ◊UO²Š« UÐ «— r²6OÝ qÐU Ë AC ‚dÐ rOÝ • .‫ﺑﺮق در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
24, 25 ÆXÝ« t²dÖ —«d —UE²½« X>UŠ ÈË— —U œuš výuUš œdJKLŽ U¹ výuUš d1Uð œdJKLŽ UÐ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« • .‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر ﻣﻰ رود‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺑﺪون ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻳﺎﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا‬
7, 15 ÆbýUÐ v/ XÝ« Ábý Á—Uý« UN½¬ tÐ tÇd²œ s¹« —œ t t⽬ “« dOž ÈU¼ p6¹œ gHÄ tÐ —œU ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« • ‫وﻗﺘﻰ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
_ ÆbýUÐ ŸuM2 p6¹œ jÝuð XÝ« sJ2  UOKLŽ vCFÐ • .‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
_ ‘uUš «— ÁU~²Ýœ ÆbMJ½ qLŽ `O×7 —uDÐ d~¹œ vł—Uš q«uŽ U¹ s UÝ t²6¹d²J>« ¨‚dÐ Ë bŽ— dÞUš tÐ XÝ« sJ2 ÁU~²Ýœ •
ÆbOM q7Ë «— ʬ «œb− Ë bOAJÐ «— AC ‚dÐ rOÝ ¨ÁU~²Ýœ Êœd ‘uUš “« bFÐ ÆbOM sýË— «œb− fáÝ Ë
_ Æb¹uý dE²M ʬ dOH³ð È«dÐ XŽUÝ 2 Uð 1 ∫ t²dÖ  —u7 “UÖ r «dð •
5 Æb½« Ábý t²ý«cÖ—U v²Ý—œ tÐ U¼ ÈdÞUÐ t bOM pÇ • ‫ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﳕﻰ ﺗﻮان ﻛﺎرى‬
5 ÆbOM s¹e~¹Uł b¹bł ÈU¼ ÈdÞUÐ UÐ «— UN½¬ ∫ b½« Ábý v>Uš U¼ ÈdÞUÐ • .‫اﳒﺎم داد‬
8 ÆbOM —U Ë t²— t½UA½ —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M —u6MÝ XLÝ tÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ÁU~²Ýœ •
25 ÆbMýUÐ v vðËUH² ÈUN²>UŠ —œ vK7« ÁU~²Ýœ Ë —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M •
ÆbO¼œ dOOGð vK7« ÁU~²Ýœ X>UŠ UÐ Êbý ÊU6L¼ È«dÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M X>UŠ
12 ÆbO¼œ —UA CD X>UŠ Êœd ‘uUš È«dÐ «— [CD MODE]+[SHIFT] tL œ ÆXÝ« sýË— CD X>UŠ • .‫ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬DVD
4, 5 ÆbOM pÇ «— Èd¹uBð Ë vðu7  ôUBð« • ‫ﺑﺪون ﺻﺪا وﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
_ ÆbOM pÇ «— Ábý qB² ÈUN¼U~²Ýœ d¹UÝ “« ÈœË—Ë  ULOEMð U¹ ‚dÐ •
_ ÆbýUÐ Ábý j³{ DVD-RAM ÈË— Èœ—u t bOM pÇ •
_ ÈË— dÐ [h10] Ë ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— «— [L, STOP] tL œ býUÐ v l³M Ê«uMŽ tÐ “DVD/CD” Ë Ábý nu² ÁU~²Ýœ v²Ë • .‫رﻣﺰ درﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪى ﺧﻮد را ﻓﺮاﻣﻮش ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‬
Æœuý u× Êu¹e¹uKð t×H7 ÈË— “« “©Initialised U¹® Initialized” Uð Áœ«œ —UA —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ÁU~²Ýœ tÐ Á—UÐËœ «— È“«b½« Á«— ÈU¼ rOEMð ÂU9
ÆbOM sýË— Ϋœb− Ë ‘uUš «— ÁU~²Ýœ t½Uš—U —œ Ábý ÂU$« gOÄ “« ÈU¼ rOEMð
Æb½œdÖ vdÐ ÊUý tO>Ë« d¹œUI tÐ U¼ rOEMð ÂU9 ÆbO½«œdÖdÐ

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺧﺎص ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮه‬

_ v²Š ÆbýUÐ “UO½ XË vL XÝ« sJ2 œuý ŸËdý gHÄ tJM¹« “« q³ býUÐ s UÝ d¹uBð ÈU¼ Áœ«œ È«—«œ MP3 tFD tJOU~M¼ • .‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻤﻰ وﻗﺖ ﻣﻰ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
ÆXÝ« ÈœUŽ X>UŠ s¹« Æœuý v/ Áœ«œ g¹U/ `O×7 —uDÐ gHÄ ÊU“ ¨U¼ tFD Êbý ŸËdý “« bFÐ MP3
_ Æb½uý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ r²A¼ t¹ô Ê«uMŽ tÐ r²A¼ t¹ô “« dð dðôUÐ ÈU¼—b>u • ‫ﻓﻮﻟﺪرﻫﺎى ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﺮ از ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ در دﻳﺴﻚ‬
.‫ﻫﺎى داده ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻰ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﳕﻰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
WMA MP3 JPEG

_ ÆbýUÐ v ÈœUŽ Èd¹uBð ÈU¼ CD È«dÐ • ‫درﺧﻼل ﭘﺮش ﻳﺎ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
VCD .‫ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬

_ ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [:, DVD/CD] fáÝ Ë Áœ«œ —UA —UÐ Ëœ «— [L] tL œ • .‫ﻣﻨﻮى ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﳕﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
g?H?Ä ‰d?²M UÐ VCD

_ ÆbM v/ qLŽ Èd¹uBð ÈU¼ DVD “« všdÐ UÐ U¼œdJKLŽ s¹« • ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى و ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬
DVD-V .‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﳕﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬

_ ÆbMýUÐ v/ gHÄ qÐU bOýUÐ Áœd r¼ Èe¹— tU½dÐ «— UN½¬ dÖ« v²Š U¼ tM¹eÖ všdÐ • ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى ﺷﺪه ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
DVD-V .‫ﳕﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‬

12 gHÄ tJM¹« ÊËbÐ œd?JKLŽ ¨bO¼œ dOOGð ADVANCED DISC REVIEW ‰öš —œ «—  u7 U¹ «b7 XOHO U¹ Ê«eO dÖ« • .‫ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻰ اوﻗﺎت ﭘﺮش ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
tL œ «œb− œdJKLŽ uG> È«dÐ ÆbÐU¹ v t«œ« g¹U/ t×H7 ÈË— dÐ œuý RAM DVD-V
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [A.DISC REVIEW]
‫زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ‬
17 Æ©“Display Menu” —œ “Subtitle Position” XOF{Ë® ÆbOzU/ rOEMð U¼ f¹u½d¹“ XOFu • .‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﳕﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

13 ÆbO¼œ g¹U/ «— U¼ f¹u½d¹“ • .‫ﻫﻴﭻ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺴﻰ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﻰ ﺷﻮد‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
_ ÆbOM tU{« DVD-RAM ÈË— bO½«uð v/ «— rzöŽ • .‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬارى را ﳕﻰ ﺗﻮان اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮد‬
_ ÆbOM tU{« bO½«uð v/ «— v²öŽ ¨œuA½ d¼Uþ ÁU~²Ýœ g¹U/ t×H7 ÈË— Ábý ÈdáÝ gHÄ ÊU“ dÖ« •

A-B ‫ﺗﻜﺮار‬
_ ÆbOÝ— v tM¹eÖ p¹ ÈUN²½« tÐ t XÝ« v½U“ B tDI½ • .‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬B ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
_
ÆœœdÖ v uG> A-B —«dJð ¨bO¼œ —UA «— [QUICK REPLAY]+[SHIFT] tL œ tJOU~M¼ • .‫ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮدد‬A-B

‫ﺻﺪا‬
_ Æb¼œ Œ— X¹“«—UÄ È—«bI XÝ« sJ2 WMA gHÄ ‰öš —œ • ‫ﺻﺪا ﺻﺎف ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
_ Æb½—«œ ÈœËb× dOŁQð U¹ ÁœdJ½ qLŽ UNJ6¹œ všdÐ UÐ vðu7  «dOŁUð všdÐ • .‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮات ﻋﻤﻞ ﳕﻰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
_ ÆbMM v/ qLŽ bÐU¹ dOOGð gHÄ XŽdÝ dÖ« t²dAOÄ b½«—uÝ Ë t½UÖbMÇ ÁbM¹«e« •
_ Æb¹—«œ t~½ —Ëœ dËË »UÝ ÈuÖbMKÐ “« «— U¼ rOÝ Ë q¹UÝË d¹UÝ ÆXÝ« dËË »UÝ ÈuÖbMKÐ p¹œe½ XMÝ—uK éô U¹ AC ‚dÐ rOÝ • .‫ﺻﺪاى وزوز در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬
13 Æb¼œ Œ— «b7 —œ YJ È—«bI XÝ« sJ2 bO¼œ v dOOGð «— gHÄ XŽdÝ tJOU~M¼ • .‫ﺻﺪاﻳﻰ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
_ ÆbOM »UH²½« l³M Ê«uMŽ tÐ «— “DVD-CD” • ‫ راه اﻧﺪازى ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ‬SETUP ‫ﻣﻨﻮى‬
16 ÆbOM uG> «— vœUBð Ë Ábý Èe¹— tU½dÐ gHÄ X>UŠ • .‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ RQT8092

28
69

Per(28-29) 28 2/2/05, 3:53 PM


Æv³«œ ÈUN¼U~A¹U!“¬ “« t!UMO¼«uÖ X% Ábý bOuð
ÆbMýU³O! v³«œ ÈUN¼U~A¹U!“¬ È—U& ÈUN²!öŽ qÐËœ –D Ë “Dolby” X!öŽ
Xdý È—U& rzöŽ “DTS 2.0 + Digital Out” Ë “DTS”
ÆbM²=¼ Digital Theater Systems¨ Inc.
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
US hTA! ÈU¼“UO²!« “« t dA½ ‚uIŠ “« XEKU×! È˛uuMJð q!Uý ‰uB×! s¹«
XþUHŠ 5JU! d¹UÝ Ë Macrovision Corporation Xdý ÈuMF! ‚uIŠ d¹UÝ Ë
Macrovision Xdý “« Á“Uł« UÐ b¹UÐ dA½ oŠ s¹« “« ÁœUH²Ý« ÆbýUÐ v! bM v!
d??O?ž —œ Ë X?Ý« œËb?×?! œ—«u??! d?¹U?Ý Ë ‰e?M?! —œ ÁœU?H?²?Ý« È«d?Ð Ë Corporation
 UOKLŽ ÆœœdÖ V= Macrovision Corporation Xdý “« Á“Uł« b¹UÐ  —uBM¹«
ÆXÝ« ŸuM2 ÁU~²Ýœ È«eł« Êœd «bł U¹ vÝbMN!
Ë High Definition Compatible Digital® ¨HDCD® ¨
—œ pO½uÝËdJO! pOHO=Ä Xdý È—U& rzöŽ Pacific Microsonics™
ÆbMýUÐ v! ÊUNł ÈU¼—uA d¹UÝ Ë UJ¹d!¬
.Pacific Microsonics, Inc. Xdý f½U=O X% HDCD r? ²? =? O? Ý
v! d¹“ œ—«u! “« œ—u! p¹ “« gOÐU¹ p¹ gýuÄ X% ‰uB×! s¹« ¨XÝ« Ábý t²šUÝ
¨5¨808¨574 ¨5¨640¨161¨ 5¨638¨074 ¨5¨479¨168 ∫ U J ¹d ! ¬ — œ ∫býUÐ
¨669114 ∫UO«d²Ý« —œ Ë ¨5¨872¨531 ¨5¨864¨311 ¨5¨854¨600 ¨5¨838¨274
ÆU¼“UO²!« oŠ d¹UÝ UÐ Á«dL¼
‫ﻟﻐﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
RQT8092
27
70
Per(27) 27
‫ﻟﻐﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺪ ﺧﻮان‬
v!d?Ð v?F?O³Þ XUŠ tÐ «— U¼ DVD ÈË— vðu? Áb?ý Èb?MÐb ÈU¼ ‰UM~OÝ Ê«u?š b
Æœuý v! t²HÖ v½«uš b —U s¹« tÐ Æb½«œdÖ
‫داﻟﺒﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
Ÿ«b?Ы v?³«œ ÈU¼ ÁU~A¹U!“¬ —œ t? X?Ý« v?U?²O−¹œ ÈUNUM~OÝ ÈbMÐb ‘Ë— p¹ s¹«
ÈU¼ «b bM½«uð v! U¼ ‰UM~OÝ s¹« ©‰U½U ≠ 2® u¹d²Ý« È«b “« È«bł ÆXÝ« Ábý
v! ‘Ë— s¹« “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ «— vðu  UŽöÞ« “« ÈœU¹“ —«bI! ÆbMýUÐ r¼ tU½U bMÇ
Æœd ÁdOš– p=¹œ ÈË— dÐ Ê«uð
DTS (‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎى ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎى دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻰ‬
v¹«bł Æœuý v! ÁœUH²Ý« UO½œ v¹ULMOÝ ÈU¼ sUÝ “« È—UO=Ð —œ vDO×! r²=OÝ s¹«
ÆXÝ« sJ2 vFF«Ë vðu ÈU¼ dOŁUð ʬ —œ s¹«dÐUMÐ ¨œ—«œ œułË U¼ ‰U½U 5Ð v³ÝUM!
‫داﻣﻨﻪ دﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻰ‬
q?ÐU?F ÁU~²Ýœ X¹“«—UÄ t «b bŠ s¹dð 5¹UÄ 5Ð  ËUHð “« X=ð—U³Ž vJO!UM¹œ tM!«œ
ÆœdOÖ  —u «b ‰ö²š« «b bŠ s¹dðôUÐ Ë XÝ« ÊbOMý
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ و وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬
b½«uð v! ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« Æb½« Ábý j³{ uzb¹Ë U¹ Ë rKOK  —uBÐ U¹ DVD v¹uzb¹Ë ÈUNLKOK
È«d?Ð «— ‘Ë— s?¹d?²?³?ÝU?M?! f?á?Ý ¨X?Ý« Áb?ý ÁœU?H?²?Ý« Ÿu?½ «b? t? b¼œ hOTAð
ÆbM v! ÁœUH²Ý« uOÝdÖËdÄ vłËdš
NTSC È«dÐ
tO½UŁ —œ —œU 24 ôuLF! „dײ! d¹uBð UÐ rKOK UÐ ¨XÝ« tO½UŁ —œ —œU 30 U¹ 24 UÐ rKOK
Æœuý v!
Æ©b½“UÝ v! «— —œU p¹ ÁœËb×! Ëœ d¼® XÝ« tO½UŁ —œ ÁœËb×! 60 UÐ uzb¹Ë
PAL È«dÐ
ÆXÝ« tO½UŁ —œ —œU 25 UÐ rKOK
Æ©b½“UÝ v! «— —œU p¹ ÁœËb×! Ëœ d¼® XÝ« tO½UŁ —œ ÁœËb×! 50 UÐ uzb¹Ë
‫ﻛﺎدر ﺛﺎﺑﺖ و ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
Æb½“UÝ v! «— „dײ! d¹ËU?B?ð Ë Áb?ý lLł r¼ —UM t bM²=¼ v²ÐUŁ d¹ËUBð U¼—œU
Æœuý v! Áœ«œ g¹U/ —œU 30 œËbŠ tO½UŁ d¼ —œ
‰U³½œ tÐ «— U¼ ÁœËb×! s¹« vu?LF! Êu¹e¹u?Kð ÆXÝ« Ábý tONð ÁœËb×! Ëœ “« —œU d¼
Æb¼œ v! g¹U/ U¼—œU œU−¹« È«dÐ d~¹bJ¹
v! nFu²! «— „dײ! d¹uBð g¹U/ ULý t œuý v! Áœ«œ ÊUA½ v²FË XÐUŁ d¹uBð p¹
È—bF XÝ« sJ2 d¹uBð s¹«dÐUMÐ XÝ« Ábý tONð »ËUM²! ÁœËb×! Ëœ “« XÐUŁ —œU ÆbOM
ÆXÝ« ôUÐ vK XOHO vË býUÐ `{«ËU½
s¹«d?ÐU?M?Ð ÆX?Ý« —œU  UŽöÞ« “« vLO½ UNMð È«—«œ vË X?=?O½ `{«ËU½ XÐUŁ ÁœËb?×!
ÆXÝ« dð 5¹UÄ d¹uBð XOHO
‫اﻳﻨﺘﺮﻟﻴﺲ‬/‫ﭘﺮوﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮ‬
Ábý fOd²M¹« sJÝ« ◊uDš ©625 U¹® 576 È«—«œ PAL v¹uzb¹Ë ‰UM~OÝ œ—«b½U²Ý«
—UÐ Ëœ ¨œuý v! ÁbO!U½ ©625p U¹® 576p t uOÝdÖËdÄ sJÝ« bM½UL¼ ¨býUÐ v! (i)
U¹® 480i VOðdð tÐ UNM¹« ¨NTSC œ—«b½U²Ý« È«dÐ ÆbM v! ÁœUH²Ý« sJÝ« ◊uDš “«
Æb½uý v! ÁbO!U½ ©525p U¹® 480p Ë ©525i
DVD ÈU¼uzb¹Ë bM½U! ôUÐ Õu{Ë UÐ ÈU¼uzb¹Ë “« ¨uOÝdÖËdÄ vłËdš “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ
Æb¹d³Ð  c
ÆbýUÐ —UÖ“UÝ uOÝdÖËdÄ ÈU¼uzb¹Ë UÐ v²=¹UÐ ULý Êu¹e¹uKð
I/P/B
o?O³Dð Èd¹uBð DVD —œ ÁœU?H²Ý« È«d?Ð t d¹u?Bð vÖœdAK œ—«b?½U²Ý« ¨MPEG 2
ÆbM v! ÈbMÐb d¹uBð Ÿu½ 3 s¹« “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ «— U¼—œU XÝ« Ábý Áœ«œ
Ábý ÈbMÐb qš«œ “« d¹uBð ∫I
s¹d?²?N?Ð r?O?EMð —uEM! tÐ ÁœUH²Ý« È«d?Ð Ë X?Ý« X?OHO s¹d?²NÐ È«—«œ d?¹u?Bð s¹«
ÆXÝ« d¹uBð
ÁbMM vMOÐ gOÄ ÈbMÐb UÐ d¹uBð ∫P
Æœuý v! t³ÝU×! vK³F P U¹ I d¹ËUBð ”UÝ« dÐ d¹uBð s¹«
tKdÞ Ëœ ÁbMM vMOÐ gOÄ ÈbMÐb UÐ d¹ËUBð ∫B
s¹d²L s¹«dÐUMÐ œuý v! t³ÝU×! ÈbFÐ Ë vK³F P U¹ I d¹ËUBð t=¹UI! UÐ d¹uBð s¹«
Æœ—«œ «—  UŽöÞ« r−Š
(‫ ﺧﻄﻰ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻰ‬PCM
ÆbM²=¼ œuý v! «bOÄ U¼ CD —œ t v¹UN½¬ tO³ý ÁœdAK dOž ‰U²O−¹œ ÈUNUM~OÝ UNM¹«
(PBC) ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
 UŽöÞ« Ë U¼ tM× bO½«uð v! ULý ¨býUÐ g¹U/ ‰d²M È«—«œ Èd¹uBð CD p¹ dÖ«
ÆbOM »UT²½« U¼uM! jÝuð «—
‫ﳕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮدارى ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻰ‬
U¼ t½u/ ÆXÝ« ©¯uU½¬ ‰UM~OÝ® «b Ãu! ÈbMKÐ È“UÝ —UJý¬ bO½«dK È—«œdÐ t½u/
t½u/ Æ©‰U²O−¹œ È—«cÖb® b½uý v! È—«cÖ œbŽ Ábý rOEMð v½U!“ Á“UÐ p¹ —œ
¨XÝ« tO½UŁ d¼ —œ Ábý t²KdÖ ÈU¼ t½u/ œ«bFð v=½UdK È—«œdÐ
ÆbýUÐ v! vK« È«b tÐ dO¦Jð s¹d²J¹œe½ Á—ULý s¹d²Ö—eÐ s¹«dÐUMÐ
2/3/05, 1:15 PM
 ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎى ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻰ _ ﻟﺬت از ﺻﺪاى ﻗﺪرﲤﻨﺪﺗﺮ‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت آﻧﱳ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرى‬

È«bF UÐ t sQUÝ bM½U È«bF Ë v~½Uš ÈULMOÝ “« U¼uÖbMKÐ Ë d¹UHOKᬠp¹ ‰UBð« UÐ ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« v¹«u¼ 7½¬ “« býUÐ v nOF{ v¹u¹œ«— ëu« X
U¹—œ dÖ«
Æb¹d³Ð  cQ XÝ« ”d?²Ýœ —œ U¼ DVD-Video ÈË— dÐ t tQU½U bMÇ
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺗﺼﺎل‬ FM ‫آﻧﱳ ﻫﻮاﻳﻰ‬
ÆbOM «bł «— AC ‚dÐ rOÝ •

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
ÆbO½«uMÐ «— UN½¬ ÈULM¼«— tÇd²
œ Ë Áœd ‘uUš «— UN¼U~²Ýœ vU9 •
ÆXÝ« Áœ«œ `O{uð «— UNQU¦ vU9 UN¼U~²Ýœ  ôUBð« • FM ‫آﻧﱳ ﻫﻮاﻳﻰ‬
ÆbýUÐ Ábý bO1 tJ½¬ d~ bÝ— v ‘ËdHÐ t½UÖ«bł —uDÐ UN½¬ ÈUNKÐU Ë ÁU~²Ýœ Ÿu½ • ©X(O½ qUý®

‫ اﻫﻤﻰ‬75 ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﻮرى‬

©X(O½ qUý® ‫آﻣﭙﻠﻴﻔﺎﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ ©X(O½ qUý®
VOLUME

‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬
FM ANT
(75Ω)

ÆbOM «bł «— FM vKš«œ 7½¬ •

(DVD) IN Æœuý VB½ d¼U 5(MJð p¹ tKOÝuÐ b¹UÐ 7½¬ •

(‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ )ﻣﺜﺎل‬ AM ‫آﻧﱳ ﻫﻮاﻳﻰ‬

U¹ uÖbMKÐ tÝ b½«—uÝ È«bF È«dÐ
ÆbOM VB½ d²AOÐ AM ‫آﻧﱳ ﻫﻮاﻳﻰ‬
©XÝ« qUý®
‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬ 5 -12 m
©X(O½ qUý® ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻧﻮرى دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
ÆbOMJ½ rš «— ʬ XÝ« qFË t v½U“ 1
AM ANT
LOOP
EXT
AM ‫آﻧﱳ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اى‬
2 ©XÝ« qUý®

‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ V?ÝU?M q× U¹ Ád?−?MÄ ÊË—œ “« vI

« —uDÐ «— v?J?O²ÝöÄ gË— U?Ð r?OÝ “« v²L(1 •
‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬ ÆbO¼œ —u³Ž Èd~¹œ
OPTICAL
ÆbýUÐ qB² Á—«uL¼ È« tIKŠ 7½¬ •
OUT

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
ÆbOM «bł «— v¹«u¼ 7½¬ œuý v/ ÁœUH²Ý« ÁU~²Ýœ “« tJOU~M¼

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬

ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« ‚dÐ Ë bŽ— ÂU~M¼ tÐ v¹«u¼ 7½¬ “«
‫ﺑﺮاى اﻳﻨﻜﻪ از ﺻﺪاى ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
qB² «— d?¹UHOKᬠUÐ VOdð —œ Ê«u?šb p¹ U¹ Ë vKš«œ Ê«u?šb p¹ UÐ d¹UHOKᬠp¹ ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
ÆbOM
t×HF @® ÆbO¼œ dOOGð “PCM Digital Output” —œ “Audio” XL(1 —œ «— U¼ rOEMð
RAM DVD-V VCD CD WMA MP3
Æ©19
—U?Ö“UÝ DVD U?Ð t b½«—u?Ý ‰U²O−¹œ DTS ÈU¼ Ê«u?šb “« bO½«u?ð v? jI
ULý • rOEMð b¹« Áœd qFË ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« OPTICAL OUT ‰UMOdð o¹dÞ “« «— tKOÝË v²1Ë
ÆÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« bM²(¼ ÆbO¼œ dOOGð «— U¼
PCM ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎل‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
‰U²O−¹œ j³{“« l½U k
U× b¹U³½ p(¹œ a ∫býUÐ t²ý«œ «— d¹“ j¹«dý b¹UÐ DVD • ÆbOM »UM²½« «— PCM ‰U²O−¹œ vłËdš —œ ÈdOÖ t½u/ f½Ud
d¦«bŠ
ÆbOM ‰d²M «— bOM v qFË t È« tKOÝË ‰U²O−¹œ ÈœË—Ë ÈU¼ X¹œËb×
eðd¼uKO 48 ÈdOÖ t½u/ f½Ud
UÐ ÈUNQUM~OÝ UÐ b½«u²Ð j³{ tKOÝË b Ë ÆbýUÐ t²ý«œ
ÆbM —U ÆXÝ« ÁbA½ qFË vQU²O−¹œ  —uF tÐ v²1Ë ∫‘uUš
ÆbOM j³{ MP3/WMA bO½«uð v/ ULý • ∫©t½Uš—U —œ Ábý rOEMð® ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬48 ‫ﺗﺎ‬
44.1U¹ 48 tÐ eðd¼uKO 48 “« d²AOÐ ÈUNQUM~OÝ
∫bOM rOEMð «— d¹“ œ—«u U¼ DVD j³{ ÊU“ —œ Æb½uý v q¹b³ð eðd¼uKO
Æ©23 t×HF @® Off ‘uUš ∫t²
dAOÄ b½«—uÝ È«bF – 44.1 U¹ eðd¼uKO 48 tÐ eðd¼uKO 96 “« d²AOÐ ÈUNQUM~OÝ : ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬96 ‫ﺗﺎ‬
Æ©“Audio” XL(1 ¨19 t×HF @® eðd¼uKO 48 Uð ∫PCM ‰U²O−¹œ vłËdš – Æb½uý v q¹b³ð eðd¼uKO
XL(1 ¨19 t×HF @® PCM ∫MPEG / b½«—uÝ vQU²O−¹œ DTS /vQU²O−¹œ v³Q«œ –
Æ©“Audio” ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
v1dý »uMł ÈUOݬ “« dOž oÞUM È«dÐ jI
∫MPEG U¹ 48 tÐ rOEMð Ÿu½ tÐ tłuð ÊËbÐ vádЫdÐ —œ Ábý XE
U× ÈU¼ p(¹œ ÈUNQUM~OÝ •
Æb½uý v q¹b³ðeðd¼uKO 44.1
UÐ bM½«u²Ð dÖ« v²Š ¨bMM —U eðd¼uKO 88.2 ÈU¼ f½Ud
UÐ bM½«uð v/ q¹UÝË všdÐ •
ÆbO½«uMÐ «— œuš tKOÝË ÈULM¼«— tÇd²
œ ¨ UO¹eł È«dÐ ÆbMM—U eðd¼uKO 96 f½Ud

MPEG ‫ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻰ ﺳﻮراﻧﺪ و‬DTS ،‫داﻟﺒﻰ دﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻰ‬

vQU²O−¹œ b½«—uÝ Ë vQU²O−¹œ v³Q«œ È«dÐ t½Uš—U tOQË« rOEMð® Bitstream ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﻴﺖ‬
∫©DTS
ÆbOM »UM²½« bM v½«ušb «— ‰UM~OÝ b½«uð v b¹« Áœd qFË t È« tKOÝË dÖ«
∫©MPEG Ë È«dÐ t½Uš—U —œ Ábý rOEMð® PCM
ÆbOM »UM²½« bM v½«ušb «— ‰UM~OÝ b½«uð v/ b¹« Áœd qFË t È« tKOÝË dÖ«
v1dý »uMł ÈUOݬ “« dOž oÞUM È«dÐ jI
∫MPEG
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
RQT8092
‫اﮔﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اى ﻛﻪ وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﳕﻰ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻛﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ وﺳﻴﻠـﻪ ﳕـﻰ ﺗـﻮاﻧـﺪ‬.‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬PCM ‫ﺑﻪ‬
‫ارزﻳﺎﺑﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪه‬
26
.‫و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮاﻳﻰ ﺷﻤﺎ و ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻰ ﮔﺮدد‬ 71

Per(22-26) 26 2/2/05, 1:38 PM

 ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮﺷﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪا‬

.(‫ﺻﺪا را ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮده و ﮔﻮﺷﻰ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ 1 .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬MUTING]
d² vKO 3.5 u¹d²Ý« ∫výuÖ gO Ÿu½
‫[ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬VOLUME DOWN, UP] ‫ﺻﺪاى ﮔﻮﺷﻰ را ﺑﺎ‬ 2
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
ÆbOM eO¼dÄ X.UŠ s¹« —œ œU¹“  b tÐ Êœ«œ ‘uÖ “« v¹«uMý  öJA “ËdÐ “« »UM²ł« È«dÐ ÆbÐU¹ v g¼U q «bŠ tÐ «b
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬
ʬ fáÝ (--dB) Áœ«œ g¼U q «bŠ tÐ «— «b U¹ bO¼œ —UA «— [MUTING] Á—UÐËœ
Æb¹dO~Ð Êu¹e¹uKð XLÝ tÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ÁU~²Ýœ d¹“ ÈU¼—U È«dÐ ÆbO¼œ g¹«e« dE½ œ—u bŠ tÐ «—
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬/‫روﺷﻦ‬ Æœuý v uG. b¹—«cÖ v —UE²½« X.UŠ tÐ «— ÁU~²Ýœ v² Ë 5MâL¼ «b lD
f] + [SHIFT]
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬TVf

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ورودى وﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻰ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﻰ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬TV/AV] + [SHIFT] t?Ð b½u?A?½ ÁœU?H?²Ý« tIO œ Áœ  b tÐ Ë Ábý »U7²½« l³M Ê«u?MŽ tÐ —«u½ U¹ CD v?² Ë
Æœuý v ‘uUš ÁU~²Ýœ È˛d½« kHŠ —uEM
‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﻫﺎ‬ ÆbM v/ —U býUÐ AUX U¹ »U¹ Ãu ÈË— ¨ l³M dÖ« œdJKLŽ s¹«
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬TV CH3
3] + [SHIFT] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬TV CH4
4] + [SHIFT]
.‫[ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬AUTO OFF] + [SHIFT]
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪا‬ Æœuý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ g¹U/ t×H ÈË— dÐ “AUTO OFF”
.‫–[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬TV VOL] + [SHIFT] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬TV VOL+] + [SHIFT]
Æœuý v t²ý«bN~½ r¼ ÁU~²Ýœ Êbý ‘uUš UÐ v²Š rOEMð
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ v ×Uš “AUTO OFF” r?OýUÐ Áœd »U?7²½« l³?M Ê«uM?Ž tÐ «— AUX U¹ »U¹ Ãu? dÖ«
Æœd ‰d²M —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« UÐ Ê«uð v/ «— U¼ ‰b “« vCFÐ Æœuý v œ—«Ë pI¹œ U¹ —«u½ »U7²½« UÐ Á—UÐËœ Æœuý
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎى روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ .b¹—«œ t~½ Ë Áœ«œ —UA Á—UÐËœ «— [AUTO OFF]+[SHIFT]
‫از راه دور‬
‫ﺗﻴﺮه ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
Ábý rOEMð “REMOTE 1” X.UŠ ÈË— t½Uš—U —œ —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M Ë vK« ÁU~²Ýœ
Æb½« .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬DIMMER] + [SHIFT]
v «d½¬ ¨œ—«c~Ð dOŁQð q¹UÝË d¹UÝ ÈË— dÐ ÁœUH²Ý« ‰öš —œ ULý —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M dÖ« ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [DIMMER]+[SHIFT] Á—UÐËœ ¨tO.Ë« v¹UMýË— Ê«eO tÐ XAÖ“UÐ È«dÐ
ÆbO¼œ dOOGð “REMOTE 2” X.UŠ ÈË— bO½«uð
‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬
1
“REMOTE 2” ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫[ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬AUX] ‫در ﺧﻼل ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و ﻧﮕﺎه داﺷﱳ‬ ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ ﻣـﻮرد ﲤـﺎﻳـﻞ‬DISP MODE] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬
‫“روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬REMOTE 2” ‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬2] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬/‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬

.‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‬

2
∫bO¼œ —UA «— tLœ s¹« t —UÐ d¼
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬2 ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬2] ‫[ و‬ENTER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ÈœUŽ —«œ pOÄ vÐUð“UÐ
Æb½« Ábý rOEMð “REMOTE 2” X.UŠ ÈË— dÐ —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M Ë vK« ÁU~²Ýœ ÊuM« ‘uUš
“REMOTE 1”‫ﺑﺮاى ﺑﺮﮔﺸﱳ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
ÁœUH²Ý« tKŠd Ëœ d¼ È«dÐ [2] ÈU−Ð [1] “« v.Ë Áœu/ «dł« «— ôUÐ 2 Ë 1 qŠ«d ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬
ÆbO¹U/
©Æœuý v d¼Uþ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— 1 tKŠd ‰öš —œ “REMOTE 1”  —U³Ž® ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎرﺟﻰ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺑﺎ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﳕﻰ ﺗﻮاﻧـﺪ ﻋـﻤـﻞ‬ ÆbO¹U/ qB² bO½«uð v «— vKš«œ Èu½u d~½UIL¼ UÐ ¯u.U½¬ g7Ä ÁU~²Ýœ p¹
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
U¹ “REMOTE 1” ÈUNð—U³Ž b¹dÐ v —UJÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M tJOU~M¼ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ R L
Æœuý v d¼Uþ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ g¹U/ t×H ÈË— “REMOTE 2” ‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬
©býUÐ v “REMOTE 1” X.UŠ —œ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® bý d¼Uþ “REMOTE 1” dÖ«
Ë Áœ«œ —UA tO½UŁ 2 q «bŠ È«dÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ÈË— [1] Ë [ENTER] tLœ
 (R) (L)
Æb¹—«bN~½
©býUÐ v “REMOTE 2” X.UŠ —œ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® bý d¼Uþ “REMOTE 2” dÖ« ¯u.U½¬ g7Ä ÁU~²Ýœ
Ë Áœ«œ —UA tO½UŁ 2 q «bŠ È«dÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ÈË— [2] Ë [ENTER] tLœ ©XIO½ tLOL{®
‫[( را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬AUX]: ‫[ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬TUNER/AUX] 1
Æb¹—«bN~½
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ .‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬AUX”
Á«— “« ‰d²M “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ «— v½u¹e¹uKð bO½«uð v “uM¼ X.UŠ Êœ«œ dOOGð “« bFÐ v²Š Æœuý v sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ
Æb¹d³Ð —UJÐ ©bOMO³Ð «— t×H ÈôUÐ @® —Ëœ
Æb¹ËdÐ 3 tKŠd tÐ :‫ ﺑﺮاى ﮔﻮش دادن‬2
j³{® bO¼œ —UA «— vK« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— dÐ [a REC] tLœ : ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺿﺒﻂ‬
Æ©œuý v ŸËdý
©[L, STOP]: vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® [L] tLœ j³{ —U n uð È«dÐ
ÆbO¼œ —UA «—
.‫ ﭘﺨﺶ از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺧﺎرﺟﻰ را ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3

RQT8092
XÝ« Ábý qB² t v¼U~²Ýœ ÈULM¼«— tÇd²œ tÐ ¨d²AOÐ  UOzeł È«dÐ •
ÆbO¹U/ tFł«d
25 ôUÐ —œ tJOzUN½¬ “« dOž Èd~¹œ ÈUN¼U~²Ýœ Êœu/ ‰UBð« bB tJOU~M¼ UHD. •
72
v¹ULM¼«— vðu ÈUN¼U~²Ýœ hB7² “« ¨b¹—«œ «— b½« Ábý Áœ«œ `O{uð
Æb¹dO~Ð

Per(22-26) 25 2/2/05, 1:36 PM

 ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺎﳝﺮﻫﺎ‬ U¼ výuÖ
©bM²$O½ qUý®

‫ ﺿﺒﻂ‬/‫ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
.‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬rPLAY/REC] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
∫bO¼œ v —UA> «— tLœ s¹« ULý t —UÐ d¼
REC PLAY
©‘uUš® VOLUME

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
gÄ d1Uð Êœd sýË— È«dÐ ∫ rPLAY DOWN, UP
j³{ d1Uð Êœd sýË— È«dÐ ∫ rREC REC
©Æœuý v/ d¼Uþ d~½UA½ býUÐ ÁbA½ rOEMð XŽUÝ U¹ t9Uš Ë ŸËdý ÈUN½U“ dÖ«®
AUX
.‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬f] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 4 , STOP
.‫ﺑﺮاى اﺟﺮاى ﺗﺎﳝﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
g¹«e>« UÐ Ë Ábý rOEMð ÊU“ —œ Ë Ábý rOEMð XOF{Ë —œ:‫• ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ DISP MODE PHONES
b¼«uš ŸËdý gÄ Ábý rOEMð `DÝ È«dÐ «b ÈbŽUBð
Æbý
«b ÊËbÐ Ábý rOEMð ÊU“ “« q³Q tO½UŁ 30 ÁU~²Ýœ :‫• ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
Æœuý v sýË— DIMMER
TV
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ‬
g¹U/ t×H ÈË— “« d1Uð d~½UA½ Êœd „UÄ È«dÐ «— [rPLAY/REC] tLœ CLOCK/ PLAY/
ÆbO¼œ —UA> TIMER, REC,
SLEEP AUTO OFF
©Æœuý v sýË— Ábý rOEMð ÊU“ —œ d1Uð “Ë— d¼ býUÐ sýË— d1Uð dÖ«® 1 2 3

(‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 1, 2

4 5 6
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬/‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎى ﭘﺨﺶ‬
7 8 9
ÆbO¼œ ÂU$« «— 4 Ë 2 Ë 1 qŠ«d
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺪا‬ 0 10
ÆbO¼œ —UA> t×H ÈË— “« d1Uð d~½UA½ Êœd „UÄ È«dÐ «— ›rPLAY/REC¤ tLœ Æ1
ÆbO¼œ ÂU$« «b U¹ l³M È«dÐ «—  «dOOGð Æ2
ÆbO¼œ ÂU$« «— 4 Uð 3 qŠ«d Æ3 TUNER/AUX
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬
»U²½« È«dÐ «— ›CLOCK /TIMER¤ tLœ XÝ« sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ tJOXUŠ —œ
ÆbO¼œ —UA> “rREC” U¹ “rPLAY”
∫b½uý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ d¹“ VOðd²Ð  ULOEMð TV CH ,
«b ← l³M ← t9Uš ÊU“ ← ŸËdý ÊU“ ∫gÄ d1Uð TV CH ,
ENTER
l³M ← t9Uš ÊU“ ← ŸËdý ÊU“ ∫j³{ d1Uð
›CLOCK /TIMER¤ tLœ ¨XÝ« ‘uUš ÁU~²Ýœ tJOXUŠ —œ  ULOEMð Êœd pÇ È«dÐ
ÆbO¼œ —UA> —UÐËœ «— , REW/ ,
, /FF TV/AV
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﳝﺮﻫﺎ از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ SHIFT , +,

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺎﳝﺮﻫﺎ‬
`O× —uDÐ p$¹œ U¹ —«u½ ÁU~²Ýœ Êœd ‘uUš “« q³Q t bOM pÇ ¨ÁœUH²Ý« “« bFÐ TV VOL
ÆbýUÐ Ábý Áœ«œ —«dQ MUTING

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‰UŠ —œ U¼d1Uð “« vJ¹ tJOXUŠ —œ bOM sýË— Ë ‘uUš «œb− «— ÁU~²Ýœ dÖ« •
Æbý b¼«u½ ‰UF> Ábý rOEMð t9Uš ÊU“ ¨býUÐ «dł«
Áœd »U²½« l³M Ê«uMFÐ «— AUX XOF{Ë dÖ« ¨œuý v sýË— d1Uð tJOU~M¼ •
ULý dÖ« Æœuý v dOÖ—œ l³M Ê«uMFÐ “AUX” UÐ Ë Ábý sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ ¨bOýUÐ
ÁU~²Ýœ ʬ d1Uð ¨bOzU/ j³{ U¹ gÄ Ábý qB² ÁU~²Ýœ p¹ “« bO¼«uÐ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺎﳝﺮﻫﺎ‬
Ábý qB² ÁU~²Ýœ ÈULM¼«— tÇd²>œ tЮ ÆbO¼œ —«dQ tÐUA v½U“ ÈË— «—
©ÆbOM tFł«d ‫ ﺿﺒﻂ‬/‫ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﺧﻮاب‬ d1Uð® bM —«bOÐ »«uš “« «— ULý Uð bOM rOEMð vuBÐ ÊU“ ÈË— «— d1Uð bO½«uð v ULý
ÆbM v ‘uUš Ábý rOEMð ÊU“ “« bFÐ «— ÁU~²Ýœ d1Uð s¹« Æ©j³{ d1Uð® bM j³{ aux l³M p¹ U¹ vzu¹œ«— ÁU~²$¹« p¹ “« U¹ ©gÄ
Æb½uý ÁœUH²Ý« bM½«uð v/ r¼ UÐ j³{ Ë gÄ ÈU¼d1Uð
:‫درﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ از ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮرد ﲤﺎﻳﻞ ﻟﺬت ﻣﻰ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ :‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﻣﺎن )دﻗﻴﻘـﻪ( ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬SLEEP] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬ Æ©6 t×H @® bOM rOEMð «— XŽUÝ Ë Áœd sýË— «— ÁU~²Ýœ •
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Ë ¨Áœd ÁœU¬ «— ©auxØu¹œ«—Øp$¹œØ—«u½® q?¹U9 œ—u p¹“u l³M? ¨‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
ÆbOM rOEMð «— «b
∫bO¼œ v —UA> «— tLœ s¹« ULý t —UÐ d¼ t×H @® Áœd pÇ «— XÝU Êbý „UÄ “« ÁbMM XE>U× Ábz«“ ¨‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
SLEEP OFF SLEEP 120 SLEEP 90 SLEEP 60 SLEEP 30 vÐU¹ Ãu «— v¹u¹œ«— ÁU?~²$¹« Æ©21 t×H @® b?OM œ—«Ë 2 „œ —œ «— È—«u½ Ë ©21
Æ©25 t×H @® bOzU/ »U²½« «— aux l³M U¹ ©20 t×H @® Áœd
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬CLOCK / TIMER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﺎﳝﺮ ﺧﻮاب‬ .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA> “SLEEP OFF” »U²½« È«dÐ «— ›SLEEP¤´›SHIFT¤ tLœ ∫bO¼œ v —UA> «— tLœ s¹« ULý t —UÐ d¼
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه‬ REC PLAY CLOCK
ÆbO¼œ —UA> —U³J¹ «— ›SLEEP¤´›SHIFT¤ tLœ vK³Q g¹U/
Æœuý v Áœ«œ ÊUA½ tO½UŁ 5 œËbŠ È«dÐ Áb½U vQUÐ ÊU“ gÄ d1Uð rOEMð È«dÐ ∫ rPLAY
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬ j³{ d1Uð rOEMð È«dÐ ∫ rREC
ÆbO¼œ —UA> b¹bł  ULOEMð »U²½« È«dÐ «— ›SLEEP¤´›SHIFT¤ tLœ ©b¹ËdÐ bFÐ tKŠd tÐ tO½UŁ 7  b vÞ®
ON ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬ 2
ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« j³{Ø gÄ d1Uð UÐ Á«dL¼ v²XUŠ —œ »«uš d1Uð “« bO½«uð v ULý f, 3
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻨﻈﻴـﻢ‬f 3/FF] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬gg, REW/4 4] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬ 1
2
ÆbýUÐ ‘uUš j³{Ø gÄ d1Uð ŸËdý ÊU“ “« q³Q ÁU~²Ýœ t b¹uý s¾LD .‫زﻣﺎن ﺷﺮوع ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ RQT8092

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬CLOCK/TIMER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 24

2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ‬
Æbý b¼«uš ‘uUš »«uš d1Uð œuý v ŸËdý Êœd j³{ qLŽ tJOU~M¼ OFF ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬
73
.‫را ﺗﻜﺮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Per(22-26) 24 2/2/05, 1:35 PM

 ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺻﺪا و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪا‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﻮزه و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪا‬ r²OÝ ÈU¼ XOKÐU! Á«dL¼ tÐ lÐUM všdÐ “« ÁœUH²Ý« ÊU“ —œ XÝ« sJ2
«— «b Á“uŠ r²OÝ  —u s¹« —œ Æb¹uý «b XOHO( g¼U( tłu² «b Á“uŠ
.‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SOUND EQ] ÆbOM( ‘uUš
∫bO¼œ —UA& «— tL(œ s¹« t( —UÐ d¼
Æb¼œ v  —b! „«— p¹“u tÐ ∫ HEAVY ‫ﺻﺪاى ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻰ ﺳﻮراﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

ÆbM( v dð `{«Ë «— bMKÐ ÈU¼«b ∫ CLEAR RAM DVD-V

ÆtMO“ p¹“u È«dÐ ∫ SOFT tÐUA t( v¹U¼«b “« bMýUÐ v b½«—uÝ  «dOŁQð È«—«œ t( v¹UNJ¹œ g6Ä ÂU~M¼
ÆbO²¼ uJ¹œ p¹ —œ bOM( ”UŠ« Uð b¼œ v 5MÞ «b tÐ ∫ DISCO Æb¹d³Ð  c bMýUÐ v jO× ÈU¼«b
ÆbÝ— v dEMÐ dð Áb½“ —UOÐ ÁbM½«uš È«b ∫ LIVE
:‫ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬A.SRND]
ÆbO²¼ sUÝ p¹ —œ bOM( ”UŠ« Uð bM( v Áœd²Ö «— «b ∫ HALL
.([ADVANCED SURROUND]
Æ©È« t½Uš—U( rOEMð® ©œuý v/ œU−¹« ÈdOŁQð® œuý v uG ∫ EQ-OFF
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
∫bO¼œ —UA& «— tL(œ s¹« t( —UÐ d¼
ÆbO¼œ —UA& «— [SOUND EQ] tL(œ 1 Natural

(MANUAL EQ) ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻧﮕﺮ دﺳﺘﻰ‬ 2 Enhanced

Æb¹“UÐ œuš È«dÐ «— «b vHO( ÈU¼dŁ« ©t½Uš—U( —œ Ábý tz«—«® Off
“MANUAL EQ” ‫–[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داد و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬MANUAL EQ] 1
.‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮاى ﻧﺸﺴﱳ‬
©tO½UŁ 12 vÞ —œ® 2
.‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪا را ﺑﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺟﻬﺖ دار ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ A —U( U¼ p¹œ vCFÐ UÐ U¼ XOKÐU! s¹« •
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
ÆbOM( »U6²½« [:] U¹ [;] jÝuð rOEMð È«dÐ «— «b tM«œ 1 Æœ—«œ Èd²L( dŁ« U¹ bM( v/
TREBLE ↔ MID ↔ BASS
—œ œułu vDO×  «dŁ« UÐ VO(dð —œ XUŠ s¹« “« •
ÆbOM( »U6²½« [9] U¹ [8] UÐ «— «b Á“«b½« 2
©+3 Uð –3 “«® ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý«  «eON& d¹UÝ
‫ ﻣﺘﺮ‬4 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬3
ÆbOM( —«dJð «— 2 ÂUÖ «b »uKD XOHO( rOEMð È«dÐ A ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از‬
ÆœœdÖ v“UÐ g¹U/ q½UÄ ÈË— dÐ tO½UŁ 3 ·dþ vK« g¹U/ t×H
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻟﻐﻮ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA& «— [SOUND EQ] tL(œ ¨“EQ≠OFF” »U6²½« È«dÐ
«— “MANUAL EQ” t( d~¹œ —UÐ Ë b½uý v ÁdOš– bOM( v œU−¹« t( vð«dOOGð
Æb½œdÖ v —UCŠ« —U(œuš —uDÐ bOM( v v½«uš«d& ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﱳ‬

‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺻﺪاى ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬ ‫اﻓﺰاﻧﻴﺪه ﺻﺪاى ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ _ از ﺻﺪاى ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬

‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻰ ﻟﺬت ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺻﺪا و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪا‬

Æb¼œ v dðbM9—b! v¹«b ULý tÐ dðdÐ È«b d~½UL¼ Êœd( sýË—

:‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬S.SOUND EQ] RAM DVD-V CD VCD
.([SUPER SOUND EQ] 48 ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ‬44.1 ‫ در‬LPCM ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺼﻮرت ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ‬
Æœuý v sýË— “S.SOUND EQ” d~½UA½ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
t( ôUÐ f½U(d& UÐ ÈUNUM~OÝ Êœd( t&U{« UÐ vFO³Þ —UOÐ v¹«b b½«uð v XUŠ s¹«
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻟﻐﻮ‬ Æb¹U/ œU−¹« «— b½« ÁbA½ j³{ p¹œ ÈË—
bO¼œ —UA& «— © [SUPER SOUND EQ¤∫ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® [S.SOUND EQ] tL(œ MP3 WMA
Æœuý ‘uUš d~½UA½ Uð ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬48 ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ‬44.1 ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه در‬
bOuð Ϋœb− «— j³{  b vÞ —œ t²&— XÝœ “« dðôUÐ ÈUN½U(d& b½«uð v XUŠ s¹«
Æœuý œU−¹« vK« È«b tÐ d²J¹œe½ v¹«b Uð bM(
‫درﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬
:‫[ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬M.RE-MASTER] + [SHIFT] ‫ﻫﺮﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ‬
:‫[( را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬MULTI RE-MASTER]

WMA MP3 RAM DVD-V CD VCD  ULOEMð

dOŁUð Ê«eO p¹“u Ÿu½
«—¬ ©„«— Ë ÛUÄ ¨Æ‰U¦® «b ÈôUÐ XŽdÝ 1
jÝu² ©“Uł ¨Æ‰U¦® «b ŸuM² ÈU¼ XŽdÝ 2
Èu! ©pOÝö( ¨Æ‰U¦® «b 5¹UÄ ÈU¼ XŽdÝ 3
‘uUš ‘uUš Off

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
¨19 t×H {® PCM ‰U²O−¹œ vłËdš rOEMð tÐ vłËdš vF!«Ë ÈdOÖ t½u/ f½U(d&
‰UBð« “« ÁœUH²Ý« ÊU“ —œ ©“PCM Digital Output” XOF{Ë —œ “Audio” XL!
Æ©dðbM9—b! È«b “«  c flv~½Uš ÈULMOÝ ¨26 t×H {® œ—«œ v~²Ð ‰U²O−¹œ

RQT8092

23
74

Per(22-26) 23 2/2/05, 3:46 PM

 ‫ﻟﺬت ﺑﺮدن از ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ‬

Æ©10 ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻰ را ﻗﺮار داده و ﭘﺨﺶ را ﺷﺮوع ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ ®@ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ 1 MULTI

, STOP

1
RE-MASTER
DVD-V 2

2
.‫[ را در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬AUDIO] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ADVANCED
SURROUND SUPER
‫;[ را ﺑﺮاى‬, :] ‫ ﻳﺎ‬،[ENTER] ‫[ و ﺳﭙﺲ‬9] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬,] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ SOUND EQ
REC
.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ SOUND EQ

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
MIC VOL
t½UÖËœ ÈUNJ¹œ uuÝ ÈUNJ¹œ MIN, MAX VOLUME
‘uUš ÁbM½«uš È«b ∫Off ‘uUš ÁbM½«uš È«b ∫Off DOWN, UP
XL! Ëœd¼ : V1+V2 sýË— ÁbM½«uš È«b ∫On
1 XL! jI& : V1
2 XL! jI& : V2
RAM VCD
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬AUDIO] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
∫bO¼œ v —UA& «— tL(œ s¹« t( ÊU“ d¼
œuý v ÁbOMý éÇ XLÝ ÈuÖbMKÐ “« éÇ ‰U½U( È«b ∫ AUDIO L R (LR)
œuý v ÁbOMý XÝ«— ÈuÖbMKÐ “« XÝ«— ‰U½U( È«bË ©U¼® s&ËdJO
Æ©vIOÝu q¹UÝË Ë ÁbM½«uš È«b® ©bM²O½ qUý®
Æ©ÁbM½«uš È«b ÊËbЮ éÇ ‰U½U( È«b jI& ∫ AUDIO L (L)
Æ©ÁbM½«uš È«b UЮ XÝ«— ‰U½U( È«b jI& ∫ AUDIO R (R) S.SOUND EQ
ÆbOM( »U6²½« t(Ë«—U( È«dÐ «— ÁbM½«uš È«b ÊËbÐ XOF{Ë •
Æœuý fJŽdÐ XÝ« sJ2 ÁbM½«uš È«b ÊËbÐ Ë ¨ÁbM½«uš È«b ÈUN²UŠ • A.SRND,
ÈUNKLF«—u²Ýœ d²AOÐ  UOzeł È«dÐ Æœ—«œ v~²Ð p¹œ Ÿu½ tÐ vF!«Ë ÈU¼œdJKLŽ • SOUND EQ, M.RE-MASTER
ÆbO½«u6Ð «— p¹œ tÐ ◊uÐd MANUAL EQ 1 2 3

[–, + VOLUME] ‫ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن را آﻏﺎز ﻛﺮده و ﺻﺪا را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3 4 5 6

‫[( و دﻛﻤﻪ‬VOLUME DOWN, UP]: ‫)دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬ ECHO 7 8 9

.‫[ ﺑﺮ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬MIC VOL MIN, MAX]
0 10
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻛﻮ‬ AUDIO

.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ECHO] + [SHIFT]

∫bO¼œ —UA& «— tL(œ s¹« t( —UÐ d¼
©‘uUš® ECHO OFF ECHO 4 ECHO 3 ECHO 2 ECHO 1

‫ﻟﺬت ﺑﺮدن از ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ‬

, , , ,
ÆbÐU¹ v g¹«e&« `DÝ Á«dL¼ tÐ dŁ« ENTER
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ ﺧﻮد‬
:‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬
ÆbO¼œ ÂU$« «— 21 t×H —œ ×bM 2–1 È“UÝ ÁœU¬ ÈU¼ ÂUÖ •
Æ©10 t×H @® bO¹U/ ŸËdý «— g6Ä Ë Áœ«œ —«d! «— vJ¹œ • SHIFT , +,
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬AUDIO] + [SHIFT] ‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪا‬ 1 VOLUME

:‫–[ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬, + VOLUME] ‫ ﺻﺪا را ﺑﺎ‬2

[MIC VOL MIN, MAX] ‫[( و‬VOLUME DOWN, UP]
.‫ﺑﺮ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ [[ ﺑﺮروى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ و ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ‬REC] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ را آﻏﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA& «— ©[L, STOP]: vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® [L] tL(œ
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪاى ﺧﻮدﺗﺎن‬
s¾LD ÆbO¼œ ÂU$« «— 21 t×H —œ ×bM 2–1 È“UÝ ÁœU¬ ÈU¼ ÂUÖ :‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬
Æœ—«b½ œułË 1 „œ —œ È—«u½ t( b¹uý
‫ [[ ﺑﺮروى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ را ﺑﺮاى آﻏﺎز ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎر‬REC] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫–[ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬, + VOLUME] ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻦ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮده و ﺻﺪا را ﺑﺎ‬
[MIC VOL MIN, MAX] ‫[( و‬VOLUME DOWN, UP] : ‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬
.‫ﺑﺮ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
3
‫ﻟﺬت ﺑﺮدن از ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ‬
:‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬
¨bOM( r( «— s&ËdJO È«b v?K« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— dÐ [MIC VOL MIN, MAX] UÐ •
ÆbOM( qË s&ËdJO ‰UBð« ©ÈU¼® t¹UÄ «— ©U¼® s&ËdJO fáÝ
ÆbOM( ÁœUH²Ý« vJOUM¹œ s&ËdJO “«
‰«—u½u Èd² vKO 6.3 ∫gO& Ÿu½
1 —Ëœ uÖbMKÐ “« «— s&ËdJO ¨bý œU−¹« © u® Èu! X¹“«—UÄ ÁœUH²Ý« 5Š —œ dÖ« •
ÆbOM( r( «— s&ËdJO È«b U¹ t²šUÝ
Ë ¨bOM( lD! s&ËdJO ‰UBð« t¹UÄ “« «d½¬ ¨bOM( v/ ÁœUH²Ý« s&ËdJO “« tJO½U“ •
2 ÆbOM( r( “MIN” jÝuð «— s&ËdJO È«b `DÝ

RQT8092

22
75

Per(22-26) 22 2/2/05, 3:46 PM

 ‫ﻧﻮارﻫﺎى ﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻮارﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاى ﺿﺒﻂ‬
ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« v2uLF ÈU¼—«u½ “« ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« g:Ä È«dÐ 2 U¹ 1 „œ Ëœ d¼ “« bO½«uð v ULý
—œU?' ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« v2Ë ¨b?M?ýU?Ð v g:Ä qÐU' ‰U² ÈU¼—«u?½ U?¹ ôUÐ XOHO UÐ ÈU¼—«u½
ÆbM „UÄ UN½¬ ÈË— “« ÈeOÇ U¹ Ë bM j³{ ÈeOÇ UN½¬ ÈË— dÐ v²Ý—bÐ X)O½ ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« v2uLF ÈU¼—«u½ “«
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

:‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬ ÁU?~?²?Ýœ s?¹« v?2Ë ¨b?M?ýU?Ð v? g?:?Ä q?ÐU?' ‰U?² ÈU¼—«u½ U¹ ôUÐ XOHO UÐ ÈU¼—«u½
Æœuý ŸËdý tKU"öÐ j³{ Uð bO½UÝdÐ «b²Ð« tÐ «— —«u½ ‰Ë« • Æb¼œ hO:Að «— UN½¬  UOuBš v²Ý—bÐ X)O½ —œU'
ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— ©[L, STOP] ∫vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® [L] fáÝ Ë [/ -, TAPE] tLœ •
‫[ ﺑﺮ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و‬c, DECK2] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1 .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬/ -, TAPE] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
.‫ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻰ را ﺑﺮاى ﺿﺒﻂ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ Æœuý v sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ
5¹UÄ ·dDÐ —«u½ “UÐ ÈË— Ë býUÐ ULý ÈËdÐË— Áb½uý j³{ ·dÞ tJ¹—uÞ —«u½ œuý v ŸËdý —Uœuš —uDÐ g:Ä ¨býUÐ Ábý Áœ«œ —«d' v²ÝU dÖ«
ÆbOM œ—«Ë «— býUÐ Æ©v)* pð œdJKLŽ®
ÆœdOÖ v —«d' “F:” ÈË— —Uœuš —uDÐ —«u½ XNł
‫[ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬c, DECK2] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬c, DECK1] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﻓﺸﺎر‬PLAY MODE] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 .‫را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻛﺎﺳﺖ را وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
∫b¹—«œ v ÁU~½ 5¹UÄ Ë bO¼œ v —UA" «— tLœ s¹« ULý t —UÐ d¼ ·dÞ ÈËdÐË— Áb½uý g:Ä ·dÞ tJ¹—uÞ «— —«u½
v¹uKł býUÐ 5¹UÄ ·dDÐ —«u½ “UÐ ÈË— Ë býUÐ ULý
ÆbOM œ—«Ë
.œuý v j³{ ·dÞ p¹ ∫ Æb¹bM³Ð XÝœ UÐ «— tEH×
.©fJŽdÐ ← ÊœdÐ uKł® b½uý v j³{ ·dÞ Ëœ d¼ ∫ ,
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺷﺮوع ﭘﺨﺶ‬/ -, TAPE] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
—uÞ tÐ “ ” XOF{Ë ¨œuý v Áœ«œ —UA" “[a REC]” tLœ t vU~M¼
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ÆbM v dOOGð “ ” tÐ —Uœuš
;R ↔ F: ∫bO¼œ v —UA" «— tLœ s¹« ULý t —UÐ d¼
.‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 3 .bý b¼«uš g:Ä v¹uKł ·dÞ ∫ F:
:‫ﺿﺒﻂ از رادﻳﻮ‬ .bý b¼«uš g:Ä v²AÄ ·dÞ ∫ ;R
©20 t×H @® ÆbOM vÐU¹ Ãu «— dE½ œ—u ÁU~²)¹«
:‫ﺿﺒﻂ از دﻳﺴﻚ‬
.bOM œ—«Ë «— bOM j³{ bO¼«uš v t ©v¹U¼® p)¹œ 1 ‫ﺑﺮاى ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺨﺶ‬
«— ([L, STOP]: vK« ÁU~²Ýœ) [L] fáÝ Ë [ :, DVD/CD] tLÖœ Æ©[ L, STOP] :vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® bO¼œ —UA" «— [L]
ÆbO¼œ —UA" ‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﻧﻮارﻫﺎى ﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬

ÆbOM ÁœU¬ «— v¼«u)œ p)¹œ j³{ X2UŠ 2 XÝ« Ábý »U:²½« l³M Ê«uMŽ tÐ TAPE v²'Ë
—œ «— 2–1 qŠ«d @] Ábý Èe¹— tU½dÐ ÈU¼ tFD' j³{ È«dÐ • Æb¹—«œ t~½ Ë Áœ«œ —UA" «— [PLAY MODE] tLœ
.[“©tM¹eÖ 32 Uð® g:Ä Èe¹— tU½dÐ ” ¨bO¼œ ÂU$« 16 t×H ∫b¹—«œ v ÁU~½ 5¹UÄ Ë bO¼œ v —UA" «— tLœ s¹« ULý t —UÐ d¼
ÆXÝ« n'u² p)¹œ b¹uý s¾LD
:‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻮار ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮار‬
«— ([L, STOP] :vK« ÁU~²Ýœ) [L] fáÝ Ë [/ -, TAPE] tLœ 1 .œuý v g:Ä ·dÞ p¹ :
ÆbO¼œ—UA" ©fJŽdÐ ← ÊœdÐ uKł® .b½uý v g:Ä ·dÞ Ëœ d¼ ∫
bOzU/ j³{ bO¼«uš v t v²ÝU Ë Áœ«œ —UA" «— ›c, DECK1¤ tLœ 2 Æœuý v n'u² ”uJF XLÝ t9Uš —œ g:Ä
ÆbOM œ—«Ë «— [L] t? v½U“ Uð b½uý v g:Ä vÄ —œ vÄ —uÞ tÐ —«u½ XLÝ Ëœ d¼ ∫
Æœuý Áœ«œ —UA" ©[L, STOP] :vK« ÁU~²Ýœ®
.‫ [[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺷﺮوع ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬REC] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 4
Ë Áœ«œ —«d' U¼ „œ “« «b d¼ —œ «— È—«u½ ¨»ËUM² —uDÐ —«u½ Ëœ tÐ Êœ«œ ‘uÖ È«dÐ
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﺿﺒﻂ‬
ÁU~²Ýœ® [L] tLœ Uð b½uý v g:Ä —dJ —uDÐ —«u½ Ëœ d¼ ÆbOM »U:²½« «— “ ”
ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— ([L, STOP] ∫vK« ÁU~²Ýœ) [L] tLœ
Æœuý Áœ«œ —UA" ©[L, STOP]: vK«
‫اﮔﺮ ﻧﻮار ﻗﺒﻞ از دﻳﺴﻚ ﲤﺎم ﺷﺪ‬
n'u² È«dÐ «— ([L, STOP] :vK« ÁU~²Ýœ ) [L] tLœ Æb¼bO t«œ« «— g:Ä p)¹œ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺮدن و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮدن ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
.bO¼œ —UA" ʬ Êœd —UA" «— ©uKł tÐ l¹dÝ® [f, 3 /FF] ©VIŽ tÐ XAÖdЮ [g, REW/ 4] tLœ
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ÆbO¼œ
v dOOGð t2U½U 2 tÐ j³{ ‰öš —œ —Uœuš —uDÐ ©t2U½U 5.1 Uð 3® t2U½U bMÇ lÐUM •
ÆbMÐU¹ ‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﲔ دك ﻫﺎ‬
ÈË— dÐ «b ÁœËb× XOHO Ë «b `DÝ —œ dOOGð ¨t½UÖbMÇ È«b ÁbM¹«e"« “« dOž tÐ • ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— ©[DECK 1/2] :vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® [PLAY MODE] tLœ
Æœ—«b½ ÈdOŁUð j³{
ÆbOM “UÐ j³{ ÂU~M¼ tÐ «— 1 „œ bO½«uð v/ ULý • ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
Ë uKł XŽdÝ UÐ «— d~¹œ „œ bO½«uð v/ bOM v j³{ U¼ „œ “« vJ¹ ÈË— tJOU~M¼ • Æœuý v lD' È« tE( È«dÐ —«u½ g:Ä bOM “UÐ «— d~¹œ „œ dÖ« •
Æb¹d³Ð VIŽ ÆbMM dOÖ U¹ Ábý Á—UÄ XÝ« sJ2 Ë bM²)¼ „“U½ tIO'œ 100 ‰uÞ UÐ ÈU¼—«u½ •
Æœd XHÝ «d½¬ g:Ä “« q³' b¹UÐ Ë Ábý Á—UÄ —U ‰uÞ —œ qý
Ô ÈU¼—«u½ •
‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﮔﻴﺮى از ﭘﺎك ﺷﺪن‬ „œ „dײ ÈUN²L)' —œ XÝ« sJ2 b½uA½ ÁœUH²Ý« XÝ—œ UN²½« ÊËbÐ ÈU¼—«u½ dÖ« •
A ·dÞ ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« —Uœuš —uDÐ fJŽdÐ g:Ä œdJKLŽ È«dÐ VÝUM ÈU¼—«u½ “« ÆbMM dOÖ
tÐUA È« tKOÝË U¹ v²ýuÖ êOÄ p¹ “«
ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« Ábz«“ 7)Jý È«dÐ
B ·dÞ Ábz«“ A ·dÞ Ábz«“

‫ﺑﺮاى ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺠﺪد روى ﻛﺎﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪه‬

ÆbO½UýuáÐ V)Ç —«u½ UÐ «— Ábý t²)Jý q×

‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺎﻛـ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻜـ ﻧﻮار‬

V)Ç —«u½ Æ[L] fáÝ Ë [/ -, TAPE] tLœ .1

ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— ([L, STOP] :vK« ÁU~²Ýœ)
ÆbO¼œ —«d' 2 „œ qš«œ «— È« Ábý j³{ —«u½ .2
Æœ—«b½ œułË 1 „œ —œ È—«u½ t b¹uý s¾LD
RQT8092
Æb¹—«œ t~½ Ë Áœ«œ —UA" ”uJF X2UŠ »U:²½« È«dÐ «— [PLAY MODE] tLœ .3
ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— vK« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— [a REC] .4
21
76

Per(20-21) 21 2/1/05, 7:53 PM

 ‫رادﻳﻮ‬

©vK« ÁU~²Ýœ jI"® AM ‫ ﮔﺎم ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻰ‬7

ëu« tÐ «d½¬ bO½«uð v ULý v2Ë ¨býUÐ v Èeðd¼uKO 9 È« t½Uš—U rOEMð ÂUÖ s¹«
ÆbO¼œ dOOGð Èeðd¼uKO 10 Uð v²"U¹—œ BAND, TUNER , TAPE
ÆbOM »U:²½« «— “FM” XOF{Ë Æ1
Æb¹—«bN~½ Ë Áœ«œ —UA" «— [BAND, TUNER] tLœ Æ2 DECK 1/2
REC , DVD/CD

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
tLœ 7ý«œ t~½ Æb¼œ v ÊUA½ «— v½uM f½Ud" q'«bŠ g¹U/ t×H tO½UŁ bMÇ “« bFÐ
ÆbM v dOOGð eO½ ÂUÖ Ë Áœd dOOGð f½Ud" q'«bŠ ÆbO¼œ t«œ« «— , STOP
ÆbOM —«dJð «— ôUÐ qŠ«d ¨vK« ÂUÖ tÐ 7AÖdÐ È«dÐ , REW/ ,
, /FF
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ , DECK2
tE"UŠ —œ q³' “« ULý t «— v¹UN)½Ud" ¨“v)½Ud" ÂUÖ”  ULOEMð Êœ«œ dOOGð “« bFÐ , DECK1
ÆbOM rOEMð Á—UÐËœ «— UN½¬ Æb½uý v „UÄ b¹œuÐ Áœd ÁdOš–
DECK 1 DECK 2
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮج‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
Æœ—«œ œułË U¼ ÁU~²)¹« rOEMð È«dÐ ‘Ë— Ëœ
b?M? X?"U?¹—œ b?½«u?ð v? »U?¹ Ãu? t? v?¹UN¼U~²)¹« vU9 :‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
Æœuý v rOEMð
—«d' t v³Oðdð Ë rOEMð UÐ «— v¹UN¼U~²)¹« bO½«uð v ULý :‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﻮر دﺳﺘﻰ‬
ÆbOM »U:²½« «— b½—«œ
Æœuý rOEMð AM Ë FM ÈU¼b½UÐ —œ b½«u²O ÁU~²)¹« 15 Uð 1 2 3 TUNER PGM
:‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬ 4 5 6
ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— [TUNER/AUX] ‫“ دﻛﻤﻪ‬AM” U¹ “FM” »U:²½« È«dÐ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬارى‬
7 8 9
‫ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬ 0 10 PLAY MODE
ÆbO¼œ ÂU$« AM Ë FM È«dÐ —UÐ p¹ «— d¹“ œ—«u

‫رادﻳﻮ‬
, DVD/CD
ÆbOM vÐU¹ Ãu œuý v ŸËdý tO2Ë« rOEMð tJOzUł “« «— f½Ud" :‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬ TUNER/AUX
, TAPE

‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬TUNER PGM] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬

.‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
rOEMð «— b½uý X"U¹—œ UN2U½U o¹dÞ “« bM½«uð v t «— v¹UN¼U~²)¹« vU9 »U¹ Ãu
.‫آﺧﺮﻳﻦ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬Æ ÆbM v

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﻮر دﺳﺘﻰ‬ , REW/ , ,

, /FF
ÆbOM rOEMð —UÐ p¹ È«dÐ «— U¼ ÁU~²)¹«
Æ©bOMO³Ð «— XÝ«— {® ‫ﺑﺮ روى اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1 SHIFT

.‫[ را ﻓﺸـﺎر دﻫـﻴـﺪ‬TUNER PGM] + [SHIFT] 2

‫“ در ﺣﺎل ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن اﺳﺖ‬PGM” ‫ﺿﻤﻦ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
.‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
fáÝ Ë Áœ«œ —UA" «— [f, 3/FF] U¹ [g, REW/4] VOðdð 5L¼ tÐ
ÆbO¼œ —UA" «— [TUNER PGM]+[SHIFT]
„UÄ ‰U½U ʬ —œ œułu ÁU~²)¹« œuý rOEMð Ϋœb− ‰U½U p¹ —œ Èd~¹œ ÁU~²)¹« dÖ«
Æœuý v
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر‬FM” ‫“ ﻳﺎ‬AM”‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬TUNER/AUX] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫)[ را‬, 3 /FF] ‫([ ﻳﺎ‬, REW/44] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪد دو رﻗﻤﻲ‬
.[2]@[1]@[g10] ∫12 ‰U¦
3
‫رادﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮج ﻳﺎﺑﻰ دﺳﺘﻰ‬
([BAND, TUNER] :‫[ ﻳﺎ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬TUNER/AUX] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
.‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬AM” ‫“ ﻳﺎ‬FM” ‫را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
Æœuý v sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ
‫[ ﻳﺎ‬g, REW/4 4]: ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]([ ﻳﺎ ])[ )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬ 2
1 .‫[( را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬f, 3 /FF]
([f, 3/FF]U¹ [g, REW/4] ∫vK« ÁU~²Ýœ® [)] U¹ [(] tLœ
vÐU¹ Ãu ÆbM —Uœuš vÐU¹ Ãu tÐ ŸËdý f½Ud" Uð b¹—«bN~½ Ë Áœ«œ —UA" «—
2 Æœuý v n'u² v¼U~²)¹« 7"U¹ ÂU~M¼ tÐ
g¹U/ “TUNED”  —U³Ž œuý v vÐU¹ Ãu v¹u¹œ«— ÁU~²)¹« p¹ t vU~M¼
Æœuý v Áœ«œ
“ST”  —U³Ž býUÐ Êbý X"U¹—œ ‰UŠ —œ v¹u¹d²Ý« FM v2UÝ—« Ãu p¹ t vU~M¼
Æœuý v Áœ«œ g¹U/
‫ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬FM ‫ اﮔﺮ ﭘﺎرازﻳﺖ در‬7
.‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬MONO” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬PLAY MODE] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
ÆbÐU¹ v g¼U X¹“«—UÄ Ë Ábý »U:²½« ‰«—u½u  —u tÐ «b býUÐ nOF{ X"U¹—œ t vU~M¼
ÆbO¼œ —UA" X2UŠ s¹« uG2 È«dÐ «— [PLAY MODE] tLœ «œb−
Æœuý v uG2 “MONO” XOF{Ë bM dOOGð f½Ud" dÖ« 5MâL¼

RQT8092

20
77

Per(20-21) 20 2/1/05, 7:53 PM

 “Video” ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬7
(4:3) ÈœUŽ X³ ½ UÐ Êu¹e¹uKð :4:3 Pan&Scan • TV Aspect
b½UýuáЫ— t×H* ÂU9 Uð œuý v Áb¹dÐ d¹uBð ÈU¼ Á—UM ÆbOM »U ²½« œuš Êu¹e¹uKð UÐ VÝUM «— vLOEMð
Æ©œuý lM p ¹œ jÝuð qLŽ s¹« tJM¹« d~®
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

(4:3) ÈœUŽ X³ ½ UÐ Êu¹e¹uKð :4:3 Letterbox •

Æœuý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ ÁbOA X:UŠ tÐ d¹uBð

(16:9) Áœd² Ö t×H* Êu¹e¹uKð :16:9 •

Standard (Direct View TV) • TV Type
LCD TV/Projector • CRT Projector • ÆbOM »U ²½« 5OFð VÝUM —uDÐ Êu¹e¹uKð Ÿu½ È«dÐ
Plasma TV • Projection TV •
100ms • 80ms • 60ms • 40ms • 20ms • 0ms • Time Delay
UÐ «b* dÖ« ¨ULÝöÄ g¹U/ p¹ tÐ ‰UBð« ÂU~M¼
ÆbOM rOEMð «d½¬ X O½ ÊUeL¼ d¹uBð
Automatic • Still Mode
ÆXÝ« 5zUÄ d¹uBð XOHO v:Ë ¨X O½ —Uð œU¹“ d¹uBð :Field • Æb¼œ v ÊUA½ ÁUðu nHuð ÂU~M¼ tÐ «— d¹uBð Ÿu½
Æœuý —Uð d¹uBð XÝ« sJ2 v:Ë ¨XÝ« ôUÐ d¹uBð XOHO vK —uDÐ :Frame •
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ‬

.PAL Êu¹e¹uKð tÐ ‰UBð« ÂU~M¼ ∫PAL60 • NTSC Disc Output

ÆNTSC Êu¹e¹uKð tÐ ‰UBð« ÂU~M¼ ∫NTSC • PAL 60 vłËdš b½uý v g Ä NTSC ÈUNJ ¹œ tJOU~M¼
ÆbýUÐ v È« t½Uš—U rOEMð “PAL60” ∫ vÐuMł ÈUI¹dR¬Ë t½UO ÈUOݬ ¨X¹u¨ÈœuFÝ ÊU² ÐdŽ È«dÐ ® ©ÆÈd¹uBð ÈU¼ r² OÝ ¨7 t×H* @® bOM »U ²½« «— NTSC U¹
“Audio” ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬7
Up to 96 kHz • Up to 48 kHz • ©26 t×H* @® PCM Digital Output
PCM • Bitstream • ©26 t×H* @® Dolby Digital
PCM • Bitstream • ©26 t×H* @® DTS Digital Surround
Bitstream • PCM • ©26 t×H* @® MPEG\6
Off • Dynamic Range Compression
·U* býUÐ r v¹«b* `DÝ s¹dðôUÐ Ë v¹«b* `DÝ s¹dð 5zUÄ Êœd ÁœdAR o¹dÞ “« «b* dÖ« v²Š :On •
v³:«œ UÐ jIR® ÆXÝ« VÝUM ÂU~M¼ Vý —œ Êu¹e¹uKð ÈUýU9 È«dÐ ÆbM v rOEMð «— «b* ÊœuÐ
©bM v —U ‰U²O−¹œ
“Display” ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬7
English •\5 • Menu Language
Nederlands • Pуcский • Português • Español • Italiano • Deutsch • Français • English •\6
Off • On • On-Screen Messages
“Others” ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬7
No • Yes • QUICK SETUP
Re-initialize Setting\5
vNÐUA e— ÎUHD: Æœuý v Áœ«œ ÊUA½ e— t×H* býUÐ Ábý rOEMð ©18 t×H* @® Ratings dÖ« :Yes • (Re-initialise Setting\6 U¹)
• ÆbOM ‘uUš Ë sýË— «— ÁU~²Ýœ ¨bý u× t×H* ÈË— “« “INIT” tJM¹« “« bFÐ ÆbOM œ—«Ë «— ÆœœdÖ v dÐ tO:Ë«  ULOEMð tÐ Setup ÈuM d¹œUI vU9
No •

\6
‫ آﺳﻴﺎى ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ وآﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎى ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻰ‬،‫ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى‬ ‫\ آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬5

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻛﺪ زﺑﺎن‬
u Öu K ð :7776 v ¹ U O ½ U Ë — :8673 v ¹ U O ½ «u ² O : :8368 v ÝË U ¼ :8484 vMOÇ :7168 È“ U Ð ¬ :6566
ÈbMK¹Uð :7784 v ÝË — :7074 È « t O ½Ë b I  :8385 Ëd³¼ :6783 v Ýd  :6978 —UR¬ :6590
v²³ð :7782 v ¹ «u  U Ý :7575 È— U J Ý U Ö « œ U  :8375 ÈbM¼ :8475   «Ë d  :6570 v ¹ U I ¹d R ¬ :8582
U O M ¹d ~ O ð :7773 X ¹d J ½ U Ý :7589 v¹ôU :8376 È— U −  :8482 pÇ :7378 v¹UO½U³:¬ :7289
U ~ ½u ð :7778 ÈbMKðUJÝ« :6765 ÂôU¹ôU :8373 ÈbMK ¹¬ :8479 v — U / « œ :7365 p ¹— U N  ¬ :6583
v d ð :7865 v Ðd * :7578 v²:U :8387 v ¹ U ¹e ½ Ë b ½ « :8487 ÈbMK¼ :7384 v Ðd Ž :6565
v M L d ð :7879   « Ë d  Ë »d * :8185 È— u z U  :8386 t ½ U Г b M Ç :6679 v OK~½« :6985 v M — « :8381
Èu ð :7869 U ½u ý :7583 v ð «— U  :8378 È b M :d ¹ « :8473 u ² ½ «d á Ý « :8083 vUݬ :6869
v M ¹ «d  « :7265 ÈbMÝ :7585 È Ë « b :u  :8382 v¹UO:U²¹« :8469 v ¹ U O ½u ² Ý « :6665 Ê «— U 1 ¬ :7079
Ë œ— « :7273 v½öOÝ :7282 v :u G  :8372 vMÄ«˛ :7565 v ¹Ë — U R :8084 v ½ U − ¹ U З – ¬ :7089
p Г « :7185 v  «u K Ý « :7579 Ë—uzU½ :8379 v ¹ «Ë U ł :6865 v−OR :6682 Èd O J A Ð :6577
v  U M ² ¹Ë :7876 v ¹ U O ½u K Ý « :7577 v:Uá½ :9072 v¹«œU½U :7576 Èb½öMR :8065 pÝUÐ :8590
v Ä ôË :6789 v : U u Ý :6779 È˛Ëd½ :8471 Èd O L A  :8277 È u ½ «d R :6678 v:U~MÐ :8575
Èe : Ë :8779 v¹UO½UáÝ« :7679 U ¹— Ë « :9085 v ½ U ² H «e H :8285 È b M :e ¹ d R :6671 v ½ U ðu Ð :7982
·u :Ë :7465 fO½b½UÝ :7665 u²AÄ :7387 v ½ U ² Ýe O Hd H :6669 v O:UÖ :6890 È— U N O Ð :7165
U ÝË ˛ :7487 v K O Š «u Ý :7686 v Ý— U R :6582 È « Ád  :8279 v ½ U ² łd Ö :7789 v ½ U ² ¹d Ð :7383
vLOK :7473 È b zu Ý :7684 v½U² N: :7065 È œd  :7779 v½U*¬ :8076 È— U G K Ð :6588
U ÐË — u ¹ :8979 ¯u : U Ö U ð :7285 v : U G ðd Ä :7082 v Ýu z ô :7678 v ½ U ½u ¹ :6672 t d Ð :7178
RQT8092 u :Ë “ :6976 pOłUð :7775 vÐU−MÄ :7176 5ðô :8872 È b M K M ¹d Ö :8476 v ÝË — ö Ð :6983
:7771 :7073 :8377 :8465 :6979
19
vKOUð p³ v ¹ U ¹u ð ô È « t z u Ö «— U Ä v łu ³  U 
—UðUð :7783 f ½ U  Ë — u ² ¹ «— :8679 ôU~MO: :8365 v ð «d − Ö :8472 v ¹ U O ½u : U ð U  :6984
78

Per(17-19) 19 2/3/05, 11:07 AM

 ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ‬

‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﻣﻨﻮى راه اﻧـﺪازى ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬SETUP] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬ 1

.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
¨b?O?ýU?Ð Áœd?J?½ r?O?E?Mð «— ©6 t?×?H?+ @® QUICK SETUP X?O?F?{Ë d?Ö«
Æœuý v d¼Uþ QUICK SETUP t×H+

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫[ ﺑﺮاى آﻏﺎز‬-] ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ و‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫[ ﺑﺮاى آﻏﺎز‬ENTER] ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ و‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
1 2 3
‫[ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ENTER] ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب و‬8, 9, /, -] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 4
.‫ﳕﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬ 4 5 6
ÆbO¼œ —UA rOEMð È«dÐ «— —«œ Á—ULý ÈU¼ tLœ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬارى‬
7 8 9
‫ﺷﺪه‬
0 10
Setup‫∫ ﻣﻨﻮى‬‰U¦

Setup ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ Disc Audio English
Video Subtitle Automatic ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬
Audio Menus English
Display
Others Advanced Disc Review Intro Mode

, , , ,

‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ‬

Ratings Level 8
ENTER
to select and press ENTER RETURN to exit

ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [SETUP]+[SHIFT] ¨ÃËdš È«dÐ •

—«d2 ‘UÐ ÁœU¬ XFUŠ ÈË— «— ÁU~²Ýœ dÖ« v²Š bM½U v v2UÐ ‰UF  ULOEMð • SETUP
ÆbO¼œ
ÆbMýUÐ v È« t½Uš—U rOEMð Ábý ÁbOA jš UN½¬ d¹“ t v¹U¼ tM¹eÖ • SHIFT
vÐuÐ —«œ t¹UÝ ÁœËb× —œ «— U¼ tM¹eÖ  ULOEMð QUICK SETUP XOF{Ë
Æb¼œ v ÂU$«

“Disc” ‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬7
\3
Other • \2
Original • \1
©vÐU²½« ÊUГ® • English • Audio
ÆbOM »U²½« «— ÊUГ Ÿu½
\3
Other • \1
©vÐU²½« ÊUГ® • English • \4
Automatic • Subtitle
ÆbOM »U²½« «— f¹u½d¹“ ÊUГ Ÿu½
English • Menus
\1
©vÐU²½« ÊUГ® • ÆbOM »U²½« p7¹œ ÈU¼uM È«dÐ «— ÊUГ Ÿu½
QUICK SETUP “« ÊUГ ÈuM dOOGð
\3
Other • Æb¼œ dOOGð «—  ULOEMð s¹« b½«uð v eO½
ÆbM v —Ëd «— È« tU½dÐ U¹ Ê«uMŽ d¼ :Intro Mode • Advanced Disc Review
v½U“ tK+U tIO2œ 10 d¼ sOMâL¼ tJKÐ bM v —Ëd «— È« tU½dÐ U¹ Ê«uMŽ d¼ UNMð t½ :Interval Mode • ©12 t×H+ @®
ÆXý«œ b¼«uš tU½dÐ U¹ Ê«uMŽ p¹ sOÐ
©býUÐ Ábý »U²½« 8 `DÝ tJOU~M¼® ÈbMÐ tł—œ rOEMð Ratings
ÈUNJ7¹œ gÄ “« ÈdOÖuKł È«dÐ :0 Lock All • 7 Uð 1 “« • 8 No Limit • DVD gÄ Êœd œËb× È«dÐ «— tł—œ Ê«eO
Ábý ÈbMÐ tł—œ Ê«eO ÊËbÐ ÆbOM rOEMð Èd¹uBð
©býUÐ Ábý »U²½« 0 Uð 7 `DÝ tJOU~M¼® ÈbMÐ tł—œ dOOGð ÆbOM ‰U³½œ «— t×H+ ÈË— ÈUNKLFF«—u²Ýœ •
Temporary Unlock • Changel Level • Change Password • Unlock Player •
Æœuý v Áœ«œ ÊUA½ —u³Ž e— t×H+ ¨b¹œd »U²½« «— tł—œ Ê«eO tJOU~M¼
ÆbOM ‰U³½œ «— g¹U/ t×H+ ÈË— ÈUNKLFF«—u²Ýœ
.‫رﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮر ﺧﻮد را ﻓﺮاﻣﻮش ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
ÊUA½ ÂUOÄ t×H+ œ—«œ býUÐ Ábý œ—«Ë ULý ÁU~²Ýœ —œ t È« tł—œ Ê«eO “« d²AOÐ Èd¹uBð DVD p¹ dÖ«
Æœuý v Áœ«œ
ÆbOM ‰U³½œ «— g¹U/ t×H+ ÈË— ÈUNKLFF« —u²Ýœ fáÝ Ë Áœd œ—«Ë «— œuš —u³Ž e—
Æœuý v »U²½« p7¹œ ÈË—dÐ vK+« ÊUГ \2 vÐU²½« ÊUГ \1
ÆbOM œ—«Ë «— 19 t×H+ ‰Ëbł —œ tÞuÐd b Á—ULý \3 Chinese : ‫آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬
ÈË— dÖ«® œuý v d¼Uþ ÊUГ ʬ —œ f¹u½d¹“ ¨býU³½ ”d²Ýœ qÐU2 “Audio” vÐU²½« ÊUГ dÖ« \4 Ë Spanish Ë Italian Ë German Ë French: ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬
Æ©býUÐ ”d²Ýœ qÐU2 p7¹œ DutchË Russian Ë Portuguese
RQT8092

18
79

Per(17-19) 18 2/1/05, 7:50 PM

 ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ‬-‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى‬ENTER] ‫ و‬،‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ‬8 ,9 ,/ ,-] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3 .‫[ را ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬FUNCTIONS] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫[ را ﺑـﺮاى‬ENTER] ‫ و‬،‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨـﺎب ﻣـﻨـﻮ‬8, 9, ;, :] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬ 2
ÆbO¼œ —UA rOEMð È«dÐ «— —«œ Á—ULý ÈU¼ tLœ .‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﳕﻮدن ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ى ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮى اﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

‫ﺑﺮاى ﻧﺸﺎن دادن ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺷﺪه‬ Thumbnail ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺷﺮوع از ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اى وﻳﮋه‬ Program, Group,
Title, Chapter, Track,
(U¼ f¹u½d¹“ Êœd ÷uŽ ¨13 t×H+ @) Subtitle Playlist, Content
‫ ﺑﺮاى ﻓﺮاﺧﻮاﻧﻰ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮروى‬RAM ‫ﺑﺮاى رد ﻛﺮدن زﻳﺎد ﻳﺎ ﻛـﻢ )ﮔﺬﺷﺖ زﻣﺎن ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاى‬
‫ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬DVD ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ‬ (Time Slip ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
∫t½UA½ p¹ v½«uš«d È«dÐ Marker (VR) ÊU“ d?~½UA½ g¹U/ È«d?Ð —UÐËœ «— [ENTER] tLœ 1
ÆbO¼œ —UA dOOGð
[ENTER] tLœ @ [8, 9] tLœ Ë Áœ«œ —UA ÊU“ »U²½« È«dÐ «— [8, 9] tLœ 2 Time
©È« t¹Ë«“ bMÇ XOF{Ë UÐ UNJ6¹œ® ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [ENTER] fáÝ (+R/+RW e−Ð)
‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زاوﻳﻪ‬ Angle Ë Áœ«œ —UA v¼œ XŽdÝ È«dÐ «— [8, 9] tLœ •
Æb¹—«bN~½
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬ Rotate Picture (Time Search) ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺷﺮوع از زﻣﺎن ﺧﺎص‬
‫ﺑﺮاى روﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﳕﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ ﺳﭙﺮى ﺷﺪه‬
(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬30 – 0) ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ اﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬ Slideshow (vðu+ ÈU¼ tFD1 Êœd ÷uŽ ¨13 t×H+ @)
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ‬

Audio
©bOMO³Ð «— t×H+ 5¹UÄ @® Other Settings ‫ ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻮع دﻳﺴﻚ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻰ‬WMA MP3

Other Settings
»U²½« «— “(625p U¹) 576p” U¹ “(525p U¹) 480p” XOF{Ë dÖ« ‫ ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬RAM DVD-V
d?¹uB?ð È«dÐ q?¹b³?ð ‘Ë— ¨©bO?MO?³Ð «— X?Ý«— XL?Ý @® ¨b¹« Áœd? –
©0.1 ÈU¼ ÂUÖ U¹® dЫdÐ “x1.4” Uð dЫdÐ “x0.6” “« Play Speed
ÆbOM »U²½« «—  U¹u²× Ÿu½ UÐ VÝUM vłËdš
Play Menu L
bOM v gÄ «— NTSC p6¹œ tJOU~M¼
Ë Áœd v¹U?ÝUMý «— r?KO —œ t?O½UŁ —œ f?JŽ 24 ∫©ÈœUŽ® Auto1 (13 t×H+ @® Repeat
ÆbM v q¹b³ð v³ÝUM —uDÐ «d½¬ ©sUÝ d¹uBð XL61® RAM JPEG e−Ð
—œ fJŽ 30 Uð XOKÐU1 rKO —œ tO½UŁ —œ fJŽ 24 dÐ ÁËöŽ ∫Auto2 ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻜﺮار ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻰ ﺧﺎص‬
Transfer A-B Repeat
ÆbýUÐ v «—«œ eO½ «— tO½UŁ
Mode
Æb?O?¼œ —U?A? t9Uš Ë ŸËdý tDI½ —œ «— [ENTER] t?Lœ
ÈU¼ r?K?O? Ë ¨Auto2 U?¹ Auto1 “« ÁœU?H²?Ý« t?J?O?U~?M?¼ Video ∫ ÆbO¼œ —UA uGF È«dÐ «— [ENTER] tLœ «œb−
ÆbO¹U/ »U²½« «— XFUŠ s¹« XÝ« Á«dL¼ qJA UÐ v¹uzb¹Ë
RAM e−Ð
bOM v gÄ «— PAL p6¹œ tJOU~M¼ ‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪد‬5 ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬارى ﺗﺎ‬
—uDÐ «d½¬ Ë Áœd v¹UÝU?Mý «— rKO —œ tO½UŁ —œ fJŽ 25 ∫ Auto
Æ b M  v  q ¹ b³ ð v ³ Ý U M  ‘d¹cÄ ÁœU¬ ÊuM« ÁU~²Ýœ® ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [ENTER] tLœ
b½uý v?/ Áœ«œ ÊUA½ »uš Èd?¹uBð  U?¹u²× t?JOU~?M¼ ∫Video ©ÆbýUÐ v U¼ t½UA½
ÆbOM »U²½« «d½¬ t?DI½ —œ® [ENTER] t?Lœ ∫X?OF1u? p¹ È—«c?Ö X?öŽ È«dÐ
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— ©Á«u)œ
Audio Menu L »U²½« È«dÐ «— [/, -] tLœ ∫d~¹œ XOF1u È—«cÖ XöŽ È«dÐ Marker
©23 t×H+ @® Advanced Surround ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [ENTER] tLœ @ “ ”
@ [/, -] tLœ ∫t½UA½ p¹ v½«uš«d È«dÐ
‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪن دﻳﺎﻟﻮﮔﻬﺎى ﻓﻴﻠﻢ را آﺳﺎن ﻣﻰ ﺳﺎزد‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [ENTER] tLœ
U¹ ‰U½U –3 ¨MPEG ¨DTS, Dolby Digital) DVD-V Dialogue @ [/, -] tLœ ∫t½UA½ p¹ Êœd „UÄ È«dÐ
©Èed ‰U½U —œ Ábý j³{ ¯uFU¹œ UÐ ¨dðôUÐ Enhancer ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [CANCEL]+[SHIFT] tLœ
On ↔ Off ÆbM v/ qLŽ vœUBð gÄ Ë Ábý Èe¹— tU½dÐ gÄ ‰öš —œ •
©23 t×H+ @® Multi Re-master ‫ ﻣﺮور ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺨﺶ‬،12 t×H+ @] Advanced
ÆbAÐ v œu³NÐ ÂdÖ v¹«b+ bOFuð È«dÐ «— «b+ vłËdš Sound [(ADVANCED DISC REVIEW) Disc Review
On ↔ Off Enhancement Picture Menu L
Display Menu L Normal
«— d¹ËUBð vÖdOðË bM v ·U+ «— d¹ËUBð ∫Cinema1
Details ،،Date ،Off : JPEG Display Menu L
Information ÆbAÐ v œu³NÐ vÐuÐ
©ÂUÖ 2 UЮ –60 Uð 0 d¹ËUBð vÖdOðË bM v `{«Ë «— d¹ËUBð ∫Cinema2
Subtitle Position ÆbAÐ v œu³NÐ vÐuÐ «—
–7 Uð 0 “« ،Auto Subtitle Brightness Animation
Dynamic
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب اﻧﺪازه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ »U²½« È«dÐ «— [ENTER] tLœ® User
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺧﻮد‬ Just Fit Zoom Picture Mode
©bOMO?³Ð «— t×H+ 5¹UÄ @® ©ÆbO¼œ —UA “Picture Adjustment”
‫ﺑﺮاى زوم ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻄﻮر دﺳﺘﻰ‬ Manual Zoom Picture Adjustment
Sharpness Contrast
On ↔ Off RAM DVD-V VCD Bit Rate Display
©Colour ‫ ®ﻳﺎ‬Color\1
\2
Brightness
Auto ،On ،Off GUI See-through ©ÆbOM rOEMð «— ÁdOðË sýË— ÈU¼ XL61® Gamma
+3 ‫– ﺗﺎ‬3 ‫از‬ GUI Brightness tMO“ Èu1 ÈU¼ X¹“«—UÄ ® Depth Enhancer
©ÆbOM ”U6Š« d²NÐ «— d¹uBð oLŽ Uð b¼œ v g¼U «—
Other Menu L NTSCp6¹œ •
↔ ©fOFd²M¹«® (525i\2 ‫ )ﻳﺎ‬480i\1
(18 t×H+ @® Setup ©uOÝdÖËdÄ® (525p\2 ‫ )ﻳﺎ‬480p\1
g??Ä È«d?Ð «— “Play as Data Disc” X??O?F?{Ë • Play as DVD-VR PAL p6¹œ •
p?¹ gÄ U¹ DVD-RAM ÈË—dÐ JPEG ÈU?NK¹U Play as HighMAT ↔ ©fOFd²M¹«® (625i\2 ‫ )ﻳﺎ‬576i\1
©uOÝdÖËdÄ (625p\2 ‫ )ﻳﺎ‬576p\1 Video Output
œd??J? K? L? Ž “« ÁœU??H? ²? Ý« ÊËb?Ð HighMAT p??6? ¹œ U¹ Mode
ÆbOM »U²½« HighMAT U¹ “(525pU¹) 480p” XOF{Ë tJOU~M¼
Play as Data Disc bOzUð Ád−MÄ p¹ ¨bOM v »U²½« «— “(625p U¹) 576p”
RQT8092
—UÖ“UÝ uOÝdÖËdÄ vłËdš tÐ dÖ« jI Æœuý v d¼Uþ
17 »U²½« «— “Yes” XOF{Ë bOýUÐ v qB² Êu¹e¹uKð UÐ
ÆbOM
80
‫ آﺳﻴﺎى ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ وآﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎى ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻰ‬،‫ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى‬ \2
‫\ آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬1

Per(17-19) 17 2/2/05, 6:02 PM

 ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬/ ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى‬

©12 ‫ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ ®@ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬CD ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬

VCD CD WMA MP3
1 2 3
ÆbOM$ Èe¹— tU½dÐ bO½«uð v p0¹œ ÈË— «— U¼ tM¹eÖ vU9
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬ 4 5 6
‫[( را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ دﻳﺴﻚ‬1]–[5]) ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار‬ 1 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬارى‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 7 8 9

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺪه‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 2 0 10 PLAY MODE
.(‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ‬WMA MP3 )
CANCEL
‫ رﻗﻤﻰ‬2 ‫• ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪد‬
[5] @ [2] @[h10]∫25 ö¦ , DVD/CD
[ENTER] @ [5] @ [2] WMA MP3 JPEG
ÆbOM$ —«dJð U¼ tM¹eÖ d¹UÝ Èe¹— tU½dÐ È«dÐ «— 2 Ë 1 qŠ«d •
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬:, DVD/CD] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
, , , ,
‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺟﻬﺖ دار‬ ENTER
«œb− fáÝ ¨bO¼œ —UA «— [8, 9] Ë [ENTER] b¹UÐ tM¹eÖ p¹ »U²½« È«dÐ FUNCTIONS
ÆbO¼œ —UA Êœd$ X³Ł È«dÐ «— [ENTER]
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA tM¹eÖ p¹ »U²½« È«dÐ «— [8, 9] tL$œ Æ1
SHIFT
ÆbOM$ —«dJð «— ôUÐ 2 Ë 1 qŠ«d Æ2

‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬/ ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى‬

‫ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA tM¹eÖ p¹ »U²½« È«dÐ «— [8, 9] tL$œ Æ1
È«dÐ «— [8, 9, /, -] U¹® Áœ«œ —UA «— [CANCEL]+[SHIFT] tL$œ Æ2
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [ENTER] fáÝ Ë ©Áœ«œ —UA “Clear” »U²½«
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
«— [ENTER] Ë Áœd$ »U²½« [8, 9, /, -] UÐ «— “Clear all” XOF{Ë ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬/ ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬/‫ﺷﺮوع ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى ﺷﺪه‬
:‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ در ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻰ ﻣﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﮕﺮاﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻜﻰ از ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ اﺗﻔﺎق اﻓﺘﺪ‬ ‫درﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
Æœuý “UÐ v½uM$ p0¹œ vMOÝ – .‫[را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺣﺎﻟﺖ دﳋﻮاه ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬PLAY MODE] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
Æœuý ‰UF Èd~¹œ l³M – Æb½uý v d¼Uþ VOðdð tÐ vœUBð gÄ Ë Èe¹— tU½dÐ ÈU¼ t×H
ÆœdO~Ð —«d) ‘UÐ ÁœU¬ X+UŠ ÈË— ÁU~²Ýœ – ∫bO¼œ —UA «— tL$œ s¹« t$ —UÐ d¼
Æœuý ‘uUš U¹ sýË— CD X+UŠ – ©ÈœUŽ gÄ® ‘uUš vœUBð Èe¹— tU½dÐ
‘uUš CD X+UŠ tJO+UŠ —œ® bOM$ »U²½« v²Ýœ —uDÐ «— Èd~¹œ p0¹œ –
Æ©býUÐ
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى و ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬ ÆbO¼œ —UA —UÐ bMÇ n)uð X+UŠ —œ «— [PLAY MODE] tL$œ
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‬CD ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
VCD CD
«— p0¹œ ÈË— ÈU¼ tM¹eÖ vU9 bO½«uð v vœUBð X+UŠ —œ gÄ XOF)u —œ
ÆbOM$ gÄ

ÈË— Ábý »U²½« ©ÈU¼® tM¹eÖ bO½«uð v vœUBð X+UŠ —œ gÄ XOF)u —œ
DVD-V WMA MP3 JPEG (‫ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬32 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى ﭘﺨﺶ )ﺗﺎ‬
ÆbOM$ gÄ «— p0¹œ ‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‬CD ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
DVD-V VCD CD WMA MP3 JPEG
DVD-V WMA MP3 JPEG 1 ÆbOM$ Èe¹— tU½dÐ p0¹œ ÈË— «— U¼ tM¹eÖ vU9 bO½«uð v gÄ XOF)u —œ
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﻮان‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ WMA ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه‬ DVD-V 1
Random Playback DVD-V ∫‰U¦
‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ( ﻳﺎ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻓﺸﺎر‬ENTER] ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ‬MP3 JPEG )
Choose a title. .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Title 1 DVD-V ∫‰U¦
Program Playback
0 ~ 9 to select PLAY to start
No.
Choose a title and chapter.
Disc T/G C/T
‫ رﻗﻤﻰ‬2 ‫• ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪد‬
1 Play [5] @ [2] @[h10]∫25 ö¦
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬:, DVD/CD] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 Clear
@ [5] @ [2] WMA MP3 JPEG
Clear all

ALL-DISC ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬ [ENTER]

(12 ‫ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬CD ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
to select and press ENTER PLAY to start

VCD CD WMA MP3

ÆbOM$ gÄ vœUBð  —uBÐ bO½«uð v «— UNJ0¹œ vU9 ÈË— ÈU¼ tM¹eÖ vU9 ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ 2
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬:, DVD/CD] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ENTER] ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ‬WMA MP3 JPEG ) ‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Random Playback CD ∫‰U¦ .(‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ÆbOM$ —«dJð U¼ tM¹eÖ d¹UÝ Èe¹— tU½dÐ È«dÐ «— 2 Ë 1 qŠ«d •
Press PLAY to start
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴـﺪ‬:, DVD/CD] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬ 3

Æ©17 t×H @® Other Menu —œ «— “Play as Data Disc” XOF{Ë ÆbýUÐ v ÁœUH²Ý« qÐU) dOž vœUBð gÄ Ë Èe¹— tU½dÐ È«dÐ HighMAT p0¹œ • RQT8092

16
81

Per(16) 16 2/2/05, 8:49 AM

 RAM ‫ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى‬ HighMATTM ‫ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى‬
RAM WMA MP3 JPEG
Æb½uý v d¼Uþ bMýUÐ Ábý j³{ p ¹œ ÈË— tJOU~M¼ jI UN½«uMŽ •
dOOGð «— p ¹œ ÈU¼ Ê«uMŽ Ë g Ä ÈUN² O. ¨U¼ tU½dÐ bO½«uð v/ ULý • ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 1
ÆbO¼œ .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬TOP MENU] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ‬،‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‬8, 9, ;, :] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER]
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] tL"œ 1 bOM" —«dJð «— tKŠd s¹« “UO½  —u% —œ •
Direct Navigator ∫‰U¦ ‫[ ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬8, 9] ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ‬2 ∫‰U¦
‫ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ‬ bM" v h A «— ÈbFÐ ÈuM ∫uM
.‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ New New
Pla Playlist Item Long Name Display Te PAG E 1 / 3
ÈuM U¹ g Ä ÈU¼ X O. tJ¹—uDÐ
No. Date On Title Contents
1 11/ 1(WED) 12:05 Friends of a feather
[ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT] tL"œ • œuý v Áœ«œ ÊUA½ d~¹œ
2 1/ 1(MON) 1:05 Sunny day t×H% tÐ t×H% —uDÐ ‘dÄ È«dÐ «—
3 2/ 2(TUE) 2:21 Penguins habitat
Menu1 P l ay l i s t 1 Menu2
4 3/ 3(WED) 3:37 Irresistible ÆbO¼œ —UA
5 4/ 10(THU) 11:05 Hot cakes
‫• ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪد دو رﻗﻤﻰ‬ bM" v “Už¬ «— g Ä ∫g Ä X O.
0 ~ 9 to select RETURN to exit
.[3] @ [2] @[h10] ∫23 ö¦
ÆbO¼œ —UA p ¹œ Ë tU½dÐ —œ œułu œ—«u g¹U/ È«dÐ «— [:] tL"œ • P l ay l i s t 2 Menu3 P l ay l i s t 3

.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3 Prev Return Next

‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬

ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] tL"œ ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [FUNCTIONS] tL"œ
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﻧﻮﻳﮕﻴﺸﻦ‬

‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﺮدن ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ÆbÐU¹ v dOOGð p ¹œ ÈË— Ábý j³{ X.UŠ tÐ tMO“
‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺮوج از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
©ÆbýUÐ v g Ä X O. È«—«œ p ¹œ tJOU~M¼ jI® ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [L] tL"œ
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫـﻴـﺪ‬PLAYLIST] ‫دﻛﻤـﻪ‬ 1
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب از ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
Playlist ∫‰U¦ ‫[ ﻳﺎ دﻛﻤـﻪ‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
No. Date Length Title
‫ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﺑﺮاى‬ ∫‰U¦ ‫در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬ 1
1
2
11/1
1/ 1
0:00:01
0:01:20
City Penguin
Ashley at Prom ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ Playlist All by Artist The Beatles
‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬MENU] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
3 2/ 2 1:10:04 Formula one
4 3/ 3 0:10:20 Soccer .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ No. Content title .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
5 4/10 0:00:01 Baseball Playlist 1 Love Me Do
6 4/11 0:00:01 City Penguin [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT] tL"œ • Group 2 From Me to You
7
8
4/ 15
4/ 17
0:01:10
0:13:22
Ashley at Prom
Formula one t×H% tÐ t×H% —uDÐ ‘dÄ È«dÐ «— Content 3 She Loves You [8, 9]‫[ ﺳﭙﺲ‬/] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
4 I Want to Hold Your Hand
9
10
4/ 20
4/22
0:05:30
0:07:29
Soccer
Baseball ÆbO¼œ —UA 5 Can’t Buy Me Love ‫را ﺑﺮاى ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ از ﺑﲔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
0 9 to select and press ENTER RETURN to exit
‫ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪد دو رﻗﻤﻰ‬ • ‫“ ﻳﺎ‬Group” ،“Playlist”
.[3] @ [2] @[h10] ∫23 ö¦ .‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬Content”
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3 0 ~ 9 to select
ENTER to play RETURN to exit [8, 9]‫[ ﺳﭙﺲ‬-] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫[ را‬ENTER] ‫را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [PLAYLIST] tL"œ .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ÊU“ r¼ —uDÐ jš ‫‘ «“ ﭼﻨﺪ‬dÄ È«dÐ «— [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT] tL"œ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA
‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺮوج از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [MENU] tL"œ
JPEG (CD-R, CD-RW ‫ )ﺑﺮاى‬JPEG ‫ و‬WMA/MP3 ‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﺧﱳ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى‬
∫ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« —œ JPEG ÈU¼ q¹U Êb¹œ È«dÐ • Xd “« dOž® ÆbMýUÐ t²ý«œ XIÐUD ISO9660 “« 2 U¹ 1 `DÝ UÐ b¹UÐ U¼ p ¹œ •
DCF UÐ t" b¹dO~Ð ‰U²O−¹œ 5З˜ p¹ ÈË— “« «— UN½¬– Æ©t²U¹ tFÝuð ÈU¼
všdÐ ÆbýUÐ —UÖ“UÝ 1.0 t ½ (Design rule for Camera File system) œułË g? Ð ÈœU¹“ œ«bFð dÖ« U« XÝ« —UÖ“UÝ vA Ð bMÇ œd?JKLŽ UÐ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« •
1.0 t ½ œ—«b½U²Ý« DCF jÝuð t" b½—«œ v¹U¼ œdJKLŽ ‰U²O−¹œ ÈUNMOЗ˜ s¹« “« »UM²ł« È«dÐ ÆXý«œ b¼«uš “UO½ Èd²AOÐ ÊU“ tÐ g Ä ŸËdý býUÐ t²ý«œ
qÐUI dOž «— d¹uBð XÝ« sJ2 t" d¹uBð —U"œuš gšdÇ bM½U bMÐU¹ v/ gýuÄ ÆbO½UÝdÐ qI« bŠ tÐ «— UNA Ð œ«bFð ¨qLŽ
ÆbM" Êb¹œ jš p¹ ÈË— dÐ uM t×H% —œ —u"c ÁËdÖ XA¼ ¨œ—«œ œułË ÁËdÖ 8 “«d²AOÐ tJO½U“ •
ÆbO¹ULM½ ÁdOš– d~¹œ ÂU½ X% «— UN½¬ U¹ bOMJ½ œU−¹« U¼ q¹U —œ ÈdOOGð êO¼ – Æbý bM¼«uš Áœ«œ g¹U/ ÈœuLŽ
œułË dðu?O?á?U" t×H% Ë uM t×H% Êœ«œ g¹U/ VOðd?ð —œ v¹UNðËU?Hð XÝ« sJ2 •
ÈU¼ Xd d¹UÝ Ë MOTION JPEG „dײ d¹ËUBð g¹U/ tÐ —œUI ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« • ÆbýUÐ t²ý«œ
UN½¬ Á«dL¼ ÈU¼ «b% g¹U/ U¹ ©TIFF ∫q¦® JPEG“« dOž XÐUŁ d¹ËUBð ¨Ê¬ bM½U ÆbM" g Ä «— X¹«— XJÄ ‘Ë—UÐ Ábý j³{ ÈUNK¹U b½«uð v/ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« •
ÆbýUÐ v/
‫ﻧﺎم ﮔﺬارى ﻓﻮﻟﺪرﻫﺎ و ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
MP3 :‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬ ‫در اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﻣﻮارد و ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
XöŽ U¹ ¨ È—U& XöŽ “ËbM¹Ë XöŽ Ë “ËbM¹Ë jO× root .‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮرت ﮔﺮوه ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
Áb?ײ  ôU¹« —œ XUÝËd?J¹U X"dý È—U?& Ábý X³Ł 001group gOÄ“« ÈU?¼—b.u? Ë U?N?K?¹U? vUÝ« ¨j³{ ÂU~M¼ —œ
ÆbMýUÐ v U¼—uA" d¹UÝ U¹ØË UJ¹d¬ 001 t" v³Oðd?ð tÐ vLI— tÝ ÈU¼ Á—ULý UÐ «— Ábý j³{
Ábý Ÿ«bЫ  UŽöÞ« È“UÝ ÁœdA Xd Ÿu½ p¹ WMA 001track.mp3 —œ X?Ý« sJ2® bOM" rOEMð b½uý g Ä bO¼«uš v
002track.mp3 Æ©bMJ½ qLŽ ÊU“ ʬ
È«—«œ Xd? s?¹«U?Ð q¹U ÆXÝ« XUÝËd?J?¹U X"dý —œ 003track.mp3
∫bMýUÐ b½u Ä È«—«œ b¹UÐ UNK¹U
“« Èd?²?L" r−Š UÐ MP3 Xd? U?Ð q?¹U? bM½UL¼ v²OHO" 002group
“.wma” U¹ “.WMA”
ÆXÝ« MP3 “.mp3” U¹ “.MP3”
001track.mp3
003group 002track.mp3 “.jpeg” U¹ “.JPEG”¨ “.jpg” ¨“.JPG”
003track.mp3
X"dý f½U O. X% v½«uš b" ȗˬ s È«—«œ vðu% È« t¹ô tÝ MPEG 004track.mp3 WMA
ÆbýUÐ v U¹b v².u Êu Uð Ë ”« Ȭ Ȭ duN½«d 001track.mp3 “« Ábý XEU× WMA ÈU¼ q¹U bO½«uð v/ ULý •
002track.mp3
003track.mp3 ÆbOM" g Ä «— Êbý vá"
«— (MBR) t½UÖ bMÇ ÈU¼ XOÐ XŽdÝ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« •
.öŽ U¹ È—U& .öŽ HighMAT —¬ Ë HighMATTM ÆbM" v/  —uÄUÝ
Microsoft XUÝËdJ¹U X"dý È—U& Ábý X³Ł
RQT8092 d¹UÝ U¹ ØË UJ¹d¬ Ábײ  ôU¹« —œ Corporation MP3
ÆX O½ —UÖ“UÝ ID3 ÈU¼ V ÇdÐ UÐ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« •
15 ÆbM² ¼ U¼—uA"
Ë 44.1 ¨32 ¨24 ¨22.05 ¨16 ¨12 ¨11.02 ¨8 ∫—U??Ö“U??Ý È—«œd??Ð t??½u??/ X??³? ? ½ •
82 Æeðd¼uKO" 48

Per(12-15) 15 2/2/05, 2:30 PM

 ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﻧﻮﻳﮕﻴﺸﻦ‬

‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ‬7

.‫درﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد‬ 1 1 2 3

.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬FUNCTIONS] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬ 4 5 6

ÆbMýUÐ v  ËUH² —«e« Âd½ Ÿu½ tÐ t² Ð Ábý Áœ«œ g¹U/ ÈU¼ tM¹eÖ ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬارى‬
7 8 9
‫ﺷﺪه‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
Multi Æb½uý v Áœ«œ ÊUA½ œ—«u Ë U¼ ÁËdÖ 0 10

List œ—«u jI

Tree U¼ ÁËdÖ jI
Thumbnail JPEG Ábý pÇu" d¹ËUBð
Next group WMA MP3 ÈbFÐ ÁËdÖ tÐ 7— È«dÐ
Previous group WMA MP3 vK³I ÁËdÖ tÐ 7— È«dÐ TOP MENU, MENU,
DIRECT PLAYLIST,
All WMA/MP3 Ë JPEG ANGLE/PAGE
NAVIGATOR
Audio WMA/MP3 jI , , , ,
Picture JPEG jI ENTER
Help display g Ä Ábý ÈdáÝ ÊU“ d~½UA½ Ë ULM¼«— ÈUNUOÄ 5Ð q¹b³ð FUNCTIONS
Find œ—u U¹ ÁËdÖ Ê«uMŽ o¹dÞ “« u−² ł
©bOMO³Ð «— t×H% 5zUÄ @® ,
SHIFT
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻨﻮى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER]

‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﻧﻮﻳﮕﻴﺸﻦ‬

‫ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻨﻮان ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮرد‬7
È«d?Ð «— Èœ—u? Ê«u?M?Ž U?¹ ¨Áœd?" X?¹ö?¹U?¼ ÁËd?Ö Èu?−² ł È«dÐ «— ÁËdÖ p¹ Ê«uMŽ
ÆbOM" sýË— œ—u ʬ Èu−² ł
(‫درﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻨﻮى ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد )@ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
“Find” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬8 ‫ﭘﺨﺶ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎى داده‬
A Find
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده و‬ WMA MP3 JPEG
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎراﻛﺘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 ÊËbÐ bO½«uð v «— HighMAT U¹ DVD-RAM ÈUNJ ¹œ ÈË— JPEG ÈUNK¹U
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] “Play as Data Disc” ¨17 t×H% @® bOM" g Ä HighMAT œdJKLŽ “« ÁœUH²Ý«
bOM" —«dJð «— qLŽ s¹« ÈbFÐ ÈU¼d²"«—U" Êœd" œ—«Ë È«dÐ • Æ©Other Menu —œ
Æb½uý v u−² ł 5MâL¼ dð 5zUÄ œ—«u • (‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ )ﻣﻨﻮى ﭘﺨﺶ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA U Ë O ¨I ¨E ¨A 5Ð “« Êœd" œ— È«dÐ «— [(, )] tL"œ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA d²"«—U" p¹ Êœd" „UÄ È«dÐ «— [/] tL"œ • .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬TOP MENU] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
bOM" v u−² ł «— Ábý œ—«Ë ÈU¼d²"«—U" qUý ÈU¼ Ê«uMŽ tJOU~M¼ •
ÆbO¼œ —«dI «— © ® XöŽ ،“All” (WMA/MP3/JPEG) ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
XöŽ Ábý œ—«Ë ÈU¼d²"«—U" jÝuð Ábý “Už¬ ÈU¼ Ê«uMŽ Èu−² ł È«dÐ • ‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر داده‬Picture” (JPEG) ‫“ ﻳﺎ‬Audio” (WMA/MP3)
«— vŽd ÈuM ¨ © ® XöŽ œb− Êœd" tU{« È«dÐ ÆbO¹U/ „UÄ «— © ® .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫و‬
ÆbO¹U/ »U ²½« «— “Find” tM¹eÖ Ë Áœ«œ g¹U/ «œb− ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺮوج از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ •
‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬Find” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬-] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3 ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [TOP MENU] tL"œ
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] (‫ﭘﺨﺶ از ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه )ﻣﻨﻮى ﻧﻮﻳﮕﻴﺸﻦ‬
Æœuý v d¼Uþ u−² ł t−O²½ t×H%
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬MENU] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮرد ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 4 /‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮوه ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮارد ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬8, 9, /, -] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER]
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى ﻓﺸﺎر داده و‬
CD ‫ﭘﺨﺶ از ﻗﻄﻌﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه از روى‬ ÈbFÐ ÁËdÖ È«dÐ Èd~¹œ X O. ¨ÁËdÖ p¹ —œ œ—«u vU9 Êœd" X O. “« bFÐ •
Æœuý v d¼Uþ
‫)ﻓﻘﻂ‬CD jI® CD CD ‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ENTER] ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮارد در ﮔﺮوه دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
Æb½uý v d¼Uþ 7 CD g Ä ÂU~M¼ tÐ U¼ Ê«uMŽ .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬MENU] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬TOP MENU] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1 ‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬8, 9] ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺷﺮوع ﺷﺪن ﭘﺨﺶ از ﻣﻮارد اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه دﻛﻤﻪ‬
7 CD ∫‰U¦ .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
CD Text T 1/14 0:53 ∫‰U¦
Disc Title : Celine Dion One Heart
g Ä ‰UŠ—œ t" Èœ—u Ë ÁËdÖ Á—ULý
Disc Artist : Celine Dion Navigation Menu G 2 C 5 MP3 1:54
Track Title : I Drove All Night (Album Version)
bMýUÐ v
Track Artist :
Sep 15 2003 Breaking The Habit
1. I Drove All Night (Album Version) Lirkin Park Meteora Dont_Stay : WMA/MP3 ÈUNK¹U
2. Love Is All We Need (Album Version) Penguins Faint
3. FAITH (Album Version) Hit_The_Floor_ _Abyss
4. In His Touch (Album Version)
5. One Heart (Album Version)
Lirkin Park [Hyorid Theor
Lirkin Park_Cure For The
; : ‰UŠ—œ t" Èœ—«u U¹ ÁËdÖ
6. Stand By Your side (Album Version) Lirkin_Park_ _Metora_ «— bMýUÐ v g Ä
7. NAKED (Album Version)
Lirkin_Park_ _Metora_
8. Sorry For Love (Album Version)
9. Have You Ever Been In Love (Album Version) Lying_From_You bM" v h A
10. Reveal (Album Version) Somewhere_I_Belong
Lady Starfish
to select and press ENTER RETURN to exit
Life on Jupiter : JPEG ÈUNK¹U
Group 002/003 Content 0005/0012

‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻓﺸﺎر‬8, 9] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 FUNCTIONS to display the sub menu RETURN to exit
Ábý »U ²½« vKF ÈU¼ Á—ULý
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ENTER] ‫داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ÁËdÖ œ—«u
t×H% tÐ t×H% Êœd" ‘dÄ È«dÐ «— [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT] tL"œ • —œ t×H% tÐ t×H% Êœd" ‘dÄ È«dÐ «— [ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT] tL"œ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA ÆbO¼œ —UA tŽuL− U¹ ÁËdÖ ÁœËb×
v½uM" XOFIu Ë g Ä XOFIu Êœ«œ g¹U/ È«dÐ «— [FUNCTIONS] tL"œ • ‫ در ﺣﺎل ﻧﺸﺎن دادن‬WMA/MP3 ‫• ﺑﺮاى ﻟﺬت ﺑﺮدن از ﮔﻮﺷﻦ دادن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮارد‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA .‫ روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬JPEG ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ • ÆbO¹U/ »U ²½« «— v¹«b% œ—«u fáÝ Ë ¨bOM" »U ²½« «— JPEG q¹U p¹ «b²Ð« RQT8092
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [MENU] U¹ [TOP MENU] tL"œ ©ÆbýUÐ v/ ‰UF qÐUI ÈUN³Oðdð®
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ • 14
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [MENU] tL"œ 83

Per(12-15) 14 2/3/05, 11:04 AM

 ‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺴﺒﺖ زوم‬
RAM ©t½UÖbMÇ vðu ÈU¼ tFD0 UÐ Á«dL¼® DVD-V VCD RAM DVD-V VCD
‫[ را ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬AUDIO] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ÆbM ¯—eÐ t×H ÊË—œ Êbý Á“«b½« È«dÐ «— ÍuBð UN½«uð v X!UŠ s¹«
.‫ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫[ را ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻴﺰان‬ZOOM] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

DVD-V ∫‰U¦ RAM VCD ‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر‬Auto” ‫( ﻳﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬Just Fit Zoom) ‫ﻧﺴﺒﻰ ﺑﺰرﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻰ‬
“LR” U¹ “R” ¨“L” »U*²½« È«dÐ bO½«uð v tLœ s¹« “« .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Functions
.
ÆbOM ÁœUH²Ý« eO½
Audio 1
©tË«—U ÈUNJ,¹œ® DVD-V
È«b ·cŠ U¹ Êœ—ˬ XNł “On” U¹ “Off”XOF{Ë »U*²½« È«dÐ «— [; ;, :] tLœ Functions
ÆbO¼œ —UA7 ÁbM½«uš Just Fit Zoom 1.00 Auto
ÆbO½«u*Ð «— p,¹œ ÈULM¼«— d²AOÐ  UOzeł È«dÐ
4:3 Standard
‫ﻧﻮع و داده ﻫﺎى ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل‬
European Vista
‰UM~OÝ Ÿu½ ∫LPCM/PPCMØ0 DigitalØDTS/MPEG 16:9 Standard
American Vista
©UN!U½U Á—ULý® chØbitØ©v,½Ud7 È—«œdÐ t½u/® kHz
Cinemascope1
Cinemascope2
3/2 .1ch ∫‰U¦
Èed ∫1 16:9 Standard (16:9) ∫‰U¦
v¹uKł XÝ«— ´ v¹uKł éÇ ∫2 4:3 Standard (4:3)
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى راﺣﺖ‬

Èed ´ v¹uKł XÝ«— ´ v¹uKł éÇ ∫3

b½«—uÝ È«b ÊËbÐ ∫0
u½u b½«—uÝ È«b ∫1
©XÝ«—ØéÇ® u¹d²Ý« b½«—uÝ È«b ∫2
5¹UÄ f½Ud7 dŁ« ∫Æ1
©œuý v/ Áœ«œ g¹U/ býU³½ œułu v!UM~OÝ dÖ«®
European Vista (1.66:1)
‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ American Vista (1.85:1)
Cinemascope1 (2.35:1)
©v¹UðbMÇ ÈU¼ f¹u½d¹“ UЮ DVD-V (SVCDjI7® VCD Cinemascope2 (2.55:1)
‫[ را ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زﺑﺎن‬SUBTITLE] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ (Manual Zoom) ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﻗﻴﻖ‬
Áœ«œ g?¹U/ t v¹UN,¹u½d¹“ È«dÐ f¹u½d¹“ Á—U?Lý XÝ« sJ2 ¨+R/+RW ÈË— • ;, :] tLœ ¨“Auto” U¹ Ábý rOEMð q³0 “« Èd¼Uþ X³,½ »U*²½« “« bFÐ
ÆbO¼œ —UA7 «— [;
DVD-V ∫‰U¦ Æœuý Áœ«œ ÊUA½ b½uý v/ ©0.01 ÈU¼ bŠ«Ë —œ® dЫdÐ “x1.60” Uð dЫdÐ “x1.00” “« –
‫ﻟﻐﻮ زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
©0.02 ÈU¼ bŠ«Ë —œ® dЫdÐ “x2.00” Uð dЫdÐ “x1.60” “« –
Functions Æb¹—«bN~½ Ë Áœ«œ —UA7 Êbý dð l¹dÝ È«dÐ «— [;,:] tLœ •
;, :] tLœ
ÆbO¼œ —UA7 “Off” U¹ “On” »U*²½« È«dÐ «— [;
Subtitle Off
býUÐ v v¹UNJ,¹œ —œ jI7 On/Off XOF{Ë® RAM ‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
©XÝ« f¹u½d¹“ È«dÐ Êbý sýË— ‘uUš  UŽöÞ« È«—«œ t
RAM DVD-V
“Off” ‫“ ﻳﺎ‬On” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬SUBTITLE] + [SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬
sýË— ‘uUš  UŽöÞ« Ê«uð v/ pO½u?ÝU½UÄ DVD j³{ ÁU~²Ýœ “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ • ،“Normal” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬PLAY SPEED] + [SHIFT] ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎر‬
Æœd j³{ «— f¹u½d¹“ Êbý .‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬Slow” ‫“ ﻳﺎ‬Fast”

‫ﺗﻜﺮار ﭘﺨﺶ‬ Functions

œuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ b½«u²Ð Ábý ÈdáÝ g*Ä ÊU“ tJOU~M¼ jI7® Play Speed 1.0 Normal
©ÆbM v —U JPEG œ—«u vU9 UÐ ∫ JPEG Fast
‫در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬ Slow
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮردى ﻛﻪ ﺗﻜﺮار ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺸـﺎر‬REPEAT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ (‫ واﺣﺪ‬0.1 ‫“ )در‬x1.4” ‫“ ﺗﺎ‬x0.6” ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪوده‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ÆbO¼œ —UA7 œuý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ ôUÐ ÂUOÄ tJO!UŠ —œ «— [;, :] tLœ
DVD-V ∫‰U¦ ÆbO¼œ —UA7 ÈœUŽ g*Ä X!UŠ tÐ 7AÖdÐ È«dÐ «— [:, DVD/CD] tLœ •
Functions
ÆbMJ½ qLŽ p,¹œ Êbý j³{ Áu×½ tÐ t²,Ð XÝ« sJ2 œdJKLŽ s¹« •
Repeat Off Off
Chapter ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ واﻧﺘﺨﺎب زاوﻳﻪ‬
Title
‫[ را ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب زاوﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ‬ANGLE/PAGE]+[SHIFT] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
Off ← Disc ← Program RAM
.‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Off ← Playlist ← Scene ∫g*Ä X,O! g*Ä ‰öš —œ •
t¹Ë«“ »U*²½« ≠ ©v¹UðbMÇ ÈU¼ t¹Ë«“ UЮ DVD-V
Off ← Title\ ← Chapter : DVD-V
Off ← Disc\ ← Track : VCD CD sUÝ d¹uBð gšdÇ JPEG
Off ← All CD’s ← Disc ← Track ∫býUÐ sýË— CD X!UŠ tJOU~M¼ •
∫v7œUBð g*Ä Ë Èe¹— tU½dÐ ‰öš —œ ¨býUÐ sýË— CD X!UŠ tJOU~M¼ •
Off ← All CD’s ← Track Æ
Off ← Group\ ← Content : WMA MP3
Off ← All CD’s ← Group ← Content ∫býUÐ sýË— CD X!UŠ tJOU~M¼ •
∫v7œUBð g*Ä Ë Èe¹— tU½dÐ ‰öš —œ ¨býUÐ sýË— CD X!UŠ tJOU~M¼ •
RQT8092 Off ← All CD’s ← Content
Off ← Group\ : JPEG
13 Æœuý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ v7œUBð g*Ä Ë Èe¹— tU½dÐ ‰öš —œ “All”  —U³Ž
84

Per(12-15) 13 2/2/05, 3:21 PM

 ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى راﺣﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺮور ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺨﺶ‬

(ADVANCED DISC REVIEW)
RAM (+R/+RW e−Ю DVD-V
XOFu$ “« «— g(Ä Ë Áœ—ˬ «— p¹œ ÊË—œ  U¹u²×$ t& b¼œ v$ ÊUJ$« ULý tÐ
—œ «— “Interval Mode” U¹ “Intro Mode” U¹ ÆbO¹U/ ŸËdý Ábý »U(²½«

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
t×H @® bOM& »U(²½« bO½«uð v$ «— “Disc” ÊË—œ “Advanced Disc Review” ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى‬ 1 2 3 DISC
Æ©18 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﺬارى‬ 4 5 6 CD MODE
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬A.DISC REVIEW] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1 ‫ﺷﺪه‬
Æœuý v$ Áœ«œ g¹U/ QUICK OSD t×H 7 8 9 REPEAT
RAM ∫‰U¦$ QUICK OSD 0 10
SUBTITLE AUDIO
Program 4 Time 0:01:06 A.DISC REVIEW,
MANUAL SKIP, PLAY SPEED
QUICK REPLAY
‫[ را ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ را ﺑـﺮاى‬:, DVD/CD] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 , DVD/CD
.‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﺮدﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ANGLE/PAGE

ÆbMMJ½ qLŽ XÝ« sJ2 g(Ä ÈUN²OF{Ë Ë p¹œ tÐ t²Ð ,

(CD MODE) CD ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎوب‬ ZOOM

‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى راﺣﺖ‬

VCD CD WMA MP3
VÝUM$ —UOÐ XLUŠ s¹« bO¹U/ g(Ä »ËUM²$ —uDÐ «— p¹“u$ CD s¹bMÇ bO¼«u(Ð dÖ«
ÆbýUÐ g(Ä XOFu$ —œ ÁœUH²Ý« œ—u$ p¹œ t& b¹uý s¾LD$ g(Ä “« q³ ÆbýUÐ v$ SHIFT
Æb½uý v$ œ— Êbý g(Ä ÊËbÐ JPEG Ë DVD
‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬CD MODE] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1

‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ‬
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬:, DVD/CD] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 p¹œ  UŽöÞ« t×H jÝuð Ábý Áœ«œ —«d ÈUNJ¹œ tJM¹« “« bFÐ «— vJ¹œ bO½«uð v$
ÆbOM& »U(²½« b½bý pÇ
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬ vK« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— p¹œ ÈU¼ tL&œ UÐ «— vJ¹œ rOI²$ —uDÐ bO½«uð v$ sOMâL¼ •
qLŽ CD XLUŠ ¨býU³½ ©DVD ö¦$® ÈœdЗU& qÐU g(Ä XOFu$ —œ p¹œ dÖ« • ÆbOM& »U(²½«
Æœd& b¼«u(½ .‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬DISC] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
ÆbMýUÐ v/ ÁœUH²Ý« qÐU Èd¹uBð CD g(Ä ‰d²M& Ë HighMAT ÈU¼uM$ •
Disc Information
∫‰U¦$
XLUŠ U¹ Èe¹— t$U½dÐ XLUŠ —œ tJO½U$“ U¹ ¨g(Ä ‰öš —œ bO½«uð v/ «— CD XLUŠ •
ÆbOM& ÷uŽ býUÐ v9œUBð DVD-Video
uGL È«dÐ «œb−$ «— [CD MODE] tL&œ ¨bOM& g(Ä «— DVD p¹ bO¼«uš v$ dÖ« • CD Track 10 Time 60:15
l³M$ ¨bOM& v$ “UÐ «— v½uM& p¹œ vMOÝ tJO$U~M¼® ÆbO¼œ —UA9 CD XLUŠ DVD-VR
XLUŠ bO¼œ v$ —«d ‘UÐ ÁœU$¬ XLUŠ ÈË— «— bOK& U¹ ¨bOM& v$ »U(²½« «— Èd~¹œ Unchecked
©Æœuý v$ uGL eO½ CD No Disc

‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ vLUš ÁbA½ Áb½«uš “uM¼

‫[( را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓـﺸـﺎر‬1] – [5]) ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤـﺎره دار‬ 2
©Æœuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ b½«u²Ð Ábý ÈdáÝ g(Ä ÊU$“ tJO$U~M¼ jI9® .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
©+R/+RW e−Ю
‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺎك ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫[ را‬QUICK REPLAY] + [SHIFT] ‫ﺑﺮاى ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ÆbO¼œ —UA9 «— [DISC] tL&œ
.‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
(QUICK OSD) ‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎى ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻰ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬30 ‫رد ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاى‬
Æb½uý v$ Áœ«œ g¹U/ v½uM& g(Ä ÈUN²OF{Ë
©Æœuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ b½«u²Ð Ábý ÈdáÝ g(Ä ÊU$“ tJO$U~M¼ jI9® .‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬QUICK OSD] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
RAM (+R/+RW e−Ю DVD-V
 UGOK³ð bO¼«uš v$ tJO$U~M¼ È«dÐ Æœuý v$ ŸËdý «œb−$ bFÐ tO½UŁ 30 U³¹dIð “« g(Ä v½uM& g(Ä Á—ULý Ábý ÈdáÝ g(Ä ÊU$“ DVD-V ∫‰U¦$
ÆXÝ« VÝUM$ bOM& œ— «— ÁdOž U¹ Ë
‫در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬ Title 1 Chapter 4 Time 0:41:23
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬MANUAL SKIP] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ g(Ä XOF{Ë
œËbŠ —œ ÈbFÐ t$U½dÐ ŸËdý b¹uý œ— v½uM& t$U½dÐ “« bO½«u²Ð t& œ—«b½ ÊUJ$« RAM Program Playback
ÆbO²¼ ʬ “« Êbý œ— ‰UŠ —œ ULý t& XÝ« È« tDI½ “« tO½UŁ 30 g(Ä XLUŠ v½uM& XOFu$

‫• ﺑﺮاى ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از اﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

ÆbO¼œ —UA9 «— [QUICK OSD] tL&œ
Æbý b¼«uš d¼Uþ —U&œuš —uDÐ QUICK OSD t×H CD MP3 WMA • RQT8092

12
85

Per(12-15) 12 2/2/05, 10:00 AM

 ‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [FL DISPLAY‬را ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬت ﺑﺮدن از ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﭘﺮوﮔﺮﺳﻴﻮ‬ ‫‪RAM DVD-V WMA MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

‫‪ UŽöÞ« g¹U/ ↔ ÊU“ g¹U/‬‬

‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [PROGRESSIVE] + [SHIFT‬را‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫¼‪∫býUÐ sýË— ©17 t×H= @® b¹öÝ« g¹U/ tJOU~M‬‬
‫«“‪Æ©4 t×H= @® b¹d³Ð  c bO½«uð v uOÝdÖËdÄ d¹ËUBð‬‬ ‫‪ UŽöÞ« g¹U/ ↔ SLIDE‬‬
‫¼‪∫býUÐ ‘uUš ©17 t×H= @® b¹öÝ« g¹U/ tJOU~M‬‬
‫وارد ﻛﺮدن اﻋﺪاد‬ ‫‪ UŽöÞ« g¹U/ ↔ PLAY‬‬

‫‪RAM DVD-V VCD CD‬‬ ‫زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫¦‪[2] @ [1] @ [h10] ∫12 œbŽ »U²½« È«dÐ ö‬‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [SUBTITLE] + [SHIFT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(PBC) ‰d²M gÄ UÐ VCD‬‬ ‫‪RAM‬‬
‫‪¨Áœ«œ —UA# PBC ÈU¼œdJKLŽ uG È«dÐ «— [L] tLœ‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ را‬
‫‪ÆbO¼œ —UA# «— —«œ Á—ULý ÈU¼ tLœ fáÝ‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(13‬‬
‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬ ‫‪DVD-V (SVCD jI#® VCD‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار و ]‪ [ENTER‬را‬ ‫زﺑﺎن زﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)@ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(13‬‬
‫¦‪[3] @ [2] @ ∫123 œbŽ »U²½« È«dÐ ö‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫@ ]‪[ENTER‬‬ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ اﺻﻮل اوﻟﻴﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬

‫—« ‪Êœd uG È«dÐ‬‬ ‫• ‪[CANCEL]+[SHIFT] tLœ‬‬ ‫‪ UŽöÞ« ÊËbÐ d¹uBð  UOzeł‬‬ ‫‪a¹—Uð‬‬
‫‪ÆbO¼œ —UA# ©U¼® Á—ULý‬‬

‫‪L, CANCEL‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺚ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [J‬را در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:, DVD/CD‬‬
‫• ‪gÄ œb− ŸËdý È«dÐ «— [:, DVD/CD] tLœ‬‬
‫‪ÆbO¼œ —UA#‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﭘﺨﺶ از ﮔﺮوﻫﻰ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪WMA MP3 JPEG‬‬

‫‪ENTER‬‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [GROUP] + [SHIFT‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪[8, 9‬‬

‫را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ [ENTER] ،‬را ﺑﺮاى‬
‫ﭘﺮش ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺮوع ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪p¹  —uBÐ JPEG Ë WMA/MP3 ÈUNJB¹œ “« È« týuÄ‬‬
‫‪RAM DVD-V VCD‬‬
‫“‪ÆbMM v qLŽ ”Group‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [/, -‬را در ﺧﻼل ﻣﻜﺚ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ ‫ﭘﺮش از ﮔﺮوه‪ /‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Ɯ˗ v uKł ·dÞ tÐ jI# VCD‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮش از ﮔﺮوه‪ [8, 9] :‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮش از ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‪ [/, -] :‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪(, ), SLOW/SEARCH‬‬
‫‪SHIFT‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎى دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫‪ :‬را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮى اﺻﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬
‫) ‪ ( DVD-V‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫـﺎى ) ‪ ( RAM‬دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ) ‪ ( DVD-V‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺨﺶ ) ‪ ( RAM‬دﻳﺴﻚ‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎى روى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ]‪ [8, 9, /, -‬را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪(PBC) ‰d²M gÄ UÐ VCD‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر داده‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪ [ENTER‬را ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ]‪ [RETURN‬را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮى‬ ‫ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪—UA# vK³M t×H= tÐ 7AÖdÄ È«dÐ «— [RETURN] tLœ‬‬
‫‪ÆbO¼œ‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪11‬‬
‫‪86‬‬

‫)‪Per(10-11‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 8:45 AM‬‬

 ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ اﺻﻮل اوﻟﻴﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬

.‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﻨﻰ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬OPEN/CLOSE c] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1

Æœuý v sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ
t?Lœ Ë Áœ«œ —U?A v?MO?Ý »U>?²½« È«dÐ «— [1]–[5] t?Lœ ¨U?¼ vM?OÝ —œ d?~¹œ ÈU?NJ?¹œ Êœ«œ —«d?K È«dÐ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA vMOÝ Êœd “UÐ È«dÐ «— [OPEN/CLOSE c]

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
Æ©vMOÝ d¼ ÊË—œ vJ¹® bO¼œ —«dK vMOÝ ÊË—œ bO½«uð v «— p¹œ 5 Uð •
ÆbýUÐ ôUÐ ·dDÐ œuý g>Ä bO¼«u>O t vdÞ t bO¼œ —«dK È—uÞ «— tdÞËœ ÈUNJ¹œ •
Æb¹—«œdÐ p¹œ ÈË— “« ÁœUH²Ý« “« q³K «— Z¹dðU RAM •

.‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪاﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫دﻳﺴﻚ را در ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﮕﺮ‬
.‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺑﺴﱳ ﺳﻴﻨﻰ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬OPEN/CLOSE c] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 2 ‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫[ و‬DISC CHANGE c] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬1]–[5] ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺤﻞ دﻳﺴﻚ‬ «œb− «— [DISC CHANGE c] tLœ
Æœuý t²Ð vMOÝ Uð bO¼œ —UA
.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬DISC CHECK] ‫در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‰UŠ —œ vJ¹œ tJOU~M¼ —œ sOMâL¼ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA «œb− vMOÝ 7Ð È«dÐ «d½¬ d~¹œ vJ¹œ bO½«uð v býUÐ v Êb½«uš
ÆÈd² v²½UÝ 12 ÈUNJ¹œ q× Êœd pÇ È«dÐ • ÆbO¹U/ ×Uš «—
Æbý b¼«u>½ “UÐ tÞuÐd vMOÝ ¨býUÐ v Êbý g>Ä ‰UŠ —œ vJ¹œ dÖ« • v Êbý g>Ä ‰UŠ —œ t «— vJ¹œ dÖ« •
ÆbOMJ½ œ—«Ë U¹ ×Uš «— ©U¼® p¹œ eÖd¼ p¹œ Êœd pÇ ‰öš —œ •

‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ اﺻﻮل اوﻟﻴﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬

Ë Ábý nKu² g>Ä ¨bOM »U>²½« «— býUÐ
ÆbOAJ½ ÊËdOÐ ·dDÐ «— U¼ vMOÝ eÖd¼ p¹œ Êœd pÇ ‰öš —œ • Æœuý v “UÐ vMOÝ

‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫[ را در‬L, STOP] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
t×H( ÈË— “RESUME” tJOUŠ —œ
Æœuý v kHŠ XOFKu XÝ« g¹U/
“« È«dÐ «— [:, DVD/CD] tLœ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA g>Ä ÈdOÖdÝ
„UÄ È«dÐ «— [L, STOP] tLœ •
ÆbO¼œ —UA «œb− XOFKu Êœd

‫[ را ﺑـﺮاى‬1]–[5] ‫دﻛــﻤــﻪ‬ 3
.‫ﳕﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
œ—u p¹œ v½uM p¹œ dÖ«
tLœ XÝULý q¹U9
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [:, DVD/CD]

‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬/‫ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬/‫ﭘﺮش ﻛﺮدن‬ :, DVD/CD

.‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬f, 3 /FF] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬g, REW/ 4] :‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺮش ﻛﺮدن‬ •
.‫[ را ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‬f, 3 /FF] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬g, REW/ 4] ‫ در ﺧﻼل ﭘﺨﺶ دﻛﻤﻪ‬:‫ﺑﺮاى ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ •
‫[ را در ﺧﻼل ﻣﻜﺚ‬f, 3 /FF] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬g, REW/4 4] ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ‬:‫ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬ •
.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‬
ÆbýUÐ v uKł XLÝ tÐ XdŠ È«dÐ jI t²¼¬ XdŠ UÐ g>Ä VCD •
ÆbÐU¹ g¹«e« b½«uð v tKŠd 5 Uð t²¼¬ XdŠ UÐ g>ÄØu−²ł XŽdÝ •
RQT8092
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA «— [L] tLœ b¹œd Áb¼UA Êu¹e¹uKð t×H( ÈË— Ë bý ÂU9 ÁU~²Ýœ —uðu È«b( tJOU~M¼ ÆbM¼œ v t«œ« «— gšdÇ UNJ¹œ b½uý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ U¼uM tJOUŠ—œ • 10
ÆœuA½ Áœ«œ g¹U/ +R/+RW ÈË— `O×( —uDÐ XÝ« sJ2 UN½«uMŽ œ«bFð q • 87

Per(10-11) 10 2/2/05, 10:01 AM

 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬

‫دﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدى ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى روى‬

‫ً‬ ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎره ‪+‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎى اﺻﻠﻰ دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪/‬روﺷﻦ‪ ،‬دﻛﻤﻪ روﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﳕﻮدن ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬ ‫‪ì‬‬

‫‪î‬‬
‫‪f, TVf‬‬
‫‪24, 25 .......................................................................... [f‬‬ ‫]‪f‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺷﻤﺎره دار ]‪11 ............................................. [0 – 9, h10‬‬ ‫?‬
‫«‪Æb½—«œ ÁbNŽ tÐ «— d¹“ n¹UþË U¼ tLœ s¹‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫]‪11 ............................... [PROGRESSIVE] uOÝdÖËdÄ d¹uBð tLœ :[1‬‬
‫]‪22 ................................................................. [ECHO] u« tLœ :[7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫]‪11 .................................................. [SUBTITLE] f¹u½ d¹“ tLœ :[0‬‬
‫@‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪ï‬‬
‫‪13 .......................................................... [AUDIO] «b tLœ :[h‬‬ ‫]‪h10‬‬

‫‪ñ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OSD‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ]‪12 ............................................. [QUICK OSD‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬

‫‪ó‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻜﺚ ]‪11 ........................................................................ [J‬‬
‫[‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫‪ò‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻳﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ ]‪6, 11, 15, 16 .............................. [L, CANCEL‬‬
‫\‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺮش ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫]‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫^‬
‫‪ô‬‬
‫]‪12 ...................................... [MANUAL SKIP, QUICK REPLAY‬‬
‫_‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ö‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻮج ﻳﺎب‪20, 25 ................................... [TUNER/AUX] aux/‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮى اﺻﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻳﮕﻴﺸﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪,‬‬

‫‪õ‬‬
‫]‪11, 14, 15 ........................ [TOP MENU, DIRECT NAVIGATOR‬‬
‫{‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮوه‬

‫‪ú‬‬
‫]‪11, 14, 17 ............................................. [FUNCTIONS, GROUP‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺮش از دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﺮاى ﻧﻮار‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎل ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬
‫‪g ,REW/4‬‬ ‫]‪4, f, 3 /FF‬‬
‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪6, 20, 21 .......................................... [g‬‬
‫|‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ]‪[SHIFT‬‬
‫‪∫@½— v$—U½ ÈU¼œdJKLŽ “« ÁœUH²Ý« È«dÐ‬‬
‫}‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪û‬‬
‫‪ÆbO¼œ —UA- «— tÞuÐd/ tLœ ¨bO¼œ v/ —UA- «— [SHIFT] tJO*UŠ —œ‬‬

‫‪ü‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪا ]‪25 ...................................................... [MUTING‬‬
‫‪V‬‬ ‫!‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮاب ]‪6, 24 ... [CLOCK/TIMER, SLEEP‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺷﻰ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫]‪fPLAY/REC, AUTO OFF‬‬
‫‪24, 25 .............................................. [f‬‬

‫†‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،FL‬داﻳﻤﺮ ]‪11, 25 ................ [FL DISPLAY, DIMMER‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺻﺪاى ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ‪23 ....................................... [S.SOUND EQ] EQ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺻﺪاى ‪ ،EQ‬دﺳﺘﻰ ‪EQ‬‬
‫]‪23 ............................................... [SOUND EQ, –MANUAL EQ‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺻﺪاى ﺳﻮراﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮره‬

‫‪°‬‬
‫]‪23 .................................................... [A.SRND, M.RE-MASTER‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻳﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮج ﻳﺎب‬

‫‪¢‬‬
‫]‪12, 20 ....................................................... [DISC, TUNER PGM‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪12 ................................................... [CD MODE] CD‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻜﺮار ]‪13 ............................................................ [REPEAT‬‬

‫‪£‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ]‪16, 20, 21 ............................... [PLAY MODE‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮور ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ دﻳﺴﻚ‪ /‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬

‫§‬
‫]‪12, 13 ................................... [A.DISC REVIEW, PLAY SPEED‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬زاوﻳﻪ‪ /‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫•‬
‫]‪11, 13, 14 ............................ [MENU, PLAYLIST, ANGE/PAGE‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺟﻬﺖ دار ]‪،[8, 9, /, -‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ورود ]‪6, 11, 13, 14, 15, 23 ................................... [ENTER‬‬
‫«‪Æb½—«œ ÁbNŽ tÐ «— d¹“ n¹UþË U¼ tLœ s¹‬‬

‫¶‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪............... [TV CH4,TV CH3] Êu¹e¹uKð ‰U½U »U4²½« tLœ∫›/, -¤‬‬

‫‪ß‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ‪ ،‬زوم ]‪6, 13 ............................... [RETURN, ZOOM‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪/‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮج ﻳﺎب‬
‫]‪11, 14, 20 ................................... [//, --, SLOW/SEARCH‬‬
‫«‪Æb½—«œ ÁbNŽ tÐ «— d¹“ n¹UþË U¼ tLœ s¹‬‬
‫‪25 ....................... [TV/AV] TV/AV Ȝ˗Ë‬‬ ‫‪X*UŠ »U4²½« tLœ∫ ∫›//¤‬‬

‫®‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪....................................................... [SETUP] rOEMð tLœ ∫›--¤‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺻﺪا‪ ،‬دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﺻﺪاى ‪TV‬‬
‫‪RQT8092‬‬ ‫]‪22, 25 ........................................... [–,+, VOLUME, – TV VOL +‬‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫‪88‬‬

‫)‪Per(08_09‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪2/3/05, 12:40 PM‬‬

 ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬

‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص دﻳﺴﻚ‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ ]‪10 ....................................... [DISC CHECK‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺮق ]‪[AC IN‬‬
‫‪Æœuý v sýË— XÝ« Ábý‬‬ ‫«‪qB² AC ‚dÐ tÐ ÁU~²Ýœ tJOU~M¼ d~½UA½ s¹‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر‪ /‬روﺷﻦ ]‪[f/I‬‬
‫‪fJŽdÐ U¹ Ë —UE²½« X&UŠ tÐ sýË— X&UŠ q¹b³ð È«dÐ «— ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— bOK‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫*‪ÆbM v ·dB ‚dÐ vL —«bI “uM¼ ÁU~²Ýœ ¨—UE²½« X&UŠ —œ ÆbO¼œ —UA‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻓﺰاﻧﻴﺪه ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ]‪23 ........................ [MULTI RE-MASTER‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺻﺪاى ﺳﻮراﻧﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ]‪23 ...... [ADVANCED SURROUND‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دك ﻧﻮار ‪21 ...................................... [DECK 1/2] 1/2‬‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪21 .............................................................. [[ REC‬‬

‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺻﺪاى ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻦ ]‪22 .......................... [MIC VOL MIN, MAX‬‬

‫‪Ä‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺸﻬﺎى ﻣﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻦ ]‪22 .................................................. [MIC 1, 2‬‬

‫‪Å‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻛﺎﺳﺖ دك ‪21 .................................................... 1‬‬

‫‪Ç‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز‪/‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ ]‪10 ........... [OPEN/CLOSE c‬‬

‫‪É‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻳﺴﻚ ]‪10 ............................... [DISC CHANGE c‬‬

‫‪Ñ‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Ö‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪10 .............................. [1 – 5] DVD/CD‬‬

‫‪Ü‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺻﺪاى ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ‪23 ........... [SUPER SOUND EQ] EQ‬‬

‫‪á‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺻﺪا ]‪23 ........................................ [SOUND EQ‬‬

‫‪à‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﮔﻮﺷﻰ ﻫﺎ ]‪25 ............................................. [PHONES‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻛﺎﺳﺖ دك ‪21 ................................................... 2‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰى‬

‫‪â‬‬
‫‪ä‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪6 .......................................... [:, DVD/CD] DVD/CD‬‬

‫‪ã‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻮار ]‪21 ....................................... [; :, TAPE‬‬

‫‪å‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮج ﻳﺎب‪/‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ]‪20 .......................... [BAND, TUNER‬‬

‫‪ç‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ‪25 ................................................................... [AUX] AUX‬‬

‫‪é‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ]‪10 ................................................. [L, STOP‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎى ﭘﺮش از دﻳﺴﻚ‪/‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪/‬ﭘﺨﺶ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮدن ﻧﻮار‪ ،‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮج ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻧﺎل‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬
‫]‪4, f, 3 /FF‬‬
‫‪è‬‬
‫‪10, 20, 21 ..................................... [g, REW/4‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن دك ‪21 ............................................. [c, DECK1] 1‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬
‫‪ë‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ]‪6, 25 ........... [DISP MODE, –DEMO‬‬

‫‪í‬‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن دك ‪21 ............................................. [c, DECK2] 2‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺻﺪا ]‪22 ......................................... [VOLUME DOWN, UP‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫‪89‬‬

‫)‪Per(08_09‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 7:36 PM‬‬

 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ در‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

bM½U ©d¹uBð j³{ È«dÐ ÊUL¼ Èœ—«b½U²Ý«® 1.1 t½ d¹uBð j³{ Xd UÐ ÈUN¼U~²Ýœ UÐ Ábý j³{
RAM
ÆÁdOž Ë vBý ÈU¼dðuOáU$ ¨Èd¹uBð DVD ÈUNMOЗ˜ ¨Èd¹uBð DVD ÁbMM$ j³{ ÈUN¼U~²Ýœ
œ—«b½U²Ý« DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ Ábý j³{ DVD-RAM
Æ©5З˜ ÈUNK¹U v¼œ r²OÝ È«dÐ bŽ«u/ vŠ«dÞ® JPEG
©17 t×H9 @® Other Menu —œ «— “Play as Data Disc” XOF{Ë ¨JPEG ÈUNK¹U gÄ È«dÐ •
ÆbOM$ »U²½«

— DVD-Video

DVD È—«œd³LKO 5З˜ U¹ Èd¹uBð DVD j³{ ÁU~²Ýœ UÐ \Ábý qU$ Ë Ábý j³{ ÈUNJ¹œ DVD-R
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ‬

Æb½uý v gÄ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« ÈË— pO½uÝU½UÄ (DVD-Video)

DVD-V
DVD-RW
(DVD-Video)
DVD ÈUNMOЗ˜ U¹ Èd¹uBð DVD ÁbMM$ j³{ ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— \Ábý qOLJð Ë Ábý j³{ ÈUNJ¹œ — +R (Video)/
ÆÈd¹uBð +RW (Video)

— Video CD
VCD
.IEC62107 UÐ —UÖ“UÝ
SVCD

ÁœËb× t$ ÈœdJKLŽ® bM$ v/  —u¹UÝ «— Áœd²Ö pOÄ œdJKLŽ vEË ¨býUÐ v —UÖ“UÝ HDCD UÐ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹«
Æ©b¼œ v ‘d²Ö «— ôUÐ `DÝ ÈUNEUM~OÝ vJOUM¹œ
CD CD
d¹UÝ tJOEUŠ—œ ¨b½« Ábý È—«cÖb$ XOÐ 20 UÐ ÊuÇ b½—«œ Èd²NÐ È«b9 HDCD UÐ Ábý È—«cÖb$ ÈU¼ CD
Æb½« Ábý È—«cÖb$ XOÐ 16 UÐ U¼ CD
XLÝ —œ t$ v²d UÐ «— ©vðu9 Ábý j³{ ÈUNJ¹œ® CD-R/RW ÈUNJ¹œ b½«uð v ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« •
ÆbOM$ \qU$ «— p¹œ U¹ b¹bM³Ð «— UN²L/ vU9 ¨Êœd$ j³{ “« bFÐ ÆbM$ gÄ XÝ« Áb¬ XÝ«—
HighMAT ÈUNJ¹œ • WMA
ÆJPEG U¹ MP3 ¨WMA ÈUNK¹U jI MP3
—œ “Play as Data Disc” XOF{Ë ¨HighMAT œdJKLŽ “« ÁœUH²Ý« ÊËbÐ gÄ È«dÐ JPEG — CD-R
ÆbOM$ »U²½« «— ©17 t×H9 @® Other Menu CD CD-RW
—œ tÐUA b$ qUý t$ XÝ« vK¹U ∫MBR® bM$ v/  —uÄUÝ «— t½UÖbMÇ XOÐ XŽdÝ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« WMA • VCD
Æ©býUÐ  ËUH² XOÐ XŽdÝ s¹bMÇ
Æœuý ÂU$« —UÖ“UÝ ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— gÄ b¼œ v Á“Uł« t$ ÈbM¹¬d \
ÆbýUÐ t²ý«b½ œułË j³{ XOF{Ë U¹ p¹œ Ÿu½ dÞUÐ œ—«u vU9 —œ ôUÐ ÈUNJ¹œ vU9 gÄ ÊUJ« XÝ« sJ2 •

‫ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎﻳﻰ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى دﻳﺴﻚ‬7 ‫ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﳕﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬7

Æ©œuý Êbý —«œ gš Vłu XÝ« sJ2® bO½e½ VÇdÐ «— UNJ¹œ ÈË— •
ÆbO¹uM½ ÈeOÇ È—U²ýu½ q¹UÝË d¹UÝ U¹ —uD/ —U$œuš UÐ Èœ vÝ XAÄ eÖd¼ •
U¹ s$UÝ t²¹d²JE« “« ÁbMM$ ÈdOÖuKł  UF¹U ¨dMOð ¨s¹eMÐ ¨ÁbMM$ „UÄ ÈU¼ ÈdáÝ« “« •
ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« eÖd¼ d~¹œ ÈUNEuK×
ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« b½uý v ÊœU²« gš Vłu t$ v¹U¼ kU× U¹ U¼ gýuÄ “« •
∫bOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« UNJ¹œ s¹« “« •
Á—Uł« ÈUNJ¹œ® œ—«œ œułË VÇdÐ “« Áb½U v/UÐ VÇ UN½¬ ÈË— t$ v¹UNJ¹œ ≠
Æ©ÁdOž U¹ È«
Æb½« Ábý —«œ gš œU¹“ vKOš t$ v¹UNJ¹œ ≠
ÆVK/ qJý bM½U ¨ÈœUŽ dOž ÈUNKJý UÐ v¹UNJ¹œ ≠
ÈUNJ¹œ ¨SACD ¨CD-G ¨CDV ¨CD-ROM ¨DVD-ROM ¨DVD-Audio
¨œuý ×Uš œuš Z¹dð—U$ “« b½«u²½ t$ ¨DVD-RAM ¨fJŽ CD Ë f$u¹œ Èd¹uBð
¨CVD qUý —«“UÐ —œ œułu “Chaoji VCD” Ë ¨5.2-GB DVD-RAM Ë 2.6-GB
ÆbMýUÐ v/ —UÖ“UÝ IEC62107 UÐ t$ SVCD Ë DVCD
‫ ﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬CDs ‫ ﻫﺎ و‬DVD ‫ﭘﺨﺶ‬
XÝ« sJ2 s¹«dÐUMÐ bM$ ‰d²M$ «— UN½¬ gÄ Áu?×½ b½«uð v UNJ¹œ s¹« ÁbMM$ bOEuð
‰U¦ È«dЮ bOýU³½ Ábý ÊUOÐ vðUOKLŽ —U²šUÝ UÐ oÐUD gÄ ‰d²M$ tÐ —œU/ tAOL¼
ÈU?LM¼«— Æ©b?ýUÐ uM È«—«œ Èd¹uBð CD d?Ö« U¹ œu?A½ Áœ«œ g¹U/ gÄ ÊU“ dÖ«
ÆbO½«uÐ X/bÐ «— p¹œ

‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎى ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬7 ‫ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ‬DVD 7

UÐ b¹UÐ ULý Êu¹e¹uKð vEË ¨bM$ gÄ «— NTSC Ë PAL b½«uð v ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« ≠ s¹« È«—«œ ÈUNJ¹œ —U$œuš —uDÐ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹«
ÆbýUÐ ÊUJ¹ p¹œ ÈË— Ábý ÁœUH²Ý« r²OÝ ÆbM$ v È—«cÖb$ Ë Áœ«œ hOAð «— UN²öŽ
Áœ«œ g¹U/ NTSC Êu¹e¹uKð ÈË— v×O×9 —uDÐ bM½«uð v/ PAL ÈUNJ¹œ ≠ ‫ ﲤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬7
Æb½uý ÆbOM$ „UÄ «d½¬ pAš È« tÇ—UÄ UÐ fáÝ Ë »uÞd È« tÇ—UÄ UÐ «b²Ð«
Êu¹e¹uKð ÈË— g¹U/ È«dÐ PAL60 tÐ «— NTSC ÈUNEUM~OÝ b½«uð v ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« ≠
Æ©NTSC Disc Output — “Video” XL/ ¨19 t×H9 @® bM$ q¹b³ð PAL

RQT8092

7
90

Per(07) 7 2/1/05, 7:35 PM

 ‫راه اﻧﺪازى ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
QUICK SETUP
5 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮاى ﺳﺎﺧﱳ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎى ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
.‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
»UA²½« «— Êu¹e¹uKð ÈË— dÐ ”d²Ýœ —œ d¹uBð ÈœË—Ë Ë Áœd4 sýË— «— Êu¹e¹uKð
CLOCK/
ÆbOM4 TIMER 1 2 3

‫“ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬DVD/CD” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬-, DVD/CD] 1 4 5 6

.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
7 8 9
Æœuý v sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ
L] XÝ« vMOÝ —œ pB¹œ v²CË
ÆbO¼œ —UA< «— [L 0 10

‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ راه اﻧﺪازى‬SETUP] + [SHIFT] 2

.‫ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬QUICK SETUP ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
, DVD/CD
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮدن‬8
8 ,9 ; ,:
9 ,; :] ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﺮده و‬ 3

(DEMO) ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ‬/‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬/QUICK SETUP ‫راه اﻧﺪازى ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﳕﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎر‬ENTER] ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ÆbO¼œ —UA< vK³C t×H( tÐ 7AÖdÐ È«dÐ «— [RETURN]
, , , ,
‫[ را‬SETUP] + [SHIFT] ‫[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺳﭙﺲ‬ENTER] 4 ENTER
.‫ﺑﺮاى اﲤﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ RETURN

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬ 6 ‫ﮔﺎم‬

, REW/ ,
, /FF

SHIFT
SETUP

ÆbM4 v —U4 t²ŽUÝ 24  —uBÐ XŽUÝ s¹«

‫“ ﻓﺸﺎر‬CLOCK” ‫[ را ﺑﺮاى اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬CLOCK/TIMER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 1
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
∫bO¼œ v —UA< «— tL4œ s¹« ULý t4 —UÐ d¼
REC PLAY CLOCK

Previous display
vK³C g¹U/
(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬7 ‫)در ﻃﻰ‬ 2
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬f g, REW/4
f, 3/FF] ‫[ ﻳﺎ‬g 4] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫زﻣﺎن ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫[ را ﺑﺮاى ﭘﺎﻳﺎن دادن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬CLOCK/TIMER] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬ 3
.‫زﻣﺎﻧﻰ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ÆœœdÖ v“UÐ b¹« Áœd4 rOEMð «— ÊU“ tJM¹« “« q³C v²UŠ tÐ g¹U/
‫ﺑﺮاى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ زﻣﺎن‬
XUŠ —œ U¹ XÝ« sýË— ÁU~²Ýœ tJOU~M¼ —U³J¹ «— ›CLOCK/TIMER¤ tL4œ
ÆbO¼œ —UA< œ—«œ —«dC ‘UÐ ÁœU¬
Æœuý v Áœ«œ g¹U/ tO½UŁ 5 È«dÐ ÊU“
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
ÆbOM4 rOEMð XCœ tÐ XCË 7ý«œ ÁU~½ È«dÐ ÁbŽUC VBŠdÐ «— XŽUÝ

(DEMO) ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ‬

s?¹« ÈU?¼d?~A¹U/ “« vJ¹ ¨œuý v Áœ“ e¹dÄ tÐ —UÐ 5Ë« È«dÐ ÁU~²Ýœ tJO½U“
Æœuý Áœ«œ g¹U/ t×H( ÈË— dÐ XÝ« sJ2 XUŠ
jÝuð «— vA¹U/ d¹uBð p¹ bO½«uð v ¨býUÐ ‘uUš XOF{Ë —œ vA¹U/ XUŠ dÖ«
ÆbO¼œ ÊUA½ vA¹U/ XUŠ Êœd4 sýË—

.‫–[ را ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‬DEMO] ‫دﻛﻤﻪ‬

.bM4 v dOOGð g¹U/ b¹—«œ t~½ «— tL4œ s¹« t4 —UÐd¼
©sýË—® DEMO ON ↔ ©‘uUš® DEMO OFF – DEMO

X?UŠ Êœd?4 ‘u?U?š U?Ð —U?E?²½« XOF{Ë —œ «— v?<d?B? ‚dÐ Ê«e?O? bO½«u?ð v
ÆbO¼œ g¼U4 vA¹U/
RQT8092

6
91

Per(04-06) 6 2/2/05, 3:27 PM

 ‫ رادﻳﻮ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬ 3 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اى‬
AM AM ‫آﻧﱳ‬
loop antenna FM ‫آﻧﱳ داﺧﻠﻰ‬
FM indoor antenna AC power supply cord
AC ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬
For Saudi
،‫آﺳﻴﺎى ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬ ،‫ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬Arabia,
،‫ﺳﻌﻮدى‬ Kuwait,
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن‬ For
‫ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬Saudi Arabia and
‫ﺳﻌﻮدى و‬ Kuwait
‫ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

the Middle
‫ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬ East, South
‫آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب‬ ‫آﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎى ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻰ و‬
Africa and Southeast Asia

.‫ را ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬AC ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﲤﺎﻣﻰ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت را ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﻛﺮدﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬ •
.(26 ‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﺧﺘﻴﺎرى آﻧﱳ )@ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ •
‫آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزى‬
ÆbOAJÐ ÊËdOÐ Ë bO½UšdâÐ «— uÖbMKÐ ÈUNLOÝ Ë 7½¬ ÈUNLOÝ ÈË— vJO²ÝöÄ gË—

AM ‫آﻧﱳ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬ 1
AM ANT
LOOP
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬/‫ رادﻳﻮ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬،‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬

ÆbOM UÄdРʬ t¹UÄ ÈË— dÐ «— 7½¬

EXT
edF 2
3
1
‫ ﻛﻮﻳﺖ و آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬،‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى‬
+
‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ را‬،AC ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬ 2
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ©´® edF
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﮕﺮ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ©≠® vJA FM ‫آﻧﱳ داﺧﻠﻰ‬
vJA s¹d²NÐ t bO½U³SâÐ v¹Uł —œ «— 7½¬
˛U²RË d~ÐU9²½« ¨X9ð v²ýuÖ êOÄ p¹ “« ÁœUH²Ý« UÐ R L
Æœ—«œ œułË X'U¹—œ
VÝUM v²OF{Ë —œ «— vK!« ÁU~²Ýœ XAÄ —œ lF«Ë výË— UÐ «— ©R® XÝ«— ·dÞ
œuý v ÁœUH²Ý« U$¬ —œ r²SOÝ t È« tIDM UÐ ÆbOM q!Ë tÐUA
ÆbO¼œ —«dF
220-240V
VSÇ —«u½

FM ANT
110-127V
(75Ω)
VOLT ADJ

(R) (L)

‰eM AC ‚dÐ e¹dÄ tÐ

‫ﺑﺮاى ﻛﻮﻳﺖ و ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺗﺼﺎل از ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن ﻧﻜﺎت اﳝﻨﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬

.‫ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬2 ‫ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬AC

‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻧﺮژى‬
 b È«dÐ ÁU~²Ýœ XSO½—«dF v²FË È˛d½« ÁdOš– È«dÐ ÆbM v ·dB © «Ë 0.9 U³¹ Î dIð® È˛d½« XÝ« ‘uUš ©›f/ I¤ ∫vK!« ÁU~²Ýœ® ›f¤ UÐ t v½U“ v²Š ÁU~²Ýœ
ÆbOM rOEMð ÁœUH²Ý« “« gOÄ Î«œb− «— tE'UŠ tÐ ◊uÐd d~¹œ r²¹¬ d¼ Ë u¹œ«— ÈU¼ ÁU~²S¹« t bOýUÐ t²ý«œ œU¹ tÐ ÆbOM ×Uš ‚dÐ “« «— tšUý Ëœ ¨œuý ÁœUH²Ý« v½ôuÞ
ÆbOM rOEMð «œb− b¹UÐ «— tE'UŠ ÈU¼ XLSF “« všdÐ ÁU~²Ýœ tÐ tšUýËœ ‰UBð« “« bFÐ

‫اﻋﻤﺎل زﻳﺮ را اﳒﺎم ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ؛‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬ 4 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
Ær¼UÐ tMN Ë u½ ÈU¼ ÈdÞUÐ “« ÁœUH²Ý« •
ÆÊU“ p¹ —œ  ËUH² ÈU¼ Ÿu½ UÐ ÈU¼ ÈdÞUÐ “« ÁœUH²Ý« •
ÆUN½¬ Êœ«œ —«dF tKFý dЫdЗœ Ë Êœd ÂdÖ • ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮى‬
ÆÊœd ÁUðu ‰UBð« U¹ Êœd “UÐ •
ÆÈeM~M U¹ v¹UOKF ÈU¼ ÈdÞUÐ Êœd ˛—Uý —œ vFÝ •
ÆbýUÐ Ábý ÁbM UN½¬ ÈË— gýuÄ t v¹U¼ ÈdÞUÐ “« ÁœUH²Ý« • VDF t bO¼œ—«dF —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M —œ È—uÞ «— U¼ ÈdÞUÐ
b½«u²O t Ábý UN½¬ XORËd²JR« XA½ Vłu U¼ ÈdÞUÐ “« XÝ—œU½ ÁœUH²Ý« ÆbMýUÐ VÝUM ÈU¼ XNł —œ ©≠ Ë ´® ÈU¼
Æœuý È“uÝ gð¬ Ë vЫdš Vłu
U¼ ÈdÞUÐ b¹—«b½ v½ôuÞ  b È«dÐ «— —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M “« ÁœUH²Ý« bBF dÖ«
ÆbO¼œ —«dF p¹—Uð Ë ¨pMš v½UJ —œ «— UN½¬ ÆbOM ×Uš ʬ ÊË—œ “« «—
XOKÐUF UÐ ÈU¼ ÈdÞUÐ “« •
7
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« œb− ˛—Uý
RQT8092 vF½U ÊËbÐ ¨ ©8 t×H! @® —Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M ‰UM~OÝ —uSMÝ ·dÞ tÐ «d½¬
Æb¹dO~Ð ÁU~²Ýœ ÈuKł —œ rOI²S —uDÐ Èd² 7 tK!U' d¦«bŠ —œ ¨Á«— dÝ —œ R6/LR6, AA, UM-3
5
92

Per(04-06) 5 2/1/05, 7:33 PM

 ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ از ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎى ﻫﻤﺮاه دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
XOHO ÈË— dÐ U¹ Ë b½UÝdÐ VOݬ ÁU~²Ýœ tÐ b½«uð v d~¹œ ÈU¼uÖbMKÐ “« ÁœUH²Ý« •
‫راه اﻧﺪازى ﺳﺎده‬
Æœ—«c~Ð vHM dŁ« «b!
ÈU¼ ◊UO²Š«  —u! s¹« dOž —œ ÆbM²HO½ Uð b¹—«c~Ð v'U! `DÝ ÈË— dÐ «— U¼uÖbMKÐ •
ÆbOýUÐ t²ý«œ dE½ —œ «— UN½¬ ◊uIÝ “« ÈdOÖuKł È«dÐ «— “ô ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬ 1 ‫ﮔﺎم‬

‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﮔﺬارى ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪف اﻳﺠﺎد ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ اﺛﺮ‬
d¹“  UJ½ tÐ Æœ—«cÖ v dOŁUð ʬ tM«œ Ë «b! ”UÐ ÈË— dÐ U¼uÖbMKÐ È—«cÖ—U v~½u~Ç ÆbýUÐ ÊËdOÐ XLÝ tÐ d²¹Ëuð dÄuÝ t bO¼œ—«dF È—uÞ «— U¼uÖbMKÐ
ÆbO¹U/ tłuð
Æb¹—«c~Ð s« Ë X9ð ÈU¼Uł ÈË— dÐ «— U¼uÖbMKÐ • d²¹Ëuð dÄuÝ
”UÐ YŽUÐ b½«uð v U¼ týuÖ Ë U¼—«u¹œ ¨n tÐ p¹œe½ vKOš U¼uÖbMKÐ È—«cÖ—U •
ÆbO½UýuáÐ rO9{ ÁœdÄ UÐ «— U¼ Ád−MÄ Ë U¼—«u¹œ ÆœœdÖ «b! v'U{«
ÆbO¼œ tK!U' ÁU~²Ýœ UÐ d² vKO 10 qF«bŠ «— uÖbMKÐ VÝUM t¹uNð È«dÐ •

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻰ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬

UN½¬ dLŽ ‰uÞ Áb½UÝ— VOݬ U¼uÖ bMKÐ tÐ ¨bMKÐ È«b! v½ôuÞ g9Ä UÐ XÝ« sJ2 •
ÆbO¼œ g¼U «—

‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬/‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬

ÆbO¼œ g¼U U¼uÖbMKÐ VOݬ “« eO¼dÄ È«dÐ «— «b! d¹“ œ—«u —œ •
Æœuý ÃUłuŽ« —UÇœ Ábý g9Ä È«b! dÖ« ≠
v dA²M Ë t²'dÖ g9Ä ÁU~²Ýœ U¹ s'dJO “« mOł tÐ tO³ý È«b! U¼uÖbMKÐ dÖ« ≠
¨d~½UÝu½ p¹ “« vÄ —œ vÄ ÈUNRUM~OÝ U¹ ¨FM g9Ä “« q!UŠ X¹“«—UĨbMM
ÆbMM v X'U¹—œ vJO½Ëd²JR« tKOÝË U¹ XSð pS¹œ
Æ«b! XOHO rOEMð ÊU“ —œ ≠ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
ÆÁU~²Ýœ Êœd sýË— U¹ ‘uUš ÊU“ —œ ≠ Æb½uý v/ t²ý«œdÐ U¼uÖbMKÐ ÈuKł È—uð

‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ رﻧﮓ در ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺷﻤﺎ رخ داد‬
‰UŠdNÐ vRË ¨b½« Ábý vŠ«dÞ Êu¹e¹uKð vJ¹œe½ —œ UN½¬ ÁœUH²Ý« È«dÐ U¼uÖbMKÐ s¹«
dOŁUð X% rOEMð  ôUŠ “« vCFÐ U¹ U¼ Êu¹e¹uKð všdÐ —œ d¹uBð XÝ« sJ2
ÆœdOÖ —«dF
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬30 ‫ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن را ﺑﺮاى ﺣﺪود‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﲔ اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻰ اﻓﺘﺎد‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
œułË qJA “uM¼ dÖ« ÆbM qŠ «— qJA b¹UÐ Êu¹e¹uKð Êœd vSOÞUMG l'— œdJKLŽ
ÆbO¼œ —«dF Êu¹e¹uKð “« dð—Ëœ È« tK!U' —œ «— U¼uÖbMKÐ ¨œ—«œ
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬
‫ اﳒﺎم‬.‫• از ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎى ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﳕﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺪادن اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ اى رخ‬.‫ و ﳑﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزى ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫داده اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮى ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻰ را در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺟﺮاء اﺣﺴﺎس ﻣﻰ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺴﻜﺎر ﺑﺎ ﲡﺮﺑﻪ اى ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﳕﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
.‫• اﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ دﻳﻮار ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬ 2 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
‫• اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
.‫وﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﻫﺎى ورودى‬7
ÊUA½ v×O×! —uDÐ d¹uBð XÝ« sJ2 ¨Êbý vá “« XþUHŠ XKFÐ t «dÇ
ÆœuA½ Áœ«œ
COMPONENT VIDEO IN Êu¹e¹uKð ÈULM¼«— tÇd²'œ tÐ Ë ¨bOM ‘uUš ‰UBð« “« q³F «— Êu¹e¹uKð •
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬ ÆbO¹U/ tFł«d
VIDEO IN ‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ورودى وﻳﺪﻳﻮ‬7
©XSO½ qUý® COMPONENT
VIDEO IN

VIDEO COMPONENT Y
OUT VIDEO OUT

‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ PB PB VIDEO COMPONENT

OUT VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN

‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬ Y PR
‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
PR PB
‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬
S VIDEO ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬ Y PR
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬
OUT ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬
©XSO½ qUý® S VIDEO ©XÝ« qUý® ©XSO½ qUý®
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬

S VIDEO IN ‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ورودى‬7
ÁœUH²Ý« uOÝdÖËdÄ U¹ fORd²M¹«  —uBÐ vłËdš È«dÐ Ê«u²O «— U¼ ‰UMOdð s¹«
‰UBð«ÆXý«œ S VIDEO OUT vłËdš ‰UMOdð tÐ X³S½ Èd²NÐ d¹uBð Ë Æœd VIDEO COMPONENT
OUT VIDEO OUT
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮن‬
“« «bł «— ©Y®—u½ Ë ©PB/PR®  ËUH² v~½— ÈUNRUM~OÝ U¼ ‰UMOdð s¹« o¹dÞ “« ‫ﭘﺸﺖ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬ PB S VIDEO ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ©XSO½ qUý®
Æœuý q!UŠ Èd²NÐ v²'U¹“UÐ ÈUN~½— Uð bMJO ×Uš r¼ ‫اﺻﻠﻰ‬ Y PR ©XSO½ qUý® S-VIDEO
IN
œ—«œ v~²SÐ —u²O½u U¹ Êu¹e¹uKð tÐ v¹u¹b¹Ë ÈœË—Ë ÈUNRUMOdð «eł« Õdý • S VIDEO
OUT
q!Ë @½dL¼ ‰UMOdð tЫ— qÐU Æ©Y/CB/CR ¨Y/B-Y/R-Y ¨Y/PB/PR ∫‰U¦®
ÆbOM
‫ﺑﺮاى ﺑﺮﺧﻮردارى از ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‬ S VIDEO OUT ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎل ﺧﺮوﺟﻰ‬
U¹ ©525p U¹® 480p U¹ —UÖ“UÝ v½u¹e¹uKð tÐ «— d¹uBð ÈœË—Ë ¡«eł« ÈUNRUMOdð Èd¹uBð ©Y® —u½ Ë ©C® @½— ÈU¼ ‰UM~OÝ È“UÝ«bł UÐ S VIDEO ‰UMOdð
—«dFdÐ XSO½ —UÖ“UÝ t v½u¹e¹uKð tÐ ‰UBð« dÖ«® ÆbOM q!Ë ©625p U¹® 576p t−O²½® ÆbM v œU−¹« VIDEO OUT vłËdš ‰UMOdð d¹uBð “« dð `{«Ë
Æ©bý b¼«u9½ Áœ«œ g¹U/ v²Ý—bÐ d¹uBð œuý ©Æœ—«œ v~²SÐ Êu¹e¹uKð tÐ vFF«Ë
RQT8092

4
93

Per(04-06) 4 2/2/05, 1:31 PM

 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت‬ ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎى اﳝﻨﻰ‬

‫ﺷﺮوع‬ ‫ﻗﺮار دادن‬

3 .............................................................................. ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎى اﳝﻨﻰ‬ ¨ôUÐ ÈUNð—«dŠ tł—œ ¨bOý—uš rOI² —u½ “« —ËbÐ ·U2 v×DÝ ÈË— «— ÁU~²Ýœ
3 ....................................................................................... ‫ﻟﻮازم ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
d?¹UÝ Ë gýu?Ä tÐ bM½«u?ð v q «u?Ž s¹« ÆbO¼œ —«d?6 b¹bý ÈU¼ ‘“d? Ë ¨ôUÐ XÐuÞ—
Æbý b¼«uš d²¼Uðu ÁU~²Ýœ dLŽ s¹«dÐUMÐ Ë ¨bM½UÝdÐ VOݬ ÁU~²Ýœ ¡«eł«
‫راه اﻧﺪازى ﺳﺎده‬ ÆbO¼b½ —«d6 ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— «— 5~MÝ ÂUł«
4 .......................................................... ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﱳ‬1 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
4 .......................................................... ‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬2 ‫ﮔﺎم‬ ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬

5 .................................. ‫ رادﻳﻮ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬،‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬3 ‫ﮔﺎم‬

5 ............................................................. ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬4 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
6 .................................. QUICK SETUP ‫ راه اﻧﺪازى ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬5 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
6 ................................................................. ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻣﺎن‬6 ‫ﮔﺎم‬
6 ............................................................ (DEMO) ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ‬
7 ................................................................................ ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت دﻳﺴﻚ‬
8 ........................................................................ ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Æb?ýU?Ð Áb?¹b?½ V?O?ݬ Ë Áb?ý qB² `O×2 —uDÐ AC ‚d?Ð r?O?Ý t b¹u?ý s?¾LD
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى دﻳﺴﻚ‬
10 ......................................................... ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ — اﺻﻮل اوﻟﻴﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
12 ........................................................ ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ — ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى راﺣﺖ‬
/(QUICK OSD) v½uM gÄ ÈUN²UŠ g¹U/ Ø p¹œ  UŽöÞ«
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت‬/‫ﻟﻮازم ﻫﻤﺮاه‬/‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎى اﳝﻨﻰ‬
—U?AC ÁU~²Ýœ tÐ XÝ« sJ2 qLŽ s¹« ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« ôUÐ ˛U²Ë UÐ ÈËdO½ lÐUM “«
ÆœœdÖ È“uÝ gð¬ Vłu Ë Áœ—ˬ
ÈU?N½UJ U¹ v²A p¹ —œ ÁU~²Ýœ VB½ ÂU~M¼ ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« DC ÈËdO½ l³M “«
ÆbOM pÇ X6bÐ «— ËdO½ l³M bMM v ÁœUH²Ý« DC ‚dÐ “« t Èd~¹œ
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ از ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬
rOÝ Æœuý v~²CdÖ ‚dÐ Ë È“uÝ gð¬ Vłu b½«uð v Áb¹œ VOݬ rOÝ Ë h6U½ ‰UBð«
ÆbO¼b½ —«d6 ʬ ÈË— 5~MÝ ÂUł« U¹ ¨bOMJ½ rš ¨bOAJ½ «—
AC ‚dÐ rOÝ ÊbOA Æb¹dO~Ð tšUýËœ “« «d½¬ bOM v «bł e¹dÄ “« «— rOÝ tJO U~M¼
Æœuý v~²CdÖ ‚dÐ Vłu b½«uð v

Æœuý v v~²CdÖ ‚dÐ YŽUÐ qLŽ s¹« Æb¹dO~½ fOš XÝœ UÐ «— tšUýËœ
/(ADVANCED DISC REVIEW) gÄ È«dÐ UN½«uMŽ Êœd —Ëd
Øl¹dÝ œb− gÄ Ø (CD MODE) CD »ËUM² gÄ ‫اﺟﺴﺎم ﺧﺎرﺟﻰ‬
XŽdÝ Êœd ÷uŽØ ÂË“ X³½ Êœd ÷uŽØuKł ·dÞ tÐ tO½UŁ 30 È«dÐ Êœd œ—
Ø vðu2 ÈU¼ tFD6 Êœd ÷uŽ Ø tN¹Ë«“ »U²½«Ë sUÝ d¹uBð gšdÇØ gÄ ‚d?Ð Vłu b½«u?ð v? qLŽ s¹« ÆbM²CUOÐ ÁU~²Ýœ qš«œ tÐ Èe?KC ¡UOý« bO¼b½ Á“Uł«
gÄ —«dJð Ø U¼ f¹u½d¹“ Êœd ÷uŽ Æœuý ÁU~²Ýœ Êœd —U bÐ U¹ v~²CdÖ
14 ............................................ ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﻧﻮﻳﮕﻴﺸﻦ‬ U¹ v~²CdÖ ‚dÐ Vłu? b½«uð v qLŽ s¹« Æœe¹d?Ð ÁU~²Ýœ qš«œ vF¹U bO¼b½ Á“Uł«
/CD ÈË— “« Ábý »U²½« tFD6 “« gÄØ Áœ«œ ÈUNJ¹œ gÄ ‚d?Ð “« «— ÁU?~?²Ýœ XŽd??Ð ¨œU?²?C« v?6UHð« 5MÇ dÖ« Æœu?ý ÁU?~²Ýœ XÝ—œU?½ œd?J?KLŽ
RAM ÈUNJ¹œ gÄ Ø HighMATTM ÈUNJ¹œ gÄ Æb¹dO~Ð ”U9 —UdOLFð UÐ Ë ÁbOA
16 .......................................... ‫ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻰ‬/ ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ_ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰى‬ È«—«œ U?N?½¬ Æb?OM È—«œœu?š ÁU?~?²?Ýœ qš«œ U¹ ÈË— U?NA Ád?AŠ Êœd? Èd?áÝ« “«
vCœUBð gÄ Ø ©tM¹eÖ 32 Uð® gÄ Èe¹— t U½dÐ bM½«u?ð v ÁU~²Ýœ qš«œ Êbý ÈdáÝ«  —u?2—œ t? bMýUÐ v ÁbMM qF²A ÈU¼“UÖ
ALL-DISC vCœUBð gÄ Æb½œdÖ qF²A
17 ................................... ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻨﻮى ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﳕﺎﻳﺸﻰ‬
Other Settings ØvK2« ÈuM ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
18 ............................... ‫دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ _ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دادن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﭘﺨﺶ‬
v/ sýË— U¼d?~?½U?A½ ¨XÝ« Ábý lD6 «b2 dÖ« ÆbOMJ½ dOLFð ÊUðœuš «— ÁU?~²Ýœ
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى رادﻳﻮ‬ Áœ«œ `O{uð ULM¼«— tÇd²Cœ s¹« —œ t Èd~¹œ tK¾ d¼ U¹ ¨œuý v œU−¹« œËœ ¨b½uý
20 ............................................................................................... ‫رادﻳﻮ‬ “U− —UJ¹ËdÝ U¹ —UdOLFð UÐ Ë Áœd «bł «— AC ‚dÐ rOÝ ¨b¼œ v Œ— XÝ« ÁbA½
UNU½U »U²½« Ø Ãu rOEMð Ø v²Ýœ vÐU¹ Ãu tKOÝuÐ ÁU~²Ýœ dÖ« b²CUOÐ ‚UHð« b½«uð v ÁU~²Ýœ vЫdš U¹ v~²CdÖ ‚dÐ Æb¹dO~Ð ”U9
Æœuý ÷uŽ ʬ  UFD6 U¹ “UÐ ¨dOLFð È« tÐd& r hý
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى ﻧﻮار‬ «bł UÐ «d½¬ bOH dLŽ œdOÖ v/ —«d6 ÁœUH²Ý« œ—u v½ôuÞ vðb È«dÐ ÁU~²Ýœ dÖ«
21 ............................................................................... ‫ﻧﻮارﻫﺎى ﻛﺎﺳﺖ‬
ÆbO¼œ g¹«eC« ËdO½ l³M “« ÁU~²Ýœ Êœd
j³{ØgÄ
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻫﺎى ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻮازم ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
22 ......................................................................... ‫ﻟﺬت ﺑﺮدن از ﻛﺎراوﻛﻪ‬
Ø œuš tË«—U t−O²½ j³{ È«dÐ Ø u« —dOŁQð rOEMð
ÊUðœuš È«b2 j³{ È«dÐ ÆbOM v¹UÝUMý Ë pÇ «— v³½Uł  UIKF² UHD
Î
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬
23 ............................................................. ‫ﻣﺤﺪوده ﺻﺪا و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪا‬
fl t½UÖbMÇ È«b2 ÁbO½«eC« Ø t²CdAOÄ b½«—uÝ vDO× È«b2 ‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮى‬1 AC ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬
“« ÁœUH²Ý« Ø «b2 XOHO Ë Á“uŠ dOOGð Ø b¹d³Ð  c vFO³Þ —UOÐ È«b2 “« ،‫ ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى‬
dðdÐ È«b2 d~½UL¼ “« ÁœUH²Ý« Ø (MANUAL EQ) v²Ýœ d~½UL¼ ‫ آﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎى ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻰ و‬،‫آﺳﻴﺎى ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬
24 ............................................................................ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺎﳝﺮﻫﺎ‬
»«uš d1Uð Ø j³{ ØgÄ d1Uð
25 ............................................................................ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬
AM ‫ آﻧﱳ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ اى‬1
Ød¹uBð Êœd ÁdOð Ø —Uœuš výu Uš œdJKLŽ Ø «b2 lD6
vK2« ÁU~²Ýœ g¹U/ Êœd ÷uŽ
25 ............................................................ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎى دﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى و‬
Ø Êu¹e¹uKð p¹ UÐ —U Ø výuÖ “« ÁœUH²Ý«Øvł—Uš ÁU~²Ýœ p¹ “« ÁœUH²Ý« ‫ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬
Ø—Ëœ Á«— “« ‰d²M Ë vK2« ÁU~²Ýœ ÈË— ÈUN²UŠ Êœ«œ dOOGð
fl v~½Uš ÈULMOÝ Ø ‰U²O−¹œ vłËdš Ø È—UO²š« 7½¬  ôUBð«
FM ‫ آﻧﱳ داﺧﻠﻰ‬1
dðbM9—b6 È«b2 “«  c
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور‬1
27 ....................................................................................... ‫ﻟﻐﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ (N2QAJB000138)
28 .......................................................................... ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎى ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻰ‬ ‫ ﻋﺪد ﺑﺎﻃﺮى ﺑﺮاى ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از‬2
30 .............................................................................. ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻰ‬ ‫راه دور‬
31 .................................................... ‫ﺳﻴﻨﻰ دﻳﺴﻚ‬/‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى از دﻳﺴﻚ‬
32 ........................................................................................ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارى‬
33 ............................................................................................ Memo
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
RQT8092
d¹UÝ È«dÐ «— ʬ Æœuý v ÁœUH²Ý« ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« È«dÐ jIC ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« Á«dL¼ ‚dÐ rOÝ
3 ÆbOMJ½ ÁœUH²Ý« q¹UÝË
94

Per(02-03) 3 2/2/05, 3:26 PM

 ‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط !‬
‫در اﻳ ﻦ دﺳ ﺘﮕﺎ ه ا ز ﻟﻴ ﺰر اﺳ ﺘ ﻔﺎ ده ﺷ ﺪه اﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮى ﮔﺮاﻣﻰ‬
‫اﺳ ـﺘـﻔـﺎده ا ز ﻛ ـﻨﺘ ـﺮ ل ﻫـﺎ ﻳـﺎ ﺗـﻨـﻈـﻴـﻤﺎ ت ﻳـﺎ اﺟ ـﺮا ى‬ ‫‪Æ.dJA²1 ULý “« ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« b¹dš È«dÐ‬‬
‫دﺳﺘ ﻮراﻟ ﻌ ـﻤﻠ ﻬﺎﻳﻰ ﻛ ﻪ در ا ﻳـﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧـﺸﺪ ه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﳑ ـﻜﻦ ا ﺳـﺖ ﻣ ﻮﺟـﺐ ﺷﻮ د ﻛـﻪ د ر ﻣ ﻌـﺮض ﺗﺎﺑـﺶ ﻫﺎ ى‬
‫‪ÆbOM/ tF3UD1 XAbÐ «— UNKLF3«—u²Ýœ ÎUHD3 vM1« Ë tMONÐ œdJKLŽ È«dÐ‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻗﺮ ار ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧ ـﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﭘﻮ ﺷـﺶ دﺳ ـﺘﮕـﺎ ه ر ا ﺑﺎز ﻛ ـﺮد ه و آ ن را ﺧﻮدﺗـﺎ ن‬ ‫‪SC-VK62D‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SA-VK62D‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را ﺑﻪ اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺠﺮب واﮔﺬار ﻛﻨ ﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫اﺧﻄﺎر‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دادن ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳـﻮزى‪ ،‬ﺑـﺮق ﮔـﺮﻓـﺘـﮕـﻰ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘـﮕـﺎه را در ﻣـﻌـﺮض ﺑـﺎران‪،‬‬
‫رﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼـﻜـﻴـﺪن آب‪ ،‬ﺗـﺮﺷـﺢ آب ﻗـﺮار ﻧـﺪﻫـﻴـﺪ و ﺷـﺊ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﻠﺪان‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ روى دﺳﺘـﮕـﺎه ﻗـﺮار‬
‫داده ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺳﻰ‬
‫‪SB-VK62‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﻣﻮاردى ﻛﻪ ذﻛﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎى ﳕﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ‬
‫دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮاى آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎى اﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺎﺳﺎً ﺑﺮاى ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از راه دور ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ،‬وﻟﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ را در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل از‬
‫راه دور ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ روى دﺳﺘﮕﺎه اﺻﻠﻰ اﺟﺮا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط!‬ ‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى و ﻛﻮﻳﺖ‬

‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه را در ﻗﻔـﺴـﻪ ﻛـﺘـﺎب‪ ،‬داﺧـﻞ ﻛـﺎﺑـﻴـﻨـﺖ ﻳـﺎ در‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪AC‬‬ ‫½‪‚dÐ rOÝ œ—u1 —œ È« t²J‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎى ﻣﺤﺪود دﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪرﺟﺎت‪/‬ﻟﻮازم ﻫﻤﺮاه‪/‬اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻬﺎى اﳝﻨﻰ‬

‫ﻓﻀﺎى ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﺑﺮاى ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ وﺟﻮد دارد‪ .‬ﺑﺮاى ﭘﻴﺸﮕـﻴـﺮى از‬ ‫‪Æb¹—«œdÐ «— ‰UBð« gýuÄ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻰ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗـﺶ ﺳـﻮزى ﻧـﺎﺷـﻰ از اﻓـﺰاﻳـﺶ‬
‫ﻃﺮز ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻮز‬
‫درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌـﻦ ﺷـﻮﻳـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺮده ﻳـﺎ ﭘـﺎرﭼـﻪ اى‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬﻫﺎى ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ را ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﻜﺮده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪©B Ë A ÈU¼ qJý® ÆXÝ«  ËUH²1 AC ‚dÐ tšUýËœ Ÿu½ tÐ t²>Ð “uO# ÈUł‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬﻫﺎى ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ را ﺑﺎ روزﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬روﻣﻴﺰى‪ ،‬ﭘﺮده‪ ،‬و ﭼﻴـﺰﻫـﺎى‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ÆbOM/ ‰U³½œ «— d¹“ ÈU¼ v¹ULM¼«— Ë bOM/ pÇ «— tšUýËœ ÊœuÐ VÝUM1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ÆbMýUÐ  ËUH²1 AC ‚dÐ vFA«Ë ÈU¼ tšUýËœ UÐ XÝ« sJ2 U¼ qJý‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﻠﻪ روﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﻊ روﺷﻦ‪ ،‬را روى دﺳﺘﮕـﺎه ﻗـﺮار‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ÆbOM/ “UÐ v²ýuÖ êOÄ UÐ «— “uO# ‘uÄ—œ Æ1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﻳﻬﺎ را در ﻇﺮوف آﺷﻐﺎل ﻣﺨﺼﻮص دور ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪A‬‬
‫‪t?Ð v?²?>?¹UÐ ‚dÐ tšUýËœ Ë ¨Ábý Áœ«œ —«d?A ‚d?Ð e¹d?Ä t?Ð p¹œe?½ v?²?>?¹UÐ ÁU~²Ýœ‬‬
‫‪ÆbýUÐ vÝd²Ýœ qÐUA X3uNÝ tÐ qJA1 “ËdÐ  —u9 —œ t/ býUÐ t²#dÖ —«dA vð—u9‬‬
‫‪ÁœUH²Ý« ‰öš —œ Á«dL¼ ÈUNMHKð “« t/ «— v¹u¹œ«—  ôö²š« ÁU~²Ýœ s¹« XÝ« sJ2‬‬
‫½‪sHKð 5Ð tK9U# ÎUHD3 ¨bý d¼Uþ vðôö²š« 5MÇ dÖ« ÆbM/ X#U¹—œ «— b½uý v1 výU‬‬
‫¼‪ÆbO¼œ g¹«e#« ÁU~²Ýœ UÐ «— Á«dL‬‬
‫«‪ÆXÝ« Ábý t²#dÖ dE½ —œ vłdý È«u¼ Ë »¬ —œ ÁœUH²Ý« È«dÐ ÁU~²Ýœ s¹‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاى ﻋﺮﺑﺴﺘﺎن ﺳﻌﻮدى‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﻳﺖ و آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‪:‬‬
‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ AC‬ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ از‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده وﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﳕﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ).‬ﺑﺮاى ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎت‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ً‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪B‬‬
‫‪“uO# ‘uÄ—œ‬‬

‫®‪©ÁU~²Ýœ qš«œ‬‬

‫‪ÆbOM/ q9Ë U¹ t²>Ð «— “uO# ‘uÄ—œ Ë bOM/ ÷uŽ «— “uO#‬‬ ‫‪Æ2‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪A‬‬

‫‪©dá1¬ 5® “uO#‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪B‬‬

‫‪©dá1¬ 5® “uO#‬‬

‫‪RQT8092‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪95‬‬

‫)‪Per(02-03‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 12:04 PM‬‬

 ‫‪ULM¼«— tÇd²#œ‬‬
‫إرﺷﺎدات اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دى وى دى ‪ DVD‬اﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻳﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ‬

‫‪Model No.‬‬ ‫‪SC-VK62D‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫«‪È«—«œ t?
«— Èd?¹u?B?ð DVD b?½«u??ð v?* g?)?Ä ÁU?~?²?Ýœ s?¹‬‬
‫‪ÆbM
g)Ä «— býUÐ v* “ALL” U¹ tIDM* Á—ULý ÈUN³7ÇdÐ‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫¬‪¨vÐuMł ÈUI¹d#¬ ¨t½UO* ÈUOÝ‬‬
‫‪X¹u
Ë ÈœuFÝ ÊU²7ÐdŽ‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫¬‪vdý »uMł ÈUOÝ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬آﺳﻴﺎى ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮﻗﻰ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫رﻗﻢ اﻷﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳـﻘـﻮم ﻫﺬا اﳌﺸـﻐـﻞ ﺑـﻌـﺮض اﺳـﻄـﻮاﻧـﺔ ‪-DVD‬اﻟﻔـﻴـﺪﻳـﻮﻳـﺔ‬
‫اﳌﻌﺮوﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ رﻗﻢ اﻷﻗﻠﻴﻢ او”‪.“ALL‬‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫اﻻﻗﻠﻴﻢ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺮق اﻷوﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﻮب أﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫اﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﻌﻮدﻳﺔ‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪ :‬ﺟﻨﻮب ﺷﺮق آﺳﻴﺎ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪s¹« ÎU?H?D? ¨ÁU?~²Ýœ rOEMð Ë Èd?OÖ—UJÐ ¨Êœd?
—«d? dÐ “« q³‬‬
‫‪ÆbO½«u)Ð q*U
—uDÐ «— ULM¼«— tÇd²#œ‬‬
‫«“ ¬‪ÆbOM
È—«bN~½ ÁbM¹¬—œ vFłd* Ê«uMFÐ Ê‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮاءة ﻫﺬه اﻹرﺷﺎدات ﻛﻠﻴﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ أو‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﳉﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ ﳌﺮاﺟﻌﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ اﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬

‫‪RQT8092-G‬‬ ‫‪GC GS GCS En Pe Ar‬‬

‫‪L0205KW0‬‬

‫‪Per(01)1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2/1/05, 12:02 PM‬‬